FCC ID: ZKZ-MX-12 Computer System Graupner HoTT

 

33112.mx-12 HoTT.2.gb H O P P I N G . T E L E M E T R Y . T R A N S M I S S I O N mx-12 H O P P I N G . T E L E M E T R Y . T R A N S M I S S I O N GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG POSTFACH 1242 D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK GERMANY http://www.graupner.de Modi cations and availability reserved. Graupner products are only available through model shops. We will gladly inform you of your nearest stockist. We accept no liability for printing errors. Although we have carefully checked the information contained in these instructions and checked that it is correct, we can accept no liability of any kind for mistakes, incomplete information and printing errors. Graupner reserves the right to alter the characteristics and features of the software and hardware at any time and without prior noti cation. Printed in Germany PN.PG-02 Programming Manual 33112_Um_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd 1 33112_Um_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd 1 06.06.2011 19:46:36 06.06.2011 19:46:36 Contents General Information Safety Notes .................................................................. 3 Safety notes and handling instructions relating to Nickel-Metal-Hydride rechargeable batteries ............ 8 Foreword ...................................................................... 10 Description of radio control set .................................... 11 Recommended battery chargers ................................. 13 Transmitter power supply ............................................. 14 Receiver power supply ................................................ 16 Environmental protection notes ................................... 16 Adjusting the stick length ............................................. 17 Opening the transmitter case ...................................... 17 Changing the stick mode ............................................. 18 Description of transmitter............................................. 20 Transmitter controls ............................................... 20 Rear of transmitter ................................................. 21 Optional headphone socket ................................... 21 PC socket .............................................................. 21 Data socket ........................................................... 21 DSC (Direct Servo Control) ................................... 22 Data storage / card slot ......................................... 22 Screen and keypad ............................................... 24 Operating the Data Terminal ............................... 25 Short-cuts .............................................................. 25 Language selection, screen contrast ..................... 26 On-screen warnings .............................................. 28 On-screen function elds....................................... 28 Position indicator, rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8 ....... 29 Input lock ............................................................... 29 Using the transmitter for the rst time .......................... 30 Using the receiver for the rst time .............................. 32 Installation notes .......................................................... 34 Receiving system power supply ............................ 35 De nition of terms ....................................................... 38 Switch and transmitter control assignment .................. 39 2 Contents 33112_Um_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd 2 33112_Um_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd 2 Digital trims .................................................................. 40 Fixed-wing model aircraft............................................. 42 Receiver socket sequence .................................... 43 Model helicopters ........................................................ 46 Receiver socket sequence .................................... 47 Program descriptions Setting up a new model memory ................................. 48 Model memories ......................................................52 Base settings (model) Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 56 Binding receivers ............................................. 61 Range-checking .............................................. 62 Model helicopter .................................................... 64 Binding receivers ............................................. 70 Range-checking .............................................. 71 Servo settings ..........................................................72 Transmitter control settings Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 74 Model helicopter .................................................... 76 Throttle limit function ....................................... 79 Basic idle setting ............................................. 79 D/R Expo Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 82 Model helicopter .................................................... 84 Phase trim ( xed-wing) ............................................86 What is a mixer? .......................................................... 88 Wing mixer ..............................................................88 Heli mixer ................................................................94 Setting up throttle and collective pitch curves ..... 100 Auto-rotation setting ............................................ 104 General notes re. freely programmable mixers .......... 106 Free mixers ...........................................................107 Examples............................................................. 111 Swashplate mixers ...............................................112 Servo display .........................................................113 Basic settings ........................................................114 Fail-Safe .................................................................116 Telemetry ...............................................................117 Setting & Data view ............................................. 118 Satellite operation with two receivers ............ 126 Simple data view ................................................. 128 RF status view ..................................................... 130 Voice trigger ........................................................ 131 Trainer mode .........................................................134 Wiring diagrams .................................................. 137 Wireless HoTT system ........................................ 138 Info display ...........................................................142 Programming examples Introduction ................................................................ 144 Fixed-wing model aircraft First steps ............................................................ 146 Including an electric power system ..................... 150 E-motor and up-aileron using Ch1 stick .............. 152 Operating timers .................................................. 155 Use of ight phases ............................................. 156 Servos running in parallel .................................... 157 Deltas and ying wings .............................................. 158 F3A models ............................................................... 162 Model helicopters ...................................................... 166 Appendix Appendix .................................................................... 174 Conformity declaration ............................................... 177 FCC Information ........................................................ 178 Guarantee certi cate ................................................. 179 Guarantee certi cate Servicestellen / Service / Service aprs-vente Graupner-Zentralservice Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim Servicehotline

(+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*

Montag - Freitag 9:30-11:30 + 13:00-15:00 Uhr Belgie/Belgique/Nederland Jan van Mouwerik Slot de Houvelaan 30 NL 3155 Maasland VT

(+31) 10 59 13 59 4 Luxembourg Kit Flammang 129, route dArlon L 8009 Strassen

(+35) 23 12 23 2 Cesk Republika Slovensk Republika RC Service Z. Hnizdil Letecka 666/22 CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne

(+42) 2 33 31 30 95 Espana Anguera Hobbies C/Terrassa 14 E 43206 Reus (Tarragona).

(+34) 97 77 55 32 0 info@anguera-hobbies.com France Graupner France Grard Altmayer 86, rue St. Antoine F 57601 Forbach-Oeting

(+33) 3 87 85 62 12 Italia GiMax Via Manzoni, no. 8 I 25064 Gussago

(+39) 030 25 22 73 2 Schweiz Graupner Service Wehntalerstrasse 37 CH 8181 Hri

(+41) 43 26 66 58 3 Sverige Baltechno Electronics Box 5307 S 40227 Gteborg

(+46) 31 70 73 00 0 United Kingdom Graupner Service Brunel Drive GB, NEWARK, Nottingham-

shire NG242EG

(+44) 16 36 61 05 39

* 0,14 Cent / Minute aus dem Festnetz der deutschen T-Com. Abweichende Preise fr Anrufe aus Mobilfunknet-

zen oder aus dem Festnetz anderer Anbieter mglich. Wir gewhren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von This product is warrantied for Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de24 Monaten months mois Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrae 94 - 96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewhrt ab dem Kaufdatum auf dieses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die Garantie gilt nur fr die bereits beim Kauf des Produktes vorhandenen Material- oder Funktionsmngel. Schden, die auf Abntzung, berlastung, falsches Zubehr oder unsachgeme Behand-

lung zurckzufhren sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlos-

sen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewhrleistunsansprche des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berhrt. Bitte berprfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rcksendung das Produkt genau auf Mngel, da wir Ihnen bei Mngelfreiheit die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen mssen. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrae 94 - 96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies only to such material or operational defects witch are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The users legal rights and claims under guarantee are not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects be-

fore you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of faults. La socit Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrae 94-

96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois compter de la date dachat. La garantie ne sapplique quaux dfauts de matriel et de fonctionnement du produit achet. Les dommages dus une usure, une surcharge, lemploi daccessoires non compatibles ou une manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits lgaux des consommateurs. Avant toute rclamation ou retour de matriel, vri ez prcisment les dfauts ou vices constats, car si le matriel est conforme et quaucun dfaut na t constat par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le cot de cette intervention. Garantie-Urkunde Warranty certi cate / Certi cat de garantie mx-12 HoTT Set

Order No. 33112 bergabedatum:

Date of purchase/delivery:

Date dachat :

Name des Kufers:

Owners name:

Nom de I`acheteur :

Strae, Wohnort:

Complete address:

Adresse complte :

Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhndlers:

Stamp and signature of dealer:

Cachet et signature du dtaillant :

Guarantee certi cate 179 06.06.2011 19:46:54 06.06.2011 19:46:54 Safety Notes Please read carefully!

We all want you to have many hours of pleasure in our mutual hobby of modelling, and safety is an important aspect of this. It is absolutely essential that you read right through these instructions and take careful note of all our safety recommendations. We also strongly recommend that you register without delay at http://

www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration, as this ensures that you automatically receive the latest information relating to your product by e-mail. If you are a beginner to the world of radio-controlled model aircraft, boats and cars, we strongly advise that you seek out an experienced modeller in your eld, and ask him or her for help and advice. If you ever dispose of this transmitter, these instructions must be passed on to the new owner. Application This radio control system may only be used for the purpose for which the manufacturer intended it, i. e. for operating radio-controlled models which do not carry hu-

mans. No other type of use is approved or permissible. Safety notes SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT and RADIO-CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT PLAYTHINGS Even small models can cause serious personal injury and damage to property if they are handled incompe-

tently, or if an accident occurs due to the fault of others. Technical problems in electrical and mechanical sys-

tems can cause motors to rev up or burst into life unex-

pectedly, with the result that parts may y off at great speed, causing considerable injury. Short-circuits of all kinds must be avoided at all times. Short-circuits can easily destroy parts of the radio con-

trol system, but even more dangerous is the acute risk of re and explosion, depending on the circumstances and the energy content of the batteries. Aircraft and boat propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes and all other rotating parts which are driven by a motor or engine represent a constant injury hazard. Do not touch these items with any object or part of your body. Remember that a propeller spinning at high speed can easily slice off a nger! Ensure that no other object can make contact with the driven components. Never stand in the primary danger zone, i. e. in the rota-

tional plane of the propeller or other rotating parts, when the motor is running or the drive battery is connected. Please note that a glowplug engine or electric motor could burst into life accidentally if the receiving system is switched on when you are transmitting the transmitter. To be on the safe side, disconnect the fueltank or the ight battery. Protect all electronic equipment from dust, dirt, damp, and foreign bodies. Avoid subjecting the equipment to vibration and excessive heat or cold. Radio control equipment should only be used in normal ambient temperatures, i. e. within the range -15C to +55C. Avoid subjecting the equipment to shock and pressure. Check the units at regular intervals for damage to cases and leads. Do not re-use any item which is damaged or has become wet, even after you have dried it out thor-

oughly. Use only those components and accessories which we expressly recommend. Be sure to use only genuine matching Graupner connectors of the same design with contacts of the same material. When deploying cables ensure that they are not under strain, are not tightly bent (kinked) or broken. Avoid sharp edges, as they can chafe through insulating materials. Before you use the system, check that all connectors are pushed home rmly. When disconnecting compo-

nents, pull on the connectors themselves not on the wires. It is not permissible to carry out any modi cations to the RC system components, as any such changes invalidate both your operating licence and your insurance cover. Installing the receiving system In a model aircraft the receiver must be packed in soft foam and stowed behind a stout bulkhead, and in a model boat or car it should be protected effectively from dust and spray. The receiver must not make direct contact with the fuselage, hull or chassis at any point, otherwise motor vibration and landing shocks will be transmitted directly to it. When installing the receiving system in a model with a glowplug or petrol engine, be sure to install all the components in well-protected positions, so that no exhaust gas or oil residues can reach the units and get inside them. This applies above all to the ON / OFF switch, which is usually installed in the outer skin of the model. Secure the receiver in such a way that the aerial, servo leads and switch harness are not under any strain. The receiver aerial should be at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts and any wiring which is not connected directly to the receiver. This includes steel and carbon bre components, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps, cabling of all kinds, etc.. Ideally the receiver should be installed well away from 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:3 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:3 Safety Notes 3 06.06.2011 19:39:13 06.06.2011 19:39:13 Safety Notes any other installed equipment in the model, but in an easily accessible position. Under no circumstances al-

low servo leads to run close to the aerial, far less coiled round it!

Ensure that cables are fastened securely, so that they cannot move close to the receiver aerial when the model is ying. Deploying the receiver aerial(s) The receiver and its aerials should be installed as far away as possible from all kinds of power system. If your model has a carbon bre fuselage, the aerial tips must always be deployed outside the fuselage. The orientation of the aerial(s) is not critical, but we recommend install-

ing them vertically (upright) in the model. If the receiver features aerial diversity (two aerials), the second aerial should be arranged at 90 to the rst. Installing the servos Always install servos using the vibration-damping grommets supplied. The rubber grommets provide some degree of protection from mechanical shock and severe vibration. Installing control linkages The basic rule is that all linkages should be installed in such a way that the pushrods move accurately, smoothly and freely. It is particularly important that all servo output arms can move to their full extent without fouling or rub-

bing on anything, or being obstructed mechanically at any point in their travel. It is essential that you should be able to stop your motor at any time. With a glow motor this is achieved by adjust-

ing the throttle so that the barrel closes completely when you move the throttle stick and trim to their end-points. Ensure that no metal parts are able to rub against each other, e. g. when controls are operated, when parts rotate, or when motor vibration affects the model. Metal-

to-metal contact causes electrical noise which can interfere with the correct working of the receiver. Directing the transmitter aerial Transmitter eld strength is at a minimum in an imagi-

nary line extending straight out from the transmitter aerial. It is therefore fundamentally misguided to point the transmitter aerial at the model with the intention of obtaining good reception. When several radio control systems are in use on adja-

cent channels, the pilots should always stand together in a loose group. Pilots who insist on standing away from the group endanger their own models as well as those of the other pilots. However, if two or more pilots operating 2.4 GHz radio control systems stand closer together than 5 m, the down-link channel may be swamped, triggering a very premature range warning. If this should occur, walk away from the other pilots until the range warning ceases again. Pre- ight checking Before you switch on the receiver, ensure that the throt-

tle stick is at the stop / idle end-point. Always switch on the transmitter rst, and only then the receiver. Always switch off the receiver rst, and only then the transmitter. If you do not keep to this sequence, i. e. if the receiver is at any time switched on when its transmitter is switched OFF, then the receiver is wide open to signals from other transmitters and any interference, and may respond. The model could then carry out uncontrolled movements, which could easily result in personal injury or damage to property. Please take particular care if your model is tted with a mechanical gyro: before you switch your receiver off, disconnect the power supply to ensure that the motor cannot run up to high speed accidentally. As it runs down, the gyro can generate such a high voltage that the receiver picks up apparently valid throttle commands, and the motor could respond by unexpectedly bursting into life. Range checking Before every session check that the system works properly in all respects, and has adequate range. Secure the model adequately, and ensure that no persons are standing in front of the model. Carry out at least one complete function check on the ground, followed by a complete simulated ight, in order to show up any errors in the system and the models programming. Be sure to read the notes on pages 62 and 71 in this regard. When operating a model, i. e. when ying or driving, do not operate the transmitter without the aerial tted. Check that the transmitter aerial is rmly seated. Operating your model aircraft, helicopter, boat or car Never y directly over spectators or other pilots, and take care at all times not to endanger people or animals. Keep well clear of high-tension overhead cables. Never operate your model boat close to locks and full-size ves-

sels. Model cars should never be run on public streets or motorways, footpaths, public squares etc.. 4 Safety Notes 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:4 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:4 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 Checking the transmitter and receiver batteries It is essential to stop using the radio control system and recharge the batteries well before they are completely discharged. In the case of the transmitter this means at the very latest when the message battery needs charging appears on the screen, and you hear an audible warning signal. It is vital to check the state of the batteries at regular intervals especially the receiver pack. When the bat-

tery is almost at you may notice the servos running more slowly, but it is by no means safe to keep ying or running your model until this happens. Always replace or recharge the batteries in good time. Keep to the battery manufacturers instructions, and dont leave the batteries on charge for longer than stated. Do not leave batteries on charge unsupervised. Never attempt to recharge dry cells, as they may ex-

plode. Rechargeable batteries should always be recharged be-

fore every session. When charging batteries it is impor-

tant to avoid short-circuits. Do this by rst connecting the banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger, taking care to maintain correct polarity. Only then connect the charge lead to the transmitter or receiver battery. Disconnect all batteries and remove them from your model if you know you will not be using it in the near future. Capacity and operating times This rule applies to all battery types: capacity diminishes with each charge. At low temperatures the batterys internal resistance rises, and capacity falls. This means that its ability to deliver current and maintain voltage is reduced. Frequent charging, and / or the use of maintenance programs, tends to cause a gradual reduction in battery capacity. We recommend that you check the capacity of all your rechargeable batteries at least every six months, and replace them if their performance has fallen off signi cantly. Use only genuine Graupner rechargeable batteries!

Suppressing electric motors All conventional (brushed) electric motors generate sparks between the commutator and the brushes, which cause more or less serious interference to the radio control system, depending on the type of motor. If an RC system is to work correctly, it is therefore important to suppress the electric motors, and in electric-powered models it is essential that every motor should be effec-

tively suppressed. Suppressor lters reliably eliminate such interference, and should always be tted where possible. Please read the notes and recommendations supplied by the motor manufacturer. Refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue or the Internet website at www.graupner.de for more information on suppressor lters. Servo suppressor lter for extension leads Order No. 1040 Servo suppressor lters are required if you are obliged to use long servo extension leads, as they eliminate the danger of de-tuning the receiver. The lter is connected directly to the receiver input. In very dif cult cases a second lter can be used, positioned close to the servo. Using electronic speed controllers The basic rule is that the electronic speed controller must be chosen to suit the size of the electric motor it is required to control. There is always a danger of overloading and possibly damaging the speed controller, but you can avoid this by ensuring that the controllers current-handling capacity is at least half the motors maximum stall current. Particular care is called for if you are using a hot (i. e. upgrade) motor, as any low-turn motor (small number of turns on the winding) can draw many times its nominal current when stalled, and the high current will then burn out the speed controller. Electrical ignition systems Ignition systems for internal combustion engines can also produce interference, which has an adverse effect on the working of the radio control system. Electrical ignition systems should always be powered by a separate battery not the receiver battery. Be sure to use effectively suppressed spark plugs and plug caps, and shielded ignition leads. Keep the receiving system an adequate distance away from the ignition system. Static charges Lightning causes magnetic shock waves which can interfere with the operation of a radio control transmitter even if the thunderstorm actually occurs several kilome-

tres away. For this reason cease ying operations immediately if you notice an electrical storm approaching. Static charges through the transmitter aerial can be life-threaten-

ing!

Caution In order to ful l the FCC RF radiation regulations 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:5 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:5 Safety Notes 5 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 Safety Notes applicable to mobile transmitting apparatus, the equipments aerial must be at least 20 cm from any person when the system is in use. We therefore do not recommend using the equipment at a closer range than 20 cm. Ensure that no other transmitter is closer than 20 cm from your equipment, in order to avoid adverse effects on the systems electrical characteristics and radiation pattern. The radio control system should not be operated until the Country setting has been set correctly at the transmitter. This is essential in order to ful l the requirements of various directives - FCC, ETSI, CE etc. Please refer to the instructions for your particular transmitter and receiver for details of this procedure. Check all working systems and carry out at least one full range check on the ground before every ight, in order to show up any errors in the system and the models programming. Never make any changes to the programming of the transmitter or receiver whilst operating a model. Care and maintenance Dont use cleaning agents, petrol, water or other sol-

vents to clean your equipment. If the case, the aerial etc. gets dirty, simply wipe the surfaces clean with a soft dry cloth. Components and accessories As manufacturers, the company of Graupner GmbH &

Co. KG recommends the exclusive use of components and accessories which have been tested by Graupner and approved for their capability, function and safety. If you observe this rule, Graupner accepts responsibility for the product. 6 Safety Notes Graupner cannot accept liability for non-approved components or accessories made by other manu-

facturers. It is not possible for Graupner to assess every individual item manufactured by other compa-

nies, so we are unable to state whether such parts can be used without incurring a safety risk. Liability exclusion / Compensation It is not possible for Graupner to ensure that the user observes the installation and operation instructions, and the recommended conditions and methods when install-

ing, operating, using and maintaining the radio control components. For this reason Graupner denies all liability for loss, damages or costs which arise through misuse or mishandling of this equipment, or are connected with such use in any way. Unless obliged by law, Graupners obligation to pay com-

pensation, regardless of the legal argument employed, is limited to the invoice value of that quantity of Graup-

ner products which were immediately involved in the event in which the damage occurred, unless the com-

pany is deemed to have unlimited liability on account of deliberate or gross negligence. The sole purpose of this manual is to provide informa-

tion; it is subject to amendment without prior noti cation. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may occur in the information section of this manual. Environmental protection This symbol on the product, in the operating instructions or the packaging indicates that the product must not be discarded via the normal household refuse at the end of its useful life. Instead it must be taken to a collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic ap-

paratus. The materials can be re-used according to their identi -

cation code. You can make an important contribution to the protection of our shared environment by recycling old equipment and making use of its basic materials. Dry and rechargeable batteries must be removed from the device and taken to the appropriate collection point. Please ask your local authority for the location of your nearest waste disposal site. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:6 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs2:6 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs56:7 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs56:7 For your notes 7 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 Safety notes and handling instructions relating to Nickel-Metal-Hydride rechargeable batteries As with all sophisticated technical products, it is vitally important that you observe the following safety notes and handling instructions if you wish the equipment to operate safely and reliably for an extended period. Safety notes rent speci ed for the cell type in use. If the battery heats up to more than 60C whilst on charge, halt the charge process immediately and allow the pack to cool down to about 30C. Never recharge a battery which is already charged, hot, or not completely discharged. Do not make any modi cations to batteries. Never solder or weld directly to cells. If incorrectly handled, rechargeable batteries are at risk of combustion, explosion, corrosive action and burns. Suitable extinguishing materials include re blankets, CO2 re extinguishers and sand. Escaped electrolyte is corrosive - do not allow it to contact skin or eyes. In an emergency rinse the area immediately with plenty of clean water before seeking medical help. The cells air vents must never be blocked or sealed, e. g. by solder. When soldering, the iron temperature should not exceed 220C, and each joint should be completed in less than twenty seconds. To avoid cell deformation, do not exert excessive mechanical pressure on battery cells. If a battery should be accidentally overcharged, use the following procedure:

Simply disconnect the battery and leave it on a non-

in ammable surface (e. g. stone oor) until it has cooled down. Never hold the battery in your hand, as there is a risk that cells might explode. Always observe the recommended rates for charging and discharging. General information The capacity of your rechargeable battery diminishes with every charge / discharge process. Stored batteries may eventually exhibit reduced capacity. Storage Batteries should not be stored in a completely dis-

charged state. Store them in a dry enclosed space at an ambient temperature of +5C to +25C. If you are storing a battery for a period longer than four weeks, ensure that the cell voltage does not fall below 1.2 V Balancing individual battery cells To balance new battery cells, i. e. to bring them all to the same state of charge, charge them at what is known as the normal rate until they are full. As a general guideline a fully discharged battery needs to be charged for a period of twelve hours at a current corresponding to one tenth of the capacity printed on the cell label (the 1/10C method). After this treat-

ment all the cells will be fully charged, and exhibit the same voltage. This method of balancing battery cells should be repeated after every ten fast-charge processes, so that the cells are repeatedly balanced;

this helps to ensure an extended useful life for your batteries. If you have the facilities to discharge individual cells, we recommend that you make use of this before every charge process. Otherwise the battery pack should be run down to a discharge voltage of 0.9 V per cell. For example, this corresponds to a nal discharge voltage of 3.6 V in the case of the four-cell pack used in the transmitter. Charging Ni-MH batteries should only be charged using the speci-

ed currents, charge times and temperature range, and should be supervised constantly when on charge. If you do not have access to a suitable fast charger, i. e. one Rechargeable batteries are not playthings, and must be kept well away from children. Store rechargeable batteries out of the reach of chil-

dren. Check that the batteries are in perfect, serviceable condition before every use. Do not re-use defective or damaged batteries. Rechargeable batteries must be used within the speci ed limits stated for the corresponding cell type. Do not heat, incinerate or short-circuit rechargea-

ble batteries, and never charge them with exces-

sive currents or reversed polarity. Never use rechargeable batteries consisting of parallel-wired cells, combinations of old and new cells, cells of different construction, size, capaci-

ty, make, brand or cell type. Batteries installed inside equipment should always be removed from the device when it is not in use and not about to be used. Always keep equipment switched off in order to avoid deep-discharged cells. Batteries must be recharged in good time. The battery to be charged should be placed on a non-in ammable, heat-resistant, non-conductive surface for the whole of the charge period. Keep in ammable and volatile objects and materials well clear of the charging area. Batteries must always be supervised when on charge. Never exceed the maximum fast-charge cur-

Safety Notes 8 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs57:8 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs57:8 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 which allows you to set the charge current accurately, then the battery should always be recharged using the normal charge rate of 1/10C; see the example stated above. Wherever possible, transmitter batteries should always be recharged at the 1/10C rate, in order to avoid differences in cell states. The charge current must never exceed the maximum permissible value stated in the transmitter instructions. Fast charging If your battery charger includes the facility to adjust the Delta Peak charge cut-off voltage, set this value to 5 mV per cell. However, most chargers are set to a xed cut-off value of 15 20 mV per cell, which makes them suitable for use with both NiCd and NiMH batteries. If you are not sure about this, please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your charger, or ask at your local model shop whether your charger is also suitable for Ni-MH packs. If in any doubt, charge your batteries at half the stated maximum charge current. Discharging All rechargeable batteries sold by Graupner and GM-

Racing are suitable for a maximum continuous current load of 6C 13C, according to battery type (refer to the manufacturers speci cation!). The higher the continuous current load, the shorter the batteries useful life. Use your battery until its performance falls off, or until the low voltage warning is triggered. Caution:

When stored for a long period, the cell voltage should not be allowed to fall below 1.2 V. This means that you may have to recharge the battery before stor-

ing it. Re ex charging and charge / discharge (cycle) programs shorten the effective life of batteries unnec-

essarily, and are only suitable for checking battery quality or reviving relatively old cells. It also makes no sense to charge / discharge a battery before using it - unless you simply wish to check its quality. Disposal of exhausted dry and rechargeable batter-

ies The German Battery Order places a legal requirement on every consumer to return all used and exhausted dry cells and rechargeable batteries. It is prohibited to dispose of these items in the ordinary domestic waste. At no charge to the user, old dry and rechargeable batteries can be surrendered at local authority collec-

tion points, Graupner retail outlets, and any other shop where dry and rechargeable batteries of the same type are sold. You can also send batteries supplied by us to the following address - with adequate pre-paid postage

- for disposal:

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Service: Gebrauchte Batterien (Used batteries) Henriettenstr. 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck You can make an important contribution to environmen-

tal protection in this way. Caution:

Damaged batteries may require special packaging be-

fore despatch, as some contain highly toxic materials!!!!!

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs57:9 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs57:9 Safety Notes 9 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 mx-12 the latest generation of radio control technology HoTT (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) is the synthe-

sis of expertise, engineering and world-wide testing by professional pilots. The equipment operates on the 2.4 GHz band, and offers bi-directional communication be-

tween transmitter and receiver via a down-link channel integrated into the receiver. The mx-12 HoTT RC system is based on the Graup-

ner/JR mc-24 computer radio control system which was introduced back in 1997. It has been developed speci cally for the beginner, but the mx-12 HoTT is still capable of controlling all current model types with-

out problem - whether xed-wing model or helicopter, model boat or car. In the area of xed-wing models and helicopters it is often necessary to employ complex mixer functions for the control surfaces or the swashplate actuation system. Computer technology enables you to activate a vast range of functions to cope with special model requirements just by pressing a button. With the mx-

12 HoTT all you do is select the appropriate model type, and the software then presents you automatically with the appropriate mixer and coupling functions. This means that the transmitter requires no additional mod-

ules in order to implement complex coupled functions, and you can forget all about old-fashioned mechanical mixers in the model. The mx-12 HoTT provides an extremely high level of safety and reliability in use. The mx-12 HoTT offers ten model memories, each of which can store model settings for different ight phases. Individual phases can be called up in ight simply by operating a switch, so that you can try out various settings quickly and without risk. This can be for test purposes or for varying parameters for different phases of ight. The large graphic screen makes operating the trans-

mitter a simple, intuitive process. Mixers and other functions can be displayed in graphic form, and this is extraordinarily helpful. The beginner quickly becomes familiar with the different functions thanks to the clear, logically arranged program structure. Four-way buttons to left and right of the high-

contrast screen are used to enter settings, allowing the user to exploit all the options he needs, in accordance with his experience in handling radio-controlled models. In theory the Graupner HoTT process allows more than 200 models to be operated simultaneously. Although in practice the mixed operation of different technical sys-

tems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band as required by the ap-

proval regulations reduces this number considerably. Generally, however, it will always be possible to operate even more models simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency bands which we have used to date. However, the actual limiting factor as it has always been is likely to remain the size of the

(air-) space available. The simple fact that no frequency control procedure is necessary equates to an enormous gain in safety, especially at ying sites such as gliding slopes where groups of pilots may be distributed over a large area, with nobody in overall control. The integral Telemetry menu provides a simple means of accessing data and programming HoTT receivers. For example, this method can be used to map receiver outputs, distribute control functions to multiple servos, and match servo travels and directions to each other. This manual describes each menu in detail, and also provides dozens of useful tips, notes and programming examples to complement the basic information. More general modelling terms, such as Transmitter controls, Dual-Rates, Butter y (Crow) and many others, are all explained in the manual. Please refer to the Appendix for additional information on the HoTT system. This manual concludes with the transmitters conformity declaration and guarantee certi cate. Please read the safety notes and the technical informa-

tion. We recommend that you read right through the instructions with great care, and check all the functions as described in the text. This can be carried out simply by connecting servos to the supplied receiver, and watching their response as you program the transmit-

ter. However, please read the notes on page 20 in this regard. This is the quickest method of becoming familiar with the essential procedures and functions of the mx-

12 HoTT. Always handle your radio-controlled model with a responsible attitude to avoid endangering yourself and others. The Graupner team wishes you great pleasure and suc-

cess with your mx-12 HoTT - a radio control system of the latest generation. Kirchheim-Teck, June 2011 10 Introduction 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs3:10 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs3:10 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 mx-12 Six-channel radio control set with Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) Computer System Micro-computer radio control system exploiting the latest Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology Bi-directional communication between transmitter and receiver Five different languages German and English; subsequent software updates will offer French, Italian and Spanish. Ultra-fast response times through direct, ultra-reliable data transmission from the main processor to the 2.4 GHz RF module. No additional delay caused by detours through a module processor. Telemetry menu for displaying telemetry data, and programming receiver outputs and optional sensors. Telemetry display shows numerous programming and analysis functions directly on the transmitter screen. Speech output possible using optional speech output module, Order No. 33001.71 User-selectable servo cycle times for digital servos, min. 10 ms Short, folding aerial Methods of operation and programming based on the proven concepts of the mc-19 to mc-24 High-contrast graphic screen with blue backlighting ensures perfect monitoring of set-up parameters, such as model type, model memory, timers and operating voltage. Function encoder with two four-way buttons for sim-

pli ed programming and accurate settings Key-Lock function to guard against accidental opera-

tion. Three programmable ight phases Ten model memories, with storage of all model-

speci c programming and set-up parameters Description of radio control set 11 Graupner HoTT technology offers excellent reliabil-

ity in use, with bi-directional communication be-

tween transmitter and receiver, integrated telemetry and ultra-fast response times. Simpli ed programming technology with four-way push-buttons. High-contrast eight-line graphic screen with blue backlighting for ultra-clear display of all set-up parameters and telemetry data. A micro-SD memory card can be used to back-up model data and store telemetry data. 12-bit / 4096-step channel signal resolution for extremely ne control characteristics. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:11 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:11 06.06.2011 19:39:25 06.06.2011 19:39:25 mx-12 Six-channel radio control set with Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) Computer System Four switches (two three-way switches, one two-way switch and one momentary switch), plus two digital controls - already installed and extremely versatile Unrestricted assignment of all switches to switched functions simply by operating the appropriate switch Storage of model memories using the latest battery-

free back-up system Six control functions with simpli ed, very convenient assignment of transmitter controls for auxiliary func-

tions, such as switches and proportional controls Convenient mode selector provides simple method of changing the stick mode (modes 1 - 4, e. g. throttle right / throttle left). When you change modes, all the affected settings are switched at the same time. Graphical servo display provides a straightforward overview of the servo set-up, and a swift method of checking servo travels Receiver output swap Comprehensive programs for xed-wing model aircraft and helicopters:

Fixed-wing menu for: 1 AIL, 2 AIL, 2 AIL + 2 FLAP, V-

tail, delta / ying wing, two elevator servos Fixed-wing mixer: diff aile, diff. aps, ail rudd, ail

aps, brake elev, brake ap, brake aile, elev ap, elev aile, ap elev, ap aile and diff. reduction Heli menu: 1-point, 2-point, 3-point and 4-point linkages (1 servo, 2 servo, 3sv(2roll), 3sv(140), 3sv(2nick (pitch-axis)), 4 SV (90)) Swashplate limiter Servo travel adjustment +/- 150% for all servo out-

puts, variable separately for each side (Single Side 12 Description of radio control set More than 200 systems can be operated simultane-

ously Future-proof update capability using data interface Servo Throw) Variable sub-trim, range +/- 125%, for adjusting the neutral position of all servos Servo reverse, programmable for all servos EXPO / DUAL-RATE system, separately variable, can be switched in- ight, ight phase programmable Stopwatch / count-down timer with alarm function Model memory copy function Integral DSC socket for use with ight simulators and Trainer systems General features of the HoTT system Simple, ultra-fast binding of transmitter and receiver Multiple receivers can be bound per model for paral-

lel operation Extremely fast re-binding, even at maximum range Two-receiver satellite operation using special cable connection Range-check and warning function Receiver low-voltage warning on transmitter screen Ultra-wide receiver operating voltage range: 3.6 V to 8.4 V (fully operational down to 2.5 V) Fail-Safe Unrestricted channel assignment (channel-mapping), mixer functions and all servo settings programmable in the Telemetry menu Up to four servos can be actuated simultaneously as a block, with a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital servos only) Optimised frequency hopping and broad channel spread for maximum interference rejection Intelligent data transmission with corrective function Real-time telemetry analysis 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:12 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:12 06.06.2011 19:39:26 06.06.2011 19:39:26 The set Order No. 33112 contains:

mx-12 HoTT micro-computer transmitter with integral 4NH-2000 RX RTU at-pack Ni-MH transmitter bat-

tery (speci cation reserved), Graupner GR-12 HoTT bi-directional receiver, switch harness and plug-type battery charger Recommended battery chargers (optional) d a e l

. e g r a h c l a r g e n t I x x

. Suitable for the following battery types

. i n n o c s n a m V 0 2 2 t c e n n o c C D V 2 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x H M

i N x x x x x x x x x x i d C N x x x x x x x x x

. c a

d a e L o P L i x x x x x x x x x x x x Order No. Description 6407 Multilader 3 Ultramat 8 6411 6425 Twin Charger 6427 Multilader 3 6455 Multilader 7E 6463 6464 6466 6468 6470 Ultramat 12 plus Pocket Ultramat 14 plus Ultra Trio plus 14 Ultramat 16S Ultramat 18 Speci cation, mx-12 HoTT transmitter 2,4 2,4835 GHz Frequency band FHSS Modulation Transmitter power see country setting, page 115 Six functions; four with trims Control functions

-10 +55 C Temperature range Aerial folding 3,4 6 V Operating voltage approx. 180 mA Current drain approx. 190 x 195 x 90 mm Dimensions Weight approx. 770 g with transmitter battery Speci cation, GR-12 HoTT receiver 3,6 8,4 V Operating voltage ca. 70 mA Current drain Frequency band 2,4 2,4835 GHz FHSS Modulation approx. 145 mm long, Aerial approx. 115 mm encapsu-

lated and approx. 30 mm active 6 1 (instead of servo 5) approx. -15 +70 C approx. 36 x 21 x 10 mm approx. 7 g Servo sockets Sensor socket Temperature range Dimensions Weight Accessories Order No. Description 1121 70 3097 Neckstrap, 20 mm wide Neckstrap, 30 mm wide Wind-shield for hand-held transmitter Trainer leads for mx-12 HoTT:

see page 137 To recharge the mx-16iFS system you will also need the transmitter charge lead, Order No. 3022, and the receiver battery charge lead, Order No. 3021, unless stated otherwise in the table. For details of additional battery chargers, and details of the chargers listed here, please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue, or our Internet site at www.graupner.de. Replacement parts Order No. 2498.4FBEC 4NH-2000 RX RTU, at-pack 33800 HoTT transmitter aerial Description 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:13 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs4:13 06.06.2011 19:39:26 06.06.2011 19:39:26 Description of radio control set 13 Operating Notes Transmitter power supply The mx-12 HoTT transmitter is tted as standard with a high-capacity rechargeable 4NH-2000 RX RTU Ni-MH battery (Order No. 2498.4FBEC) (speci cation re-

served). When delivered, the standard rechargeable battery is not charged. When you are using the transmitter you can monitor the battery voltage on the LCD screen. If the voltage of the transmitter battery falls below a certain point, you will hear an audible warning signal. The screen then displays a message reminding you that the transmitter battery needs to be recharged. GRAUBELE

#01 0:00 stop 0:00 Flug battery needs normal charging!!

HoTT 10%

K78 M x 0.0V x 4.7V 0:22h Always recharge the transmitter battery in good time. When you see this message, cease operations immedi-

ately and recharge the transmitter battery. Charging the transmitter battery The rechargeable Ni-MH transmitter battery can be recharged with the battery charger (Order No. 33116.2) supplied in the set, using the charge socket located on the right-hand side of the transmitter. Leave the battery inside the transmitter for charging, to avoid premature damage to the internal battery socket. As an approximate guideline a discharged battery should be charged for twelve hours at a current cor-

responding to one tenth of the capacity printed on the pack. If you are using the standard transmitter battery and the charger supplied in the set, this current is 14 Operating Notes Removing the transmitter battery To remove the transmitter battery, rst disengage the cover over the battery compartment on the back of the transmitter, then lift it off:

Remove the battery, then carefully pull on the power lead to disconnect the transmitter battery connector. Installing the transmitter battery Hold the connector attached to the transmitter battery in such a way that the black or brown wire faces the aerial, and the unused socket of the battery connector is on the side facing the bottom, then push the battery connector onto the three pins projecting out of the inside of the transmitter, in the direction of the circuit board. (The battery connector is protected against reversed polarity by two chamfered edges; see illustration). Finally place the battery in the com-

partment, and close the cover. Polarity of transmitter battery connector 200 mA. The transmitter must be switched OFF for the whole period of the charge process. Never switch on the transmitter when it is still connected to the charger; even a very brief interruption in the process can cause the charge voltage to rise to the point where the transmitter is immediately damaged. For this reason check carefully that all connectors are secure, and are making really good contact. Polarity of the mx-12 HoTT charge socket Commercially available battery charge leads produced by other manufacturers are often made up with the op-

posite polarity. For this reason it is essential to use only the genuine Graupner charge lead, Order No. 3022. Using automatic battery chargers Although the standard transmitter charge socket is pro-

tected against reversed polarity, it is still possible to use suitable chargers to fast-charge the transmitter battery. If possible, set the delta peak voltage difference of your fast charger to a value in the range 10 mV 20 mV or equivalent, as described in the chargers instructions;

this ensures that it is suitable for fast-charging Ni-MH cells. First connect the banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger, and only then connect the other end of the charge lead to the charge socket on the trans-

mitter. When the charge lead is connected to the transmitter, never allow the bare ends of the plugs to touch! To avoid damage to the transmitter, the charge current must never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the current on the charger itself. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:14 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:14 06.06.2011 19:39:26 06.06.2011 19:39:26 Battery timer, bottom left corner of the screen This timer displays the cumulative operating time of the transmitter since the last time the transmitter battery was charged. This timer is automatically reset to 0:00 when the transmitter detects that the voltage of the transmitter battery is signi cantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process. GRAUBELE

#01 6.1V 99%

0:00h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT K78 0.0V M x 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:15 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:15 Operating Notes 15 06.06.2011 19:39:26 06.06.2011 19:39:26 Operating Notes Receiver power supply A wide range of rechargeable four-cell and ve-cell NiMH batteries varying in capacity is available for use as the receiver power supply. If you are using digital servos we recommend that you use a ve-cell (6 V) pack of gener-

ous capacity. If your model is tted with a mixture of digital and analogue servos, it is important to check the maximum permissible operating voltage of all the types. The PRX unit, Order No. 4136, provides a stabilised receiver power supply with a user-variable voltage from one or two receiver batteries; see Appendix. For reasons of safety battery boxes or dry cells should never be used. The voltage of the airborne power supply is displayed on the transmitter screen while the model is ying:

GRAUBELE

#01 51%

5.2V 2:22h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M If the voltage falls below the pre-set warning threshold -

3.8 Volt as standard, but variable in the Telemetry menu;

see page 126 - a visual and audible low-voltage warning is triggered. Nevertheless it is important to check the state of the batteries at regular intervals. Dont put off charging the batteries until the warning signal is triggered. Note:

Please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue or visit the Internet site at www.graupner.de for full details of batteries, chargers, measuring equipment and battery monitor units. 16 Operating Notes Charging the receiver battery The charge lead, Order No. 3021, can be connected directly to the NC receiver battery for charging. If the battery is installed in a model and you have installed one of the following switch harnesses: Order No. 3046, 3934 or 3934.1 or 3934.3, the battery can be charged via the separate charge socket, or the charge socket which is built into the switch. The switch on the switch harness must be left at the OFF position for charging. Polarity of the receiver battery connector General notes on battery charging Observe the recommendations provided by the charger manufacturer and the battery manufacturer at all times. Keep to the maximum permissible charge current stated by the battery manufacturer. The maximum charge current for the transmitter battery is 1.5 A. Limit the charge current to this value on the charger. If you wish to charge the transmitter battery at a current higher than 1.5 A, you must rst remove the pack from the transmitter, otherwise you risk damag-

ing the circuit board through overloading the conduc-

tor tracks, and / or overheating the battery. Carry out a series of test charges to ensure that the automatic charge termination circuit works correctly with your battery. This applies in particular if you wish to charge the standard Ni-MH battery using an automatic charger designed for Ni-Cd batteries. You may need to adjust the Delta Peak trigger volt-

age, if your charger provides this option. Do not discharge the battery or carry out a battery maintenance program via the integral charge socket. The charge socket is not suitable for this application. Always connect the charge lead to the charger rst, and only then to the transmitter or receiver battery. Observing this rule eliminates the danger of acciden-

tal short-circuits between the bare contacts of the charge lead plugs. If the battery becomes hot when on charge, it is time to check the packs condition. Replace it if necessary, or reduce the charge current. Never leave batteries unsupervised when on charge. Environmental protection notes Important information on the disposal of dry and rechargeable batteries:

The German Battery Order places a legal requirement on every consumer to return all used and exhausted dry cells and rechargeable batteries. It is prohibited to dispose of these items in the ordinary domestic waste. At no charge to the user, old dry and rechargeable batteries can be surrendered at local authority collec-

tion points, Graupner retail outlets, and any other shop where dry and rechargeable batteries of the same type are sold. You can also send batteries supplied by us to the following address - with adequate pre-paid postage

- for disposal:

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Service: Gebrauchte Batterien (Used batteries) Henriettenstr. 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck You can make an important contribution to environmen-

tal protection in this way. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:16 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:16 06.06.2011 19:39:26 06.06.2011 19:39:26 Adjusting stick length Both sticks are in nitely variable in length over a broad range, enabling you to set them to suit your personal preference. Hold the bottom half of the knurled grip rmly, and unscrew the top section:

Now screw the stick top in or out (shorter or longer) to the length you prefer before tightening the top and bot-

tom sections against each other to x the stick top. Opening the transmitter case Please read the following notes carefully before you open the transmitter. If you have no experience in such matters, we recommend that you ask your nearest Graupner Service Centre to carry out the work for you. The transmitter should only be opened in the following cases:

When a self-neutralising stick needs to be converted to non-neutralising action, or a non-neutralising stick to a self-neutralising action. If you wish to adjust the stick centring spring tension. Before opening the transmitter check that it is switched off (move Power switch to OFF). Open the battery compartment and remove the transmit-

ter battery as described on the previous double page, together with any micro-SD card already installed. After this, use a PH1-size cross-point screwdriver to undo the six screws recessed into the back panel of the transmitter, as shown in the illustration:

Arrangement of the case back screws Hold the two case sections together with your hand, and turn the unit over to allow these six screws to fall out onto the table. Now carefully raise the case back and fold it open to the right, as if you were opening a book. C A U T I O N Two multi-core cables connect the lower shell to the transmitter electronics located in the top section. Please take great care not to damage this cable!

Important:

Do not modify the transmitter circuit in any way, as this invalidates your guarantee and of cial ap-

proval for the system. Do not touch any part of the circuit boards with any metal object. Avoid touching the contacts with your ngers. Never switch the transmitter on while the case is open.

Please note the following points when closing the transmitter:

Make sure that no cables are jammed between the transmitter case sections when you close the back. Check that the two case sections fit together flush all round before fitting the retaining screws. Never force the two case components together. Fit the case screws in the existing threads, and tight-

en them gently. Over-tightening them will strip the threads in the plastic. Remember to re-connect the battery.

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:17 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:17 Operating Notes 17 06.06.2011 19:39:27 06.06.2011 19:39:27 Operating Notes Self-centring screw Brake springs Adjuster screws Charge socket 18 Operating Notes 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:18 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:18 Folding aerial Adjuster screws for stick centring force Converting the dual-axis stick units Self-centring action Either or both sticks can be converted from self-neutral-

ising to non self-neutralising action: start by opening the transmitter as described on the previous page. If you wish to change the standard stick unit arrange-

ment, start by locating the screw on the left-hand stick unit shown circled in white in the photo below. Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction, i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below centre. Self-centring screw Brake springs Adjuster screws

s s n n a a r r t t d d r r a a o o b b h h c c u u o o t t t t o o n n o o D D t t i i u u c c r r i i c c r r e e t t t t i i m m Right-hand stick unit Right-hand stick unit Left-hand stick unit Left-hand stick unit Do not touch trans-

Do not touch trans-

mitter circuit board mitter circuit board Turn this screw clockwise until the stick on that side moves freely from one end-stop to the other; alterna-

tively unscrew it until the stick is fully self-centring again. Memory card slot 06.06.2011 19:39:28 06.06.2011 19:39:28 Brake spring and ratchet You can alter the braking force of the stick by adjusting the outer of the two screws circled in white in the next picture; adjusting the inner screw alters the strength of the ratchet:

Stick centring force The centring force of the sticks is also variable to suit your preference. The adjustment system is located adjacent to the centring springs; see the white circles in the following photo. You can set the preferred centring spring force by rotat-

ing the corresponding adjuster screw using a cross-point screwdriver:

Turn to the right = harder spring tension;

Turn to the left = softer spring tension. vertical vertical Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction, i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below centre. horizontal horizontal Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction, i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below centre. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:19 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs5:19 Operating Notes 19 06.06.2011 19:39:29 06.06.2011 19:39:29 Description of transmitter Transmitter controls Attaching the transmitter neckstrap You will nd a strap lug mounted in the centre of the front face of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter, as shown in the drawing on the right. This lug is positioned in such a way that the transmitter is perfectly balanced even when suspended from a neckstrap. Order No. 1121 Order No. 70 Neckstrap, 20 mm wide Neckstrap, 30 mm wide Aerial with folding / rotating base Neckstrap lug Central Status LED Rotary proportional control CTRL 7 Rotary proportional control CTRL 8 3-position switch SW 4/5 2-position momentary switch SW 1 Left-hand stick Trim ON / OFF switch Carry handle 3-possition switch SW 6/7 2-position switch SW 3 Right-hand stick Trim Left-hand four-way button Right-hand four-way button LCD screen Important note:

In the transmitters standard form any servos connected to the receiver can initially only be operated using the dual-axis sticks. For maximum exibility, all the other transmitter controls (CTRL 7 8, SW 1, 3 7) are free in software terms, and can be assigned to any channels you like, enabling you to set up the system to suit your personal preference or the requirements of a particular model. This is carried out in the contr set. menu, as described on pages 74 ( xed-wing models) and 76 (model helicopters). 20 Description of transmitter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:20 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:20 06.06.2011 19:39:31 06.06.2011 19:39:31 Case screw Case screw Data socket for connecting Smart-Box, Order No. 33700 DSC socket for connecting ight simulators and for Teacher mode Case screw Transmitter battery charge socket Battery compartment cover Option well for speech output module Order No. 33001.71 Three-pin socket for connec-

ting transmitter to a PC Case screw Case screw Case screw Optional headphone socket If you install the optional speech output module, Order No. 33001.71, and replace the name plate, it is possible to connect a standard commercial earphone or head-

phones tted with a 3.5 mm barrel plug (not included in the set) to the central socket. Signals and voice messages associated with the Te-

lemetry menu are generated via this optional socket, as are the transmitters audible signals. As standard these messages are spoken in the German language. For more details please see the section entitled Voice in the section SECRET MODE starting on page 26, and Telemetry on page 131. The volume of the headphone output can be adjusted in the Voice volume line of the Basic Settings menu;

see page 115. Three-pin PC socket This socket can be used to connect the transmitter to a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7 using the optional USB adapter, Order No. 7168.6 and the connecting lead, Order No. 6466.S. The software required at the PC, including a suitable USB driver, can be found in the Download section for the corresponding product at www.graupner.de. Once you have installed the software required, you can also update the transmitter via this connection. Data socket For connecting the optional Smart-Box, Order No. 33700. For more details about the Smart-Box please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue, or refer to that product on the Internet at www.graupner.de. Description of transmitter 21 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:21 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:21 06.06.2011 19:39:31 06.06.2011 19:39:31 DSC Direct Servo Control The original function of this socket was for Direct Servo Control, and thats why the abbreviation is still in use. However, for technical reasons direct servo control is no longer possible with the HoTT system using a diag-

nosis lead. The mx-12 HoTT transmitters standard two-pole DSC socket is now used as a Trainer (buddy box) socket

(Teacher or Pupil), and as an interface for ight simula-

tors. For the DSC connection to work you must check the following:

1. leave the transmitters On / Off switch in Carry out any adjustments required in the appropri-

ate menus:

See page 134 for information on setting up the mx-

12 HoTT transmitter to work as part of a Trainer sys-

tem. ALWAYS the OFF position when using a ight simulator, and when using the mx-12 HoTT transmitter as a Pu-

pil unit in a Trainer system, for only in this position is the RF section of the transmitter module switched off

(no RF signal) even when the DSC lead is plugged in. At the same time the transmitters current drain is reduced slightly. The central Status LED should now glow a con-

stant red, and the abbreviation DSC appears in the transmitters base display on the left, below the mod-

el number. At the same time the display of telemetry symbols is suppressed:

2. PUPIL

#11 DSC 6.0V 0:01h 99%

stop 0:00 flt 0:00 normal HoTT 0.0V 3. The transmitter is now ready for use. In contrast, when the mx-12 HoTT is used in Teacher mode, the transmitter must be switched on before the appropriate cable is plugged in. Connect the other end of the connecting lead to the appropriate apparatus, taking into account the oper-

ating instructions supplied with that device. Important:

Ensure that all connectors are rmly seated in their sockets. Note regarding ight simulators:

The range of ight simulators available commercially is now very wide, and you may nd that it is necessary to swap over certain contacts at the barrel connector or the DSC module. This work must be carried out by a Graupner Service Centre. Data storage Card slot micro-SD and micro-SDHC When you switch off the mx-12 HoTT transmitter and remove the battery compartment cover, you will see the card slot for memory cards (of the micro-SD and micro-

SDHC type) in the right-hand side of the compartment:

Any standard commercial micro-SD memory card with a capacity of up to 2 GB can be used, and also any micro-

SDHC card of up to 32 GB. However, the manufacturer recommends the use of memory cards with capacities up to only 4 GB, as these are completely adequate in all normal circumstances. The memory cards for which the transmitter is intended are familiar from their use in digital cameras and mobile telephones. Place the card in the slot with the contacts facing up, towards the back panel, and push it in until it locks. Re-install the battery and close the battery com-

partment; the transmitter can now be switched on again. The base display shows a stylised memory card symbol to indicate that a memory card is present:

22 Description of transmitter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:22 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:22 06.06.2011 19:39:32 06.06.2011 19:39:32 GRAUBELE

#01 50%

5.2V 3:33h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M Note:

If there is an SD card installed, withdraw it BEFORE you remove the transmitters back panel, otherwise there is a risk that you will damage the card. Data recording / storage The process of saving data on the SD card is coupled to the ight timer: if the timer is started, then data saving commences - provided that a suitable memory card is in the card slot, and a telemetry connection to the receiver exists - and ceases again when the ight timer is stopped. The ight timer is started and stopped as de-

scribed in the Timers section on page 59 for xed-wing models, and pages 67 and 68 for model helicopters. When data is being recorded, the card symbol ashes constantly and slowly. When data is being written to the memory card, the memory card symbol swells from left to right to indicate the process. When a data storage process is concluded, you will nd an (empty) Models folder and a Log-Data folder on the memory card. The latter contains the log les, stored in sub-folders named Model name, using the format 0001.bin, 0002.bin etc. However, if a model memory has not yet been named, then you will nd the associ-

ated log les in a sub-folder named NoName when you remove the memory card from the transmitter and insert it in the card slot of a PC or laptop. If you wish, the standard - xed - date of creation can be changed on the PC using a suitable program, and the data can subsequently be analysed on a compatible PC using the PC program available on the Download page for the transmitter at www.graupner.de. Importing voice les As mentioned in the section entitled Optional head-

phone socket on page 21, signals and messages asso-

ciated with the Telemetry menu can be generated via the optional speech output module, Order No. 33001.71, in addition to the transmitters audible signals. As standard these telemetry messages are spoken in the German language. The messages are grouped together to form a language pack and stored in the transmitters internal memory, but this can be replaced at any time by a lan-

guage pack in a different language. For more details on this please refer to the section entitled HIDDEN MODE starting on page 26. Importing and exporting model memories Any model memories can be copied onto a memory card in the transmitter, or copied from the card into the transmitter, so that you can exchange data between identical transmitters, and also back up your data. For more information please see the Model memories section starting on page 52. Note:

Some of the special characters used in certain model names cannot be accepted due to speci c limitations of the FAT or FAT32 le system used by memory cards. During the copy process they are replaced by a tilde (~) character. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:23 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs6:23 06.06.2011 19:39:33 06.06.2011 19:39:33 Description of transmitter 23 Screen and keypad Visual display of the trim lever positions; alternatively - if rota-

ry controls CTRL 7 or 8 are operated - display of the current settings of these two controls Model name Model type display

( xed-wing / helicopter) Model memory 1 10 Left-hand four-way button

leaf through

pressed brie y together:

switches to Servo display menu ESC = interrupt / back ESC pressed for about one second; Switches to the Telemetry menu, and back to the base display See page 28 for possible warnings Stopwatch in min:sec

(count-up / count-down) Flight timer in min:sec

(count-up / count-down) Right-hand four-way button

leaf through / alter values SET Select / Con rm Simultaneous brief press of

or = CLEAR Battery voltage and charge state in %

(If voltage falls below a particular level, a warning display appears - see pictures on right-hand page; at the same time a warning signal is emitted.) Receiver power supply voltage Flight phase name Switching between ight phases using switch Battery operating time since last battery charge, in hr:min Signal strength indicator 24 Description of transmitter - screen and keypad 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs7:24 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs7:24 06.06.2011 19:39:33 06.06.2011 19:39:33 Operating the Data Terminal Input buttons ESC, SET, CLEAR, symbols On-screen telemetry symbols The active model memory is not yet bound Not ashing: RF switched off at transmitter Flashing aerial symbol:

The last receiver bound to the active model is inactive, or out of range

>M x No telemetry signal detected

>M

>P Signal strength display Display of Pupil signal strength on the Teacher transmitters screen. Buttons to the left of the screen button

ESC Pressing the ESC button returns you step by step within the function select system, taking you right back to the basic display. If you make a change in the meantime, the change is retained. If pressed for about one seconds in the base display, ESC opens and closes the Telemetry menu. Arrow buttons 1. Pressing one of these buttons allows you to leaf through lists, such as the Model Select or Multi-

Function list, always moving in the direction of the arrow; the arrow buttons are also used to move through menu lines within menus. Simultaneously pressing the

buttons switch-

es from the base transmitter display, and from al-

most any menu position, into the Servo display menu. 2. Buttons to the right of the screen SET 1. 2. button Starting from the base screen display - as it ap-

pears when you switch the transmitter on - a brief press of the SET button takes you to the multi-

function menus. You can also call up a selected menu using the SET button. Within the set-up menus you can activate (con-

rm) and disable the corresponding set-up elds by pressing the SET button.

Arrow buttons 1. Leafs through the multi-function menu and the menu lines within the set-up menus, in the same manner as the left-hand four-way arrow buttons. 2. Selects and adjusts parameters in set-up elds af-

ter you have activated them by pressing the SET button; the buttons and are assigned the same function in each case, i. e. it makes ab-

solutely no difference which of the two buttons you use. 3. A brief simultaneous press of the or buttons resets an altered parameter value in the active input eld to the default value (CLEAR). Notes:

If you switch the transmitter off and then immediately on again, you may nd that the four-way buttons have no effect. This is not a fault! Switch the transmitter off again, and wait a few seconds before switching it on once more. Short-Cuts Telemetry Servo display You can call up particular menus or options directly us-

ing the following button combinations:

CLEAR A brief simultaneous press of the or but-

tons of the right-hand four-way button resets an al-

tered parameter value in the active input eld to the default value. A brief simultaneous press of the buttons of the left-hand four-way button switches from the transmit-

ters base display, and from almost any menu posi-

tion, to the Servo display, menu; see page 113. Press the central ESC button of the left-hand four-

way button for about one second at the transmitters base display; see section starting on page 117.

(language selection and contrast) Simultaneously press the arrow buttons of the left-hand four-way button AND the central SET but-

ton of the right-hand four-way button; see next dou-

ble-page. Input lock Can be activated and disabled at the transmitters ba-

sic display by simultaneously holding the ESC and SET buttons pressed in for about two seconds. HIDDEN MODE 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs7:25 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs7:25 06.06.2011 19:39:33 06.06.2011 19:39:33 Description of transmitter - screen and keypad 25 HIDDEN MODE Language selection and screen contrast The HIDDEN MODE (VERSTECKTER MODUS) menu of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter can be accessed from virtually any menu position by holding the arrow but-

tons of the left-hand four-way button and the SET button of the right-hand four-way button pressed in; after about one second this display appears:

VERSTECKTER MODUS KONTRAST SPRACHE ANSAGEN DEUTSCH DEUTSCH 0 CONTRAST In the CONTRAST (KONTRAST) line you can adjust the screen contrast to suit your preference by brie y pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button, as described in full on page 114 / 115. With a second press of the SET or ESC button you return to the line select point. In the LANGUAGE

(SPRACHE) line below it, which you can access by pressing the arrow button of the left-hand or right-

hand four-way button, you can select your preferred language.

VERSTECKTER MODUS KONTRAST SPRACHE ANSAGEN DEUTSCH DEUTSCH 0 Activate the value eld by pressing the central SET but-

ton of the right-hand four-way button:

VERSTECKTER MODUS KONTRAST SPRACHE ANSAGEN DEUTSCH DEUTSCH 0 Now replace the default language DEUTSCH (Ger-

man) with your preferred language using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. For example:

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH DEUTSCH German English French If you change the language, all the settings stored in the transmitter are retained in full. When this manual went to press, the following two languages were available:

The languages Italian and Spanish will be made avail-

able later on the Download page of the transmitter at www.graupner.de in the form of an update. VOICE MESSAGES As mentioned in the section entitled Optional head-

phone socket on page 21, signals and messages associated with the Telemetry menu can be generated via the optional speech output module, in addition to the German English French transmitters audible signals. As standard these telem-

etry messages are spoken in the German language. The messages are grouped together to form a language pack and stored in the transmitters internal memory, but it can be replaced at any time by a language pack in a different language. When this manual went to press, the following langua-

ges were available:

The languages Italian and Spanish will be made avail-

able later on the Download page of the transmitter at www.graupner.de in the form of additional voice les. The active voice package can be replaced using either the PC program which can be found on the transmitters Download page at ww.graupner.de, or using an SD card, as described below. Preparation If you have not already done so, insert your SD or SDHC card in the transmitter, as described on page 22. When you switch the transmitter on, it immediately cre-

ates a VoiceFile folder on the memory card. Remove the prepared memory card from the transmitter, and insert it in a suitable card reader. Connect this to your PC or laptop, and copy the voice package, typically voice_gb.vdf, into this folder; this is the le which you previously downloaded from the transmitters Download page. Remove the memory card from the card reader, and insert it in the transmitter once more. Switch the transmitter on with RF switched off:

26 Description of transmitter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:26 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:26 06.06.2011 19:39:33 06.06.2011 19:39:33 SD-CARD INSERT OK appears, then there is no memory card in the card slot, or the card cannot be read. If the warning

MISSING IMPORT DATA OK appears, then there is no suitable voice le on the SD card you have inserted. Con rm your choice by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button once more: the se-

lected voice package is now loaded into the transmitters memory:

dure. If the warning

RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF Changing the language Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the VOICE line:

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH DEUTSCH Activate voice output by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH DEUTSCH Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to replace the default language DEUTSCH

(German) with the language of your choice. For exam-

ple:

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH ENGLISH

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH ENGLISH 22/100%

I The loading process is nished when the progress bar at the bottom edge of the screen disappears:

HIDDEN MODE CONTRAST LANGUAGE VOICE 0 ENGLISH ENGLISH Finally switch the transmitter off to conclude the proce-

dure. All the settings stored in the transmitter are retained in full even after you have switched languages. Notes:

If the warning message MUST BE RF OFF OK appears, then the transmitters RF section is still active. Switch this section off in the RF module line of the Basic settings menu, and repeat the proce-

Description of transmitter 27 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:27 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:27 06.06.2011 19:39:33 06.06.2011 19:39:33 Warnings Warnings BIND N/A OK Binding not present No receiver is bound to the currently active model mem-

ory. You can move directly to the appropriate option by brie y pressing the SET button. No bound receiver in range. No connection between Teacher and Pupil transmitters On-screen function elds SEL, STO, SYM, ASY, The bottom line of the screen displays function elds which vary according to the menu selected.

, SEL STO SYM ASY CANT RECEIVE DATA OK no student signal RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF Do you want the RF signal to be ON or OFF?

SD-CARD INSERT OK No SD or SDHC memory card in the card slot, or card cannot be read. battery needs charging fail safe setup t.b.d Battery must be charged Operating voltage too low Fail-Safe not yet set up TRAINER Wireless Link ACT INH A wireless Trainer connection was used before the transmitter was last switched off; do you wish that con-

nection to be continued (ACT), or switched OFF (INH)?

MISSING IMPORT DATA OK throttle too high !

MUST BE RF OFF OK No suitable voice les found on the memory card The throttle stick (or helicopter limiter) is set too far in the direction of full-throttle Request to switch off the RF section

(voice les can only be loaded with the RF section switched off) The function elds are activated by pressing the SET button. Function elds SEL select STO store (e. g. transmitter control position) SYM adjust values symmetrically ASY adjust values asymmetrically Switch symbol eld

(assigning switches of all kinds) Switch to second page (next menu) within a menu 28 Description of transmitter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:28 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:28 06.06.2011 19:39:34 06.06.2011 19:39:34 Input lock To prevent programming errors, it is possible to lock the four-way buttons, and with them access to all the set-up options, from the base display of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter by pressing the ESC and SET buttons simul-

taneously for about two seconds. This is indicated by an inverted key symbol at the centre point of the trim bars:

GRAUBELE

#01 50%

5.2V 3:33h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M The lock is immediately active, but the control system remains ready for use. Pressing the ESC and SET buttons again for about two seconds disengages the lock: the next time you switch the transmitter on, the lock is also disengaged. Position display Rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 and 8 As soon as you operate one of the two rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8 on the centre console, a small symbol ap-

pears to the right of the two vertical position indicators:

At the same time the position display of the two central vertical bars switches for the duration of the actuation from the display of the current trim position to the cur-

rent position of the rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8. As you would expect, the left-hand bar represents the position of the left-hand rotary control CTRL 7, and the right-hand bar re ects the position of CTRL 8 (however, both horizontal bars continue to show the current posi-

tion of the corresponding transmitter stick trim levers):

GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M HoTT RX0.0V About two seconds after you cease operating one of the two rotary controls, the screen reverts to a display of the current position of the four trim levers for the two dual-

axis stick units. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:29 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs8:29 06.06.2011 19:39:34 06.06.2011 19:39:34 Description of transmitter 29 Using the transmitter for the rst time Preliminary notes regarding the mx-12 HoTT transmitter For more information please visit our Internet site at www.graupner.de Preliminary notes In theory the Graupner HoTT system permits the simul-

taneous operation of more than 200 models. However, in practice the mixed operation of different technical systems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band - as required by the approval regulations - reduces this number considerably. Generally, however, it will always be pos-

sible to operate even more models simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency bands which we have used to date. However, the actual limiting factor - as it has always been - is likely to remain the size of the (air-) space available. The simple fact that no frequency control procedure is necessary - a great convenience in itself - equates to an enormous gain in safety, especially at ying sites where groups of pilots may be distributed over a large area, with nobody in overall control. Battery charged?

When you take receipt of your transmitter, the battery will be in the discharged state, so you must rst charge it as described on page 14. If you do not do this, the battery will soon fall below the pre-set threshold voltage, and you will see and hear a warn-

ing signal to remind you to recharge it. Switching the transmitter on When you switch the transmitter on, the following display appears in the centre of the transmitter screen for about two seconds:

battery needs charging 5.2V 0:33h Within this period you can switch off the RF signal if re-

quired by moving the black eld to the right using the or arrows of the right-hand four-way button; when you do this, ON should appear normal, and OFF in inverse form (black background). RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF You can now switch the RF module off by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. Until this point the central LED glowed blue, but it now changes to red, and at the same time the screen switch-

es to the transmitters base display:

GRAUBELE

#01 50%

stop flt 0:00 0:00 K78 M HoTT 0.0V symbol combination means that the currently The active model memory is already bound to a Graupner HoTT receiver, but there is currently no connection with this receiver. (In our example we - of course - switched off the RF signal!) In contrast, if you switch the transmitter on without switching off the RF signal, the central LED glows an intense blue, and the symbolic transmitter mast ashes. At the same time the transmitter emits an audible warn-

ing until a connection is made with the corresponding receiver. Once this connection exists, a eld strength indicator appears instead of the x at the base of the

, and the visual and symbolic aerial, for example audible warnings cease. RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF 30 Using the transmitter for the rst time At the right of the same line a display in the same format appears when a telemetry connection is made, showing the strength of the telemetry signal picked up from the

) together with the actual voltage of the receiver (>M receiver power supply. appears, and However, if the symbol combination the central LED glows a constant red, the currently ac-

tive model memory is not bound to any receiver. Low-voltage warning If the transmitter voltage falls below a particular value, a visual and audible low-voltage warning is generated. The default value is 4.7 V, but this can be varied in the Basic Settings menu (page 114). Firmware update Firmware updates for the transmitter are carried out at the owners discretion using the three-pin PC interface on the back of the transmitter, in conjunction with a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7. It is essential to check the state of charge of the transmitter battery before any update; recharge it to be on the safe side, and be sure to back up all stored model memories be-

fore carrying out the update, so that you can restore the data if necessary. To connect the transmitter to a PC you also require the optional USB adapter, Order No. 7168.6 and the con-

necting lead, Order No. 6466.S. The latest software and information can be found in the Download section for the corresponding product at www. graupner.de. Note:

Once you have registered your transmitter at http://

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you will automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs9:30 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs9:30 06.06.2011 19:39:34 06.06.2011 19:39:34 replaced by x, and the receiver battery voltage is displayed as 0.0 V. At the same time the radio control system switches to Fail-Safe mode. If this should happen, simply increase the dis-

tance between transmitter and receiver until the displays revert to normal. they become available. Important notes:

mx-

The transmitter included in the set is prepared at the factory with the correct settings for most Eu-

ropean countries (except France). If you wish to operate the RC system in France, you MUST rst set the Country setting on the transmitter to FRANCE mode; see page 115. IT IS PROHIBITED to use the system IN FRANCE using the Universal / EUROPE mode!

You can operate up to six servos using the 12 HoTT transmitter and the receiver supplied in the set, which is already bound to the transmitter. However, in the interest of maximum possible exibility, control channels 5 and 6 are not as-

signed to transmitter controls by default; this also helps to eliminate the danger of inadvertent-

ly using them incorrectly. For the same reason virtually all the mixers are inactive by default. For more details of this please refer to page 74 ( xed-

wing model) or 76 (helicopter). The basic procedure for programming a new model memory can be found on page 48, and in the programming examples starting on page 144. When switching on, binding or setting up the ra-

dio control system, please ensure at all times that the transmitter aerial is an adequate distance from the receiver aerials. If the transmitter aeri-

al is too close to the receiver aerials, the receiver will be swamped, and the red LED on the receiv-

er will begin to glow. At the same time the down-

link channel will stop working. As a result the eld strength bars on the transmitter screen are 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs9:31 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs9:31 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 Using the transmitter for the rst time 31 Using the receiver for the rst time Preliminary notes regarding the GR-12 receiver For more information please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de. Receiving system The mx-12 HoTT radio control set includes a GR-12 2.4 GHz bi-directional receiver which is suitable for con-

nection to a maximum of six servos. In order to create a connection to the transmitter, the Graupner HoTT receiver must rst be bound to its model memory in its Graupner HoTT transmitter; this procedure is known as binding. However, binding is only necessary once for each receiver / model memory combination (see pages 61 or 70), and has already been carried out at the factory for model memory 1 using the components supplied in the set. You therefore only need to carry out the binding process with ad-

ditional receivers, or if you switch to a different model memory. The procedure can also be repeated whenever you wish - for instance, if you change the transmitter. For this reason, if you connect the GR-12 HoTT receiver supplied in the set to a power supply and switch it on, the integral LED brie y lights up green, and then goes out again, assuming that its transmitter is not in range, or is switched off. If a connection is made, the LED glows a constant green. Note:

If the LED glows a constant green, but the receiver responds neither to the SET button nor to control com-

mands, then please check the polarity of your receiver power supply. Receiver voltage display Once a telemetry connection exists, the actual voltage of the receiver power supply is displayed on the right-

hand side of the transmitter screen. 32 Using the receiver for the rst time Temperature warning If the temperature of the receiver falls below a limit value set on the receiver (the default is -10C), or exceeds the upper warning threshold, which is also set on the receiver (the default is +70C), the transmitter generates a warning in the form of steady beeps at intervals of about one second. Firmware update Firmware updates for the receiver are carried out using the receivers telemetry socket - in the case of the GR-

12 receiver supplied as standard in the set this is servo socket 5, which is also marked with a T - in conjunction with a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7. To connect the receiver to a PC you require the separately available USB interface, No. 7168.6 and the adapter lead, Order No. 7168.6A. The latter - like all other connecting leads

- must always be connected to the GR-12 receiver with the brown or black wire facing up. The latest software and information can be found in the Download area for the corresponding product at www. graupner.de. Note:

Once you have registered your transmitter at http://

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you will automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as they become available. Servo connections and polarity The servo sockets of Graupner HoTT receivers are numbered. The connector system is polarised: look for the small chamfers when inserting the connectors, and on no account force the plugs into the sockets. The power supply is through-connected via all the num-

bered sockets. If there is no vacant servo socket, it is also possible to connect the power supply via a Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11, in parallel with a servo. Do not connect the battery to these sockets with reversed polarity, as this is likely to ruin the receiver and any devices connected to it. The function of each individual channel is determined by the transmitter you are using, rather than by the receiver. The throttle servo socket is de ned by the radio control system, and may differ according to the make and type. For example, in the case of Graupner radio control systems the throttle function is assigned to channel 1 for xed-wing models, and channel 6 for helicopters. Servo socket 5: SERVO or SENSOR The servo socket 5, which is marked with an additional T Servo sensor OR can be used not only to update the receiver by con-

necting the adapter lead, Order No. 7168.6A, but also to connect a telemetry sensor. However, to ensure that the receiver correctly detects the device connected to this socket, servo socket 5 MUST be reset from SERVO to SENSOR and vice versa to suit the device. This is carried out in the Te-

lemetry menu on the RX CURVE page of the SET-

TING & DATA VIEW sub-menu. See the section starting on page 118 for more details:

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs10:32 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs10:32 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 out with an already bound receiver, if the transmitter is switched on, and if the associated model memory is ac-

tive, then the LED lights up green after a short interval to indicate that your transmitter / receiving system is ready for use once more. Please note the following:

Resetting the receiver resets ALL the settings stored in the receiver to the default settings, with the exception of the binding information! If you carry out a reset by mistake, this means that you will have to restore all the receiver settings entered using the Telemetry menu. On the other hand, a deliberate RESET is particu-

larly useful if you wish to re-house a receiver in a different model, as it represents an easy method of avoiding the transference of unsuitable settings. RX CURVE CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : A CURVE3 CH : 04 TYPE : B 5CH FUNCTION:SERVO On this menu page locate the > symbol at the left-hand edge of the screen, use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move it to the bottom line, and then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

RX CURVE CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : A CURVE3 CH : 04 TYPE : B 5CH FUNCTION:SERVO Now select the alternative SENSOR setting using one of the two arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button:

RX CURVE CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : A CURVE3 CH : 04 TYPE : B 5CH FUNCTION:SENSOR A further press of the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button concludes your choice. Now press the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button repeatedly until you return to the transmitters base display. Concluding notes:

The much higher servo resolution of the HoTT sys-

tem results in a substantially more direct response compared with previous technologies. Please take a little time to become accustomed to the ner control characteristics offered by the system!

If you wish to use a speed controller with integral BEC* system in parallel with a separate receiver bat-

tery, in most cases (depending on the speed control-

ler) the positive terminal (red wire) must be removed from the three-pin connector, as shown in the dia-

gram. Be sure to read the appropriate notes in the in-

structions supplied with your speed controller before doing this. Carefully raise the central lug of the connector slight-

ly (1), withdraw the red wire (2) and insulate the bare contact with tape to avoid possible short circuits (3). red 1 3 2 Observe the installation notes regarding the receiv-

er, receiver aerial and servos, which you will nd on page 34. Reset If you wish to carry out a receiver reset, locate the SET button on the top of the receiver and hold it in while you connect its power supply; release the button again. If the reset is carried out with the transmitter switched off, or if the receiver is not already bound, the receiver LED ashes red slowly after about two or three sec-

onds; at this stage it is immediately possible to initiate a binding process at the transmitter. If the reset is carried

* Battery Elimination Circuit 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs10:33 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs10:33 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 Using the receiver for the rst time 33 Installation Notes Installing the receiver Regardless of which Graupner receiving system you are using, the procedure is always the same:

Please note that the receiver aerials must be arranged at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts and leads which are not attached or connected directly to the receiver. This includes steel and carbon bre compo-

nents, servos, fuel pumps, cables of all sorts, etc. Ideally the receiver should be installed in an easily accessible position in the model, away from all other installed components. Under no circumstances run servo leads immediately adjacent to the receiver aerials, far less coil them round it!

Tests have shown that a vertical (upright) position of a single aerial produces the best results when long ap-

proaches are own with a model. If the receiver features a diversity aerial system (two aerials), the second aerial should be deployed at an angle of 90 to the rst. The servo sockets of Graupner receivers are numbered. The power supply is through-connected via all the num-

bered sockets, and in principle can be connected to any of the servo sockets. It is also possible to connect the power supply via a Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11, in parallel with a servo. The function of each individual channel is determined by the transmitter in use, rather than by the receiver. However, it is possible to alter the channel assignment

(mapping) by changing the programming in the Telem-

etry menu. Nevertheless, we recommend that you carry out this process using the Receiver output option; see page 60 or 69. 34 Installation Notes 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:34 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:34 2. 3. The following section contains notes and helpful ideas on installing radio control components in the model:

1. Wrap the receiver in foam rubber at least 6 mm thick. Fix the foam round the receiver using rubber bands, to protect it from vibration, hard landings and crash damage. All switches must be installed in a position where they will not be affected by exhaust gases or vibra-

tion. The switch toggle must be free to move over its full range of travel. Always install servos using the vibration-damping grommets and tubular metal spacers supplied. The rubber grommets provide some degree of protection from mechanical shock and severe vibration. Dont over-tighten the servo retaining screws, as this will compress the grommets and thereby reduce the vi-

bration protection they afford. The system offers good security and vibration protection for your servos, but only if the servo retaining screws are tted and tight-

ened properly. The drawing below shows how to in-

stall a servo correctly. The brass spacers should be pushed into the rubber grommets from the underside. chanical linkage can obstruct the servos movement. The sequence in which the servos are connected to the receiver is dictated by the model type. Please see the socket assignments listed on pages 43 and 47. Be sure to read the additional safety notes on pages 3 9. If the receiver is ever switched on when the transmitter is off, the servos may carry out uncontrolled movements. You can avoid this by switching the system on in this order:

Always switch the transmitter on rst, then the receiver. When switching the system off:

Always switch the receiver off rst, then the transmitter. When programming the transmitter you must always ensure that any electric motors in the system cannot possibly burst into life accidentally, and that an I.C. engine tted with an automatic starter cannot start unintentionally. In the interests of safety it is always best to disconnect the ight battery, or cut off the fuel supply. Servo mounting lug Retaining screw Rubber grommet Tubular brass spacer 4. The servo output arms must be free to move over their full arc of travel. Ensure that no parts of the me-

06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 Receiving system power supply A reliable power supply is one of the basic essentials for reliable model control. Free-moving pushrods, a fully-

charged battery, battery connecting leads of adequate cross-section, minimal transfer resistance at the connec-

tors etc. all help to minimise energy consumption, but if you have attended to all this, and the receiver volt-

age displayed on the transmitter screen still collapses repeatedly, or is generally (too) low, then please note the following:

The rst point to check is that your batteries are always fully charged at the start of each ying session. Check that contacts and switches are low in resistance. It is a good idea to measure the voltage drop over the installed switch harness under load, as even a new, heavy-duty switch can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 Volt. Ageing effects and oxidation of the contacts can increase this several times over. Constant vibration and movement at the contacts also gnaws away at the contacts, and tends to produce a creeping increase in transfer resist-

ance. It is also true that even small servos, such as the Graup-

ner/JR DS-281, can draw currents of up to 0.75 Ampere when stalled (mechanically obstructed). Just four servos of this type in a foamy can therefore place a load of up to 3 Amps on the airborne power supply ... For this reason you should always choose a receiver battery which constantly delivers an adequate voltage, i. e. which does not collapse under severe load. To cal-

culate the necessary battery capacity we recommend as a starting point that you provide 350 mAh for each analogue servo, and at least 500 mAh for each digital servo. For example, a 1400 mAh battery would represent an absolute minimum as the power supply for a receiving system with a total of four analogue servos. When mak-

ing your calculations, however, please bear the receiver in mind as well, as it draws a current of around 70 mA due to its bi-directional function. Regardless of these considerations, it is generally advisable to connect the power supply to the receiver using two leads. For example, you could use a switch or voltage regulator with two power supply leads run-

ning to the receiver. You might install a Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11, between lead and receiver, as shown in the diagram below, if you wish to use one or both of the receiver sockets to connect a servo, speed controller, etc. The dual connection at the switch or voltage regu-

lator not only reduces the risk of a cable fracture, but also ensures a more even energy supply to the servos connected to the receiver. Auxiliary function Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11 PRX stabilised receiver power supply, Order No. 4136 Four-cell Ni-MH battery packs Traditional four-cell packs are a good choice for power-

ing your Graupner HoTT receiving system, provided that you observe the conditions described above, i. e. you must ensure that the packs have adequate capacity and maintain their voltage well. Five-cell NiMH battery packs Five-cell batteries offer a wider margin of safety in terms of voltage compared with four-cell packs. However, please note that not all servos available on the market can tolerate the voltage of a ve-cell pack (in the long-

term), especially when the battery is freshly charged. For example, many of these servos respond to the high voltage with a clearly audible rumble. It is therefore important to check the speci cation of the servos you intend to use before you make the decision to use ve-cell packs. Two-cell Nanophosphate (A123) batteries Taking into account the current situation, these new cells are now regarded as the optimum choice for receiver packs. A123 cells can be fast-charged in conjunction with a suitable battery charger, and are protected by a metal case and therefore comparatively robust. It is also true that a much higher number of charge / discharge cycles is attributed to this cell type than, for example, to LiPo cells. The nominal voltage of 6.6 Volt of a two-

cell Nanophosphate pack presents no problems to Graupner HoTT receivers, nor to those servos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. which are expressly approved for use at these higher voltages. Please note, however, that virtually all servos, speed controllers, gyros etc. sold in the past, and also most of those currently available, are only approved for use on an operating voltage in the range 4.8 to 6 Volt. If you wish to con-

nect these devices to the receiver, it is essential to use a stabilised regulated power supply, such as the PRX, Order No. 4136; see Appendix. If you neglect this, there is a danger that the connected devices will quickly suffer permanent damage Two-cell LiPo battery packs For a given capacity LiPo batteries are a great deal lighter than the battery types described above, but they are more susceptible to mechanical stress and damage due to their lack of a metal case. Moreover LiPo batter-

ies only have a limited ability to be fast-charged, and Installation Notes 35 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:35 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 generally do not survive such a high number of charge

/ discharge cycles as is claimed for other batteries, such as Nanophosphate types. The comparatively high nominal voltage of 7.4 Volt of a two-cell LiPo pack presents no problems to Graupner HoTT receivers, nor to those servos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. which are expressly approved for use at these higher voltages. Please note, however, that virtually all servos, speed controllers, gyros etc. sold in the past, and also most of those currently available, are only approved for use on an operating voltage in the range 4.8 to 6 Volt. If you wish to connect these devices to the re-

ceiver, it is essential to use a stabilised regulated power supply, such as the PRX, Order No. 4136; see Appendix. If you neglect this, there is a danger that the connected devices will quickly suffer permanent damage. 36 Installation Notes 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:36 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs54:36 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs13:37 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs13:37 For your notes 37 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 De nition of terms Control functions, transmitter controls, function inputs, control channels, mixers, switches, control switches To make it easier for you to understand the mx-12 HoTT manual, the following section contains de nitions of many terms which crop up again and again in the remainder of the text. Control function The term control function can be thought of as the signal generated for a particular function which needs to be controlled - initially independent of its subsequent progress through the transmitter. In the case of xed-

wing model aircraft the control functions include throttle, rudder and aileron, whereas collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are typical of those used for helicopters. The signal of a control function may be assigned directly, or to several control channels simultaneously via mixers. A typical example of the latter is separate aileron ser-

vos, or pairs of roll-axis or pitch-axis servos in a model helicopter. The essential feature of a control function is its in uence on the mechanical travel of the corresponding servo. Transmitter control The term transmitter control refers to the mechanical elements on the transmitter which are operated directly by the pilot. Their movements in turn generate corre-

sponding movements in the servos, speed controllers etc. at the receiver end. The transmitter controls include the following:

The two dual-axis stick units for the control functions 1 to 4; for both model types ( xed-wing and helicop-

ter) these four functions can be interchanged in any way you wish using the Mode function, e. g. throttle left or right, without having to re-connect the servos. The dual-axis stick function for throttle (or airbrakes) is often referred to as the Ch 1 (Channel 1) control. The two rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 + 8 38 De nition of terms The switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, and CTRL 9 and 10 The switches SW 1 and 3, if they have been assigned to a control channel in the Transmitter control settings menu. When a proportional transmitter control is operated, the servo or servos follow the position of the control directly, whereas a switched channel provides just the two or three set servo positions. Function input This is an imaginary point on the signal path, and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connected! The two menus Stick mode and Transmitter control settings affect the course of the signal after this point, and it is possible (and likely) that there will be differences between the number of the transmitter control (as stated above) and the number of the subsequent control chan-

nel. Control channel There is a point on the signal path where the signal con-

tains all the control information required for a particular servo this may be directly generated by a transmitter control or indirectly via a mixer and from this point on we call the signal a control channel. This signal is only affected by any adjustments carried out in the Servo settings menu before leaving the transmitter via the RF module. Once picked up at the receiver, this signal may be modi ed by any settings made in the Telemetry menu before nally passing to the corresponding servo in the model. Mixer The transmitters software includes a wide range of mixer functions. Their purpose is to enable a control function to affect multiple servos at the branching point of the mixer input, or alternatively to allow several control functions to affect one servo. For more information please refer to the numerous mixer functions as described in the section starting on page 88 of the manual. Switch The standard toggle switch SW 3, the two three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7 and the momentary button SW 1 can also be incorporated into the programming of the transmitter controls. However, all these switches are also generally intended for switching program options, e. g. starting and stopping timers, switching mixers on and off, transferring control in Trainer mode etc. Each physical switch function can be assigned to as many functions as you wish. Numerous examples are de-

scribed in the manual. Transmitter control switch It is often desirable to switch a function on or off auto-

matically at a particular position of another transmitter control, e. g. at a de ned position of one of the dual-axis sticks. Typical examples are switching a stopwatch on and off to allow you to record the motor run time, extend-

ing spoilers automatically (and many others). The mx-

12 HoTT software includes a total of two (three - for helicopters) control switches of this type. Two transmitter control switches are available for the Ch 1 stick in each model memory, both for xed-wing model aircraft and helicopters. For helicopters a third is present in the form of the throttle limiter; see the right-hand side and page 67. This manual includes a range of instructive examples which make programming as simple as childs play. Please refer to the programming examples in the section starting on page 144. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs12:38 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs12:38 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 Assigning switches and control switches The basic procedure At many points in the program there is the option of using a switch (SW 1, 3 7) or a control switch (G1 3; see below) to operate a function, or to switch between settings, such as the DUAL RATE / EXPO function, ight phase programming, mixers and more. The mx-12 HoTT allows you to assign several functions to a single switch. The process of assigning switches is exactly the same in all the relevant menus, and we will explain the basic programming procedure at this point so that you can concentrate on the special features when reading the detailed menu descriptions. A switch symbol appears in the bottom line of the screen at all programming points where switches can be as-

signed:

Move to the appropriate column using the arrow buttons of the left or right four-way button. This is the procedure for assigning a switch:

1. SET button of the right-hand four-

Brie y press the way button. The following message appears on the screen:

push desired switch into position ON 2. Now simply move the switch you wish to use to the ON position, press the push-button, or move the Ch 1 stick from the OFF position in the direction of ON. Please note: the so-called control switches as-

signed to this transmitter control (see right) carry out the task of an ON / OFF switch in software; the same applies to the throttle limiter (see page 79) which is available in the Helicopter model type. This com-

pletes the assignment process. Changing the direction of switching:

If the switch turns out to work in the wrong direction, you can correct it as follows: move the switch to the desired OFF position, activate switch assignment once more and assign the switch again, this time with the switch direction you prefer. Erasing a switch:

Activate the switch symbol as described un-

der Point 2, then brie y press the button combina-

tion or of the right-hand four-way button

(CLEAR) simultaneously. Transmitter control switches Many functions are best controlled automatically by a particular (freely programmable) position of the Ch 1 transmitter stick (or the throttle limiter in the case of heli-

copters), rather than by a conventional physical switch. Typical applications:

Automatically switching an on-board glowplug ener-

gizer on and off according to the throttle position of the Ch 1 stick (G1 or G2). In this case the switch for the plug energizer is controlled by a mixer at the transmitter. Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off to record the pure ight time of a model helicopter; this is accomplished using the G3 switch of the throt-

tle limiter. Automatically switching the AIL

RUD mixer off when the airbrakes are extended, in order to keep the wings parallel with the ground when landing on a slope face, without the (usually coupled) rudder af-

fecting the models heading.

Automatically extending landing aps with coupled el-

evator trim adjustment on the landing approach, as soon as the throttle stick is reduced below the set threshold point. Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off in or-

der to time the run of an electric motor. For both model types the mx-12 HoTT transmitters software caters for these purposes with two control switches of this type; they can be assigned to the Ch 1 stick: G1 is switched on at around -80% of full travel, while G2 is switched on at around +80%. The Helicop-

ter program also includes an extra control switch G3 on the throttle limiter close to the 100% point; see page 79. All these control switches can be included without restriction in the free programming of the switches, i. e. they can be assigned to a function instead of a physical switch. This means that you are able to assign one of the control switches G1 G2 (or G1 G3) instead of a physical switch at any point in the software where switches are assigned. All you have to do is move the Ch 1 stick or the throttle limiter control (by default the rotary proportional control CTRL 7) from the desired OFF position in the direction of ON. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs14:39 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs14:39 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 Assigning switches and control switches 39 Digital trims Description of function, and Ch 1 cut-off trim 1. Fixed-wing models The Ch 1 trim features a special cut-off trim which is designed for glowplug motors: you initially use the trim lever in the usual way to select a reliable idle setting for the motor. If you now move the Ch 1 trim lever to its end-point in the direction of motor cut-off, pushing the lever in a single movement, a marker appears on the screen in the last position. You can now return to the idle setting for starting the motor simply by pushing the stick one click in the direction of open throttle. Current trim position Last idle position Ch 1 trim lever GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M 2.4 RX0.0V n o i t c e r i d e d l I Trim at motor OFF position The cut-off trim feature is disabled if you enter none or none / inv in the Motor at Ch 1 line within the Basic settings menu (page 56 / 57). Note:

Since this trim function is only effective in the Mo-

tor off direction, the above illustration will not apply if you change the direction of the Ch 1 stick for throttle minimum from back (which is re ected in the illustra-

tion above) to forward in the Motor at Ch1 line of the Basic settings menu. Digital trims with visual and audible indicators Both the dual-axis stick units are tted with digital trim systems. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one click), the neutral position of the associated stick chan-

nel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in the corresponding direction with increasing speed. The degree of trim offset is also audible, as the pitch of the tone changes to re ect the setting. When you are y-

ing a model, you can nd the trim centre position easily without having to look at the screen: if you over-run the centre setting, the trim stays in the centre position for a moment. The current trim values are automatically stored when you switch from one model memory to another. The dig-

ital trims are also stored separately for each ight phase within a model memory, with the exception of the Ch 1

(Channel 1) trim, which is the throttle / airbrake trim on a xed-wing model. The Ch 1 trim includes another special function which makes it easy to re-locate the idle throttle setting of a glowplug motor. However, since the trim functions described in these instructions only affect the Motor off direction, the trim display on the transmitters screen will vary according to your individual set stick mode, i. e. the forward or back throttle / collective pitch minimum position of the Ch 1 stick, and also according to left stick or right stick for throttle / collective pitch. The illustrations in these instructions always refer to Throttle / Collective pitch right for both model types, and to Throttle back for xed-wing models and Collective pitch forward for model helicopters. 40 Digital trims 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs15:40 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs15:40 2. Model helicopters In helicopter mode the Ch 1 trim has another feature in addition to cut-off trim, as described under Fixed-wing models on the left; this time in conjunction with the Throttle limit function (see page 79): while the throttle limit slider is in the bottom half of its travel, i. e. in the start-up range, the Ch 1 trim lever acts as idle trim on the throttle limit, and the idle trim is displayed on the screen:

Current trim position GRAUBELE

#01 Last idle position stop flt Throttle limit control 0:00 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M 2.4 RX0.0V CTRL 7 Trim at motor OFF position In contrast to a xed-wing model aircraft, this display is suppressed if the throttle limit control is moved to the right half of its travel. GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 Throttle limit control 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M RX0.0V 2.4CTRL 7 Note regarding helicopters:

The Ch 1 trim only affects the throttle servo and not the collective pitch servos; it also works evenly over the full stick travel. Please note that the helicopter throttle servo must be connected to receiver output 6 (see Receiver socket assignment, page 47). 06.06.2011 19:39:35 06.06.2011 19:39:35 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs44:41 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs44:41 For your notes 41 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 Fixed-wing model aircraft This program provides convenient support for normal model aircraft with up to two aileron servos and two ap servos, V-tail models, ying wings and deltas with two elevon (aileron / elevator) servos and two ap servos. The majority of power models and gliders belong to the normal tail type with one servo each for elevator, rud-

der, ailerons and throttle or electronic speed controller

(airbrakes on a glider). There is also the special model type 2 EL Sv which provides a means of connecting two elevator servos to channels 3 and 6 in parallel. If your model features two separate aileron servos (and also in some cases two ap servos), the aileron travel of both pairs of control surfaces can be set up with dif-

ferential movement in the Wing mixers menu, i. e. the down-travel can be set independently of the up-travel. Finally the program caters for camber-changing aps, which can be operated by any of the transmitter controls CTRL 7 10. Alternatively a phase-speci c trim is available for aps, ailerons and elevator in the Phase trim menu. If the model features a V-tail instead of a conventional tail, you need to select the tail type V-tail in the Basic settings menu, as this automatically superimposes the elevator and rudder control functions in such a way that each tail panel can be actuated by a separate servo. For deltas and ying wings it is easy to set up mixed elevons, i. e. the aileron and elevator functions can be carried out via common control surfaces at the trailing edge of the right and left wing. As standard the program contains the appropriate mixer functions for the two servos. Up to three ight phases can be programmed in each of the ten model memories. The digital trim positions are stored separately for each ight phase, with the exception of the Ch 1 trim. The Ch 1 trim provides a simple means of re-locating the correct idle throttle setting. Two timers are available at all times when ying. The screen also displays the transmitter operating time since the battery was last charged. All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW) can be assigned to virtually any of the inputs 5 and 6 in the Transmitter control settings menu. Dual Rate and Exponential can be programmed separately for aileron, rudder and elevator, giving two modes of control. Depending on the model type you have selected, the Wing mixers menu presents you with up to twelve additional pre-de ned mixers and coupling functions which you can simply select and set up when necessary, in addition to three free mixers:

1. Aileron differential (switchable) 2. Flap differential (switchable) 3. Aileron rudder (switchable) 4. Aileron ap (switchable) 5. Airbrake elevator (switchable) 6. Airbrake ap (switchable) 7. Airbrake aileron (switchable) 8. Elevator ap (switchable) 9. Elevator aileron (switchable) 10. Flap elevator (switchable) 11. Flap aileron (switchable) 12. Differential reduction n Ailer o ator Ele v r e d d u R ro n Flap e l i A left Ailero n Ele v a tor tor Flap a p a l v e l E right Aileron Rudder F 42 Fixed-wing model aircraft Airbrake-Function 1 Fla p A i l e r o n Aile r n o Flap Airbrake Flap Airbrake Elevator left Rudder/Elevator V-Tail right Elevator Flap Flap Ele v a t o r Aileron Rudder Elevator Aileron Ail e r o n F l a p Flap n o Aile r Airbrake Aileron Airbrake Flap Airbrake Elevator 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs16:42 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs16:42 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 Installation notes The servos MUST be connected to the receiver outputs in the following order:

Outputs not required are simply left vacant. Please note the following points in particular:

If you are using only one aileron servo, receiver out-

put 5 (right aileron) is left unused; it can also be used for another purpose if you select 1 AIL in the Basic settings menu. If you are using only one ap servo, receiver output 1

(right ap) MUST be left unused, assuming that you have selected 2 FL in the Basic settings menu. Please also read the information on the following pages. Powered and unpowered xed-wing model aircraft, with up to two ailerons and V-tail tail type with two elevon and two ap / elevator servos Free, or auxiliary function Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or right aileron Right rudder / elevator Left rudder / elevator Ailerons or left aileron Receiver power supply Airbrakes - or throttle servo or speed controller (electric model) Left flap (aileron) / elevator Receiver power supply Right flap (aileron) / elevator Free or rudder Right elevon (aileron / elevator) Left elevon (aileron / elevator) Receiver power supply Airbrakes - or throttle servo or speed controller (electric model) Unpowered model gliders with two aileron and two ap servos and normal tail type

... and 2 elevator servos tail type 2nd elevator Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or right aileron Rudder 1st elevator Ailerons or left aileron Receiver power supply Airbrakes - or throttle servo or speed controller (electric model) and normal tail type Free, or auxiliary function Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or right aileron Rudder Elevator Ailerons or left aileron Receiver power supply Airbrakes - or throttle servo or speed controller (electric model) Powered and unpowered delta / ying wing models with two elevon servos and V-tail tail type Free, or auxiliary function Receiver power supply Free or telemetry sensor or aux. function Free or rudder Right elevon (aileron / elevator) Left elevon (aileron / elevator) Receiver power supply Airbrakes - or throttle servo or speed controller (electric model) Left flap Receiver power supply Right aileron Rudder Elevator Left aileron Receiver power supply Right flap Left flap Receiver power supply Right aileron Right rudder / elevator Left rudder / elevator Left aileron Receiver power supply Right flap 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs17:43 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs17:43 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment 43 As there are several possible combinations of servo orientation and control surface linkage, you may nd that the direction of rotation of one or more servos is incor-

rect. Use the following table to solve the problem. Model type Servo rotating in wrong direction Remedy V-tail Rudder and elevator reversed Rudder correct, elevator reversed Elevator correct, rudder reversed Delta, ying wing Elevator and ailerons reversed Elevator correct, ailerons reversed Ailerons correct, elevator reversed Reverse servos 3 + 4 in the servo set. menu Swap over servos 3 + 4 at the receiver Reverse servos 3 + 4 in the servo set. menu, AND swap over at the receiver Reverse servos 2 + 3 in the servo set. menu Reverse servos 2 + 3 in the servo set. menu, AND swap over at the receiver Swap over servos 2 + 3 at the receiver All menus which are relevant to xed-wing models are marked with an aeroplane symbol in the Program descriptions:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus when programming a xed-wing model aircraft. 44 Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs17:44 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs17:44 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs18:45 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs18:45 For your notes 45 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 Model helicopters The continued development of model helicopters and helicopter components, such as gyros, speed governors, rotor blades etc., has led to the current position where helicopters are capable of sophisticated 3-D aerobatics. In contrast, if you are a beginner to helicopter ying, you need a simple set-up so that you can quickly get started on the initial stages of hovering practice, and then gradually learn to exploit all the options provided by the mx-12 HoTT. The helicopter program of the mx-12 HoTT can cope with all current model helicopters equipped with 1 4 servos for collective pitch control, entirely regardless of whether they are powered by a fuel-driven or electric motor. Each model memory can include two ight phases plus auto-rotation, and two ight timers are constantly available. At the same time the screen also displays the period which has elapsed since the last charge process. You can return to the correct idle position for the digital Ch 1 trim simply by pressing a button. Dual Rate and Exponential are available for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor; they can be coupled together, programmed and switched on and off, giving two modes of control. All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW) can be assigned in almost any way to inputs 5 6 in the Transmitter control settings menu. In addition to three linear mixers, which can be assigned to any functions and can also be switched on and off, the Helicopter mixers menu provides ve-point curves for the collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixers, variable separately for each ight phase; these provide non-linear mixer characteristics. 1. Collective pitch 2. Ch 1 throttle 3. Ch 1 tail rotor Such advanced features are not needed by the begin-

ner, who will initially simply set the hover point to coin-

cide with the centre point of the stick arc, and adjust the collective pitch travel as required. Moreover the Heli mixers menu offers additional set-up options in the Gyro line, plus a swashplate limiter. The mixer inputs for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis can then be adjusted in the Swashplate mixers menu. The throttle limit function in the Transmitter control settings menu provides an effective means of starting the motor in any ight phase. By default the proportional rotary control CTRL 7 is assigned to this input, and this control function determines the maximum throttle servo position, i. e. the trim lever controls the motor over the idle range. Only when this rotary knob is turned in the di-

rection of full-throttle do the programmed throttle curves take effect. If you have set up the two timers, they also start recording the ight time automatically at this point. See page 79 for more information on this. Collective Pitch Curve C h a n n el 1 Tail Rotor Channel 1 Throttle 46 Model helicopters 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs19:46 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs19:46 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 with four swashplate servos Throttle or speed governor Receiver power supply Pitch-axis 2 servo Tail rotor servo (gyro system) Pitch-axis 1 servo Roll 1 servo Receiver power supply Roll 2 servo All menus which are relevant to model helicopters are marked with a helicopter symbol in the Program descriptions:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus when programming a model helicopter. Note for modellers upgrading from earlier Graupner systems:

Compared with the previous receiver channel sequence, servo socket 1 (collective pitch servo) and servo socket 6 (throttle servo) have been interchanged. The servos must be connected to the receiver output sockets in the order shown at bottom right. Outputs not required are simply left vacant. For more information on the different types of swashplate, please refer to the Basic settings menu described on page 64 / 65. Installation notes The servos MUST be connected to the receiver outputs in the order shown on this page:

Outputs not required are simply left vacant. Please note the additional information on the follow-

ing pages. Note:

To be able to exploit all the convenience and safety features of the throttle limiter (see section starting on page 79), the speed controller should be connected to receiver output 6. See page 96 for more details. Receiver assignment for model helicopters with one to three swashplate servos Throttle or speed governor Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or gyro gain Tail rotor servo (gyro system) Pitch-axis 1 servo Roll 1 servo Receiver power supply Collective pitch or roll 2 or pitch-axis 2 servo 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs20:47 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs20:47 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 Model helicopters: receiver assignment 47 Detailed description of programming Reserving a new memory If you have already read through the manual to this point, you will undoubtedly have made your rst attempt at programming the system already. Even so, it is impor-

tant to describe each menu here in detail, to ensure that you have comprehensive instructions for each applica-

tion you are likely to encounter. In this section we start with setting up a free model memory prior to programming a new model:

GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 0:00 99%

6.1V 0:00h K78 M HoTT 0.0V From the basic display press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the Multi-

function list. (You can return to the basic screen at any time by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button.) By default the menu point Model memory is displayed inverse (black background) and is therefore active when you rst call up the multi-function select menu after switching the transmitter on. If this is not the case, select the Model memory menu using the arrow buttons (, ) of the left or right-hand four-way button, then brie y press the central SET but-

ton of the right-hand four-way button:

mod.mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry 48 Program description: reserving a new memory select model clear model copy mod>mod export to SD import from SD

R06 01 02 03 04 05 06

free

free

free

free

free Now press the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button once more to move on to the select model sub-menu. R06 01 02 03 04 05 06

free

free

free

free

free In the transmitters default state the rst model memory is already initialised with the Fixed-wing model model type, and the receiver supplied in the set is bound to it. This is indicated by the receiver code displayed at top right of the screen; in the example above this is R06. If, on the other hand, the model memory is unbound, you will see ---. The remainder of the model memories are not yet occupied, and are unbound; these are entitled

free. If you want to set up a xed-wing model, then you can immediately start the programming pro-

cedure after leaving the select model sub-menu and the Model memory menu by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button each time alternatively you can select one of the free model memories using the left or right-hand four-way button

... and then brie y press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to con rm your choice. After this you are invited to select the basic model type, i. e. either Fixed-wing or Helicopter:

Sel model type

( empty mod mem ) Use the or button of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the appropriate basic model type, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button to con rm your choice. Your chosen model memory is now initialised with the selected basic model type, and the screen switches back to the basic display. The model memory is now reserved for that use. However, if you wish to get started with a helicopter, then use the or button of the left or right-hand four-way button to select one of the model memories marked as free, and con rm your choice with a brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. You are now requested to de ne the basic model type, i. e. either xed-wing or helicopter. Use the or button of the left or right four-way button to select the corresponding symbol, then again 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:48 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:48 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button brie y in con rmation. This initialises the chosen model type for the model memory you have just se-

lected, and you can now start programming your model in this memory. It is now only possible to change this memory to a dif-

ferent model type if you rst erase the model memory

(Model memory menu, page 52). Notes:

If you wish to erase the model memory which is cur-

rently active in the basic display, you will have to de-

ne one of the two model types xed-wing or heli-

copter immediately after completing the erase procedure. You cannot avoid making this choice by switching the transmitter off. If you wish to remove a model memory which you inadvertently occupied, you can simply erase it from a different model mem-

ory. However, if you erase a model memory which is not currently active, after the procedure you will see the memory marked as free under Model Se-

lect. After the selected model memory has been initial-

ised with your preferred basic model type, the screen shifts to the newly reserved model memory. At the same time the following warning appears for a few seconds BIND N/A OK as an indication that this memory has not yet been bound to a receiver. A brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button takes you di-

rectly to the corresponding option. For more detailed information on binding a receiver please refer to pag-

es 61 and 70. The warning BIND. n/v just described is now fol-

lowed for a few seconds by this warning

fail safe setup t.b.d as an indication that no Fail-Safe settings have been entered. For more information on this please re-

fer to page 116. If the warning

throttle too high !

appears on the screen, move the throttle stick (or the limiter - by default the rotary knob CTRL 7 - if set-

ting up a helicopter) back to idle. This warning only appears in accordance with the settings you have en-

tered in the Motor at Ch1 or Collective pitch min. section of the Basic settings menu, as described on pages 56 and 67. If you are setting up a non-pow-

ered xed-wing model, enter none or none/inv at this point; this disables the throttle warning message, and makes available the Brake NN * mixers in the Wing mixers menu, which would otherwise be suppressed; you should also do this if you wish to use servo socket 1 for the second ap servo. If the transmitters model memories are already occu-

pied, then a pictogram of the selected model type ap-

pears in the appropriate model memory, followed by

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) a blank line, or the models name if a name has al-

ready been entered in the Basic settings menu

(pages 56 and 64), together with an indicator that the memory is bound to a receiver, if appropriate. If the battery voltage is too low, the software prevents you switching model memories in the interests of safety. In this case the screen displays this message:

not possible now voltage too low Basically there are now four different options for assign-

ing the four control functions aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle / airbrakes ( xed-wing model), and roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch (model helicopter) to the two primary dual-axis sticks. Which of these options is adopted depends on the personal pref-

erence of the individual model pilot. This function is set in the Stick mode line for the currently active model memory in the Basic settings menu (page 56 or 64):

mod Name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap 1 no normal 1aile As mentioned earlier, for maximum exibility the trans-

mitter controls 5 and 6 are by default not assigned to transmitter controls, and can be assigned to any chan-

nels you like; this also helps to avoid accidental mishan-

dling. This means that in the default state of the equipment only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1 4 can usually be controlled by the two dual-axis Program description: reserving a new memory 49 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:49 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:49 06.06.2011 19:39:36 06.06.2011 19:39:36 sticks, whereas servos connected to sockets 5 and 6 remain steadfastly at their centre position. If you set up a new model helicopter, servo 6 may also respond to some extent to the controls - depending on the position of the throttle limiter CTRL 7. For both model types this situation only changes once you have carried out the appropriate assignments in the Transmitter control settings menu. If you wish to use a newly initialised model memory, then this MUST rst be bound to a (further) receiver before any servos connected to the receiver can be con-

trolled from the transmitter. For more information on this please refer to the Binding section on pages 61 and 70. You will nd a description of the basic steps for program-

ming a xed-wing model aircraft in the Programming Examples section starting on page 144; for model helicopters the equivalent section starts on page 166. The following menu descriptions are arranged in the order that they are listed in the individual menus in the multi-function list. 50 Program description: reserving a new memory 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:50 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs21:50 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs22:51 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs22:51 For your notes 51 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 Model memories Calling up a model, erasing a model, copying model model The section on pages 24 and 25 explains the basic method of using the buttons, while the previous two double-pages explains how to move to the Multi-function list and reserve a new model memory. At this point we wish to start with the normal description of the indi-

vidual menu points in the sequence in which they occur on the transmitter itself. For this reason we start with the menu Model memory mod.mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry The transmitter can store up to ten complete sets of model data, including the digital trim values set by the four trim levers. The trims are automatically stored, which means that the settings you have carefully estab-

lished through test- ying are never lost when you swap models. A pictogram of the selected model type, and - if you have entered a model name in the Basic settings menu (pages 56 and 64) - the name appears in all three sub-menus of the Model memory menu following the model number. If necessary, use the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select the Model memory menu, then brie y press the SET button of the right-

hand four-way button:

52 Program description: model memories select model clear model select model clear model copy mod>mod export to SD import from SD

select model clear model copy mod>mod Modell senden export to SD Modell empfangen import from SD

If you now brie y press the SET button again, you move to the Call up model sub-menu:

01 02 03 04 05 06 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE STARLET BELL47G

free

free R06 R06 R06 Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select from the list the model memory you wish to use, and con rm your selection by pressing the SET button. Pressing ESC takes you back to the previous menu page without switching models. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the clear model sub-menu, then press the SET button. Select the model to be erased using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button, model to be cleared:

01 02 03 04 05 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE STARLET BELL47G

frei R06 R06 R06 then press the SET button again; the program re-

sponds with the security query:

Notes:

If the warning message Throttle too high appears when you switch models, the throttle or collective pitch stick (Ch 1), or the throttle limiter, is positioned too far towards full-throttle. If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible to switch model memories for safety reasons. In this case the screen displays the following message:

not possible now voltage too low model 01 GRAUBELE to be erased ?

NO YES If you answer NO, the process is interrupted, and you are returned to the previous screen page. If you answer YES with the button of the left or right-hand four-way button and con rm your choice with the SET button, then the selected model memory is erased. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:52 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:52 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 Caution:

The erasure process is irrevocable. All data in the selected model memory is reset to the factory default settings. Note:

If you wish to erase the currently active model memory in the basic display, you will be required to de ne the model type Helicopter or Fixed-wing immediately. However, if you erase a non-active model memory, then the message free appears in the Model select menu. copy model model Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the copy model model sub-menu, then press the SET button. select model clear model copy mod>mod Modell senden export to SD Modell empfangen import from SD

Select the model to be copied using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button copy from model:

01 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE 02 03 STARLET 04 BELL47G

frei 05 R06 R06 R06 then brie y press the SET button of the right-hand four-way button in the Copy to model window. You can now select the target memory using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button, and con-

rm your choice with SET. Alternatively you can interrupt the process with ESC. It is possible to overwrite a model memory which already contains model data. copy to model:

01 02 03 04 05 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE STARLET BELL47G

free R06 R06 R06 When you con rm the selected model memory by press-

ing the SET button, the security query appears:

model 01 03 ULTIMATE

free to be copied ?

NO YES Selecting NO interrupts the process, and returns you to the previous page. If you select YES with the button, and con rm your choice by pressing the SET button, then the selected model is copied into the chosen target model memory. Note:

When you copy a model memory, the binding data is copied together with the model data, so that a receiving system bound to the original model memory can also be operated with the copy of the memory, i. e. it does not require another binding process. Export to SD Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the Export to SD sub-menu, then press the SET button. select model clear model copy mod>mod export to SD Modell empfangen import from SD

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the model to be exported:

export to SD-CARD:

01 02 03 04 05 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE STARLET BELL47G

frei R06 R06 R06 When you con rm the selected model memory with a brief press of the SET button, the following security query appears:

model 01 SD-CARD ULTIMATE export ?

NO YES You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this, you are returned to the starting screen. However, if you select YES with the button, and con rm your choice by pressing the SET button, then the selected model is 53 Program description: model memories 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:53 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:53 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 copied to the SD card. Notes:

If the warning SD-CARD INSERT OK appears instead of a model selection, there is no SD card in the card slot; see page 22. When you copy a model memory, the binding data is copied along with the model data, so that the receiv-

ing system associated with the original model mem-

ory can also be operated using the SAME transmitter and the copied memory without repeating the bind-

ing procedure. An exported xed-wing model is stored on the memo-

ry card under \\Models\mx-12 with the format aMod-

elname.mdl and a model helicopter with the format hModelname.mdl. However, if you export a name-

less model, then you will nd its data stored on the memory card under a- and hNoName.mdl. mx-12 HoTT does not feature a real-time Since the clock, the model data are stored on the memory card with a xed creation date. However, if you wish to change the date manually, you can do so on the PC using a suitable program. Some of the special characters used in certain mod-

el names cannot be accepted due to speci c limita-

tions of the FAT or FAT32 le system used by memo-

ry cards. During the copy process they are replaced by a tilde (~) character. If the memory card already contains a model le of the same name, it will be overwritten without warning.

54 Program description: model memories Import from SD Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the Import from SD sub-menu, then brie y press the SET button. select model clear model copy mod>mod export to SD import from SD

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the model to be imported from the SD memory card:

import from SD-CARD:

ALPINA EXTRA COBRA BELL47G 00/01/01 00/01/01 00/01/01 00/01/01 05

frei Notes:

The export date displayed to the right of the model name is shown in the format Year/Month/Day. Since the mx-12 HoTT does not feature a real-time clock, the model data are stored on the memory card with a xed creation date. However, if you wish to change the date manually, you can do so on the PC using a suitable program. When you do this, and brie y press the SET button of the right-hand four-way button again, an Import to mod-

el: window is displayed. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the target memory, con rm your choice with SET, or press ESC to interrupt the process. An occupied memory can be overwritten:

import to model :

01 GRAUBELE ULTIMATE 02 03 STARLET 04 BELL47G 05

free E06 E06 E06 When you con rm the selected model memory by pressing the SET button, the following security query is displayed:

model 01 03 import ?

NO ULTIMATE

free YES You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this, you are returned to the starting screen. However, if you use the button to select YES, and con rm your choice by pressing the SET button, then the selected model is imported into the selected model memory. Notes:

If the warning SD-CARD INSERT OK appears instead of a model selection, there is no SD card in the card slot; see page 22. When you import a model memory, the binding data

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:54 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:54 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 is copied along with the model data, so that the re-

ceiving system associated with the original model memory can also be operated using the SAME trans-

mitter and the copied memory without repeating the binding procedure. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:55 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs23:55 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 Program description: model memories 55 Base settings Basic model-speci c settings for xed-wing model aircraft Before you start programming speci c parameters, some basic settings must be entered which apply only to the currently active model memory. Select the Basic settings (basic model settings) menu using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

mod.mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry model name mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap 1 no normal 1aile Press the SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the next screen page, where you can select characters to assemble the model name. You can enter up to nine characters to de ne a model name:

0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ

model name GRAUB to select the desired character, then move to the next position in the name by pressing the arrow button of the right-hand four-way button, or its central SET button, where you can select the next character. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) inserts a space at that point. You can move to any character position within the input eld using the buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-

way button returns you to the previous menu page. The model name entered in this way appears in the basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the Model memory menu. stick mode MODE 1 (Throttle at right stick) MODE 2 (Throttle at left stick) elev. down full throttle full throttle elev. down r e d d u r t f e l r i g h t r u d d e r n o r e l i a t f e l r i g h t a i l e r o n r e d d u r t f e l r i g h t r u d d e r n o r e l i a t f e l r i g h t a i l e r o n elev. up idle idle elev. up MODE 3 (Throttle at right stick) MODE 4 (Throttle at left stick) elev. down Motor Vollgas full throttle elev. down n o r e l i a t f e l r i g h t a i l e r o n r e d d u r t f e l r i g h t r u d d e r n o r e l i a t f e l r i g h t a i l e r o n r e d d u r t f e l r i g h t r u d d e r elev. up idle idle elev. up Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the principal control functions of a xed-wing model on the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle (or airbrakes). Which of these options you select depends on your individual preferences and ying style. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the Stick mode line. You will see the select eld framed:

mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap GRAUBELE 1 no normal 1aile Press the SET button to highlight the current stick mode

(black background). Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to select one of the options 1 to 4. Simultaneously pressing the buttons or the buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) returns the display to stick mode 1. Pressing the SET button again disables the select eld once more, so that you can switch lines. motor at C1 mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap GRAUBELE 1 no normal 1aile When you select motor at C1 using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button, you will see the corresponding input eld framed. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to highlight the current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to switch between the Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand four-way button 56 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:56 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:56 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 four possible options:

idle fr.:

The idle position of the throttle / airbrake stick (C1) is forward, i. e. away from the pilot. The throttle warning message Throttle too high, see page 28, and the following op-

tion cut off are activated. In the Wing mixer menu the Brake NN * mixers are disabled. idle re.: The idle position of the throttle / airbrake no:

no/inv stick (C1) is back, i. e. towards the pilot. The throttle warning message Throttle too high, see page 28, and the following op-

tion cut off are activated. In the Wing mixer menu the Brake NN * mixers are disabled. The brake system is retracted in the for-

ward position of the throttle / brake stick. In the Wing mixer menu the Brake NN *

mixers are activated. The throttle warning message Throttle too high, see page 28, and the option cut off are disabled. The brake system is retracted in the back position of the throttle / brake stick. In the Wing mixer menu the Brake NN *

mixers are activated. The throttle warning message Throttle too high, see page 28, and the option cut off are disabled. Notes:

During the programming process it is important to ensure that any internal-combustion engine or

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) electric motor cannot start running accidentally. The safe option is always to disconnect the fuel supply or the ight battery. Depending on your choice in this menu, the Ch 1 trim acts normally (over the full control travel), or just at the idle end of the range, i. e. only at the back or forward end of the stick travel. Please note the scribed on page 40. Cut-off trim function, which is de-

cut off Note:

This menu line is suppressed if you choose none or none/inv in the Motor at Ch 1 line. Depending on your selected setting for Idle forward

/ rear in the motor at C1 line, you can select in this menu line a Motor OFF position which can be called up using a switch. The default settings are -100% for the throttle servo position, and +150% for the transmitter control position. mod name stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type GRAUBELE 1 idle re. normal 100%

+150%

STO If you wish to change the pre-set value for the Motor OFF position of the throttle servo, press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The current setting is highlighted (black background). Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to enter a value at which the motor is reliably off, but without stalling the throttle servo. For example, -125%:

mod name stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type GRAUBELE 1 idle re. normal 125%

+150%

STO The - high - pre-set value in the centre column ensures that the motor can be stopped using the switch (yet to be assigned in the right-hand column) over the full range of travel of the throttle stick. However, if you prefer to set your own individual limit, i. e. the point after which it is possible to switch to the Motor OFF position, move the throttle / collective pitch stick to the desired position, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

mod name stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type GRAUBELE 1 idle re. normal 125%

+100%

STO Note:

You can obtain a switching threshold of more than

+100% by temporarily increasing the travel of servo 1 to more than 100% in the Servo settings menu, then returning it to the original value after storing the switch-

ing threshold. In the right-hand column you can now assign a switch which can be used (in an emergency) to cut the motor. We recommend one of the two self-centring momentary buttons SW 1:

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:57 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:57 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 57 mod name stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type GRAUBELE 1 idle re. normal 125%

+100%

1 Delt/FlW:

STO 2elev sv:

tail type mod name stick mode motor on C1 cut off tail type 125%

GRAUBELE 1 idle re.

+100%

1 normal The mixed elevon (aileron and eleva-

tor) control system requires two or four separate servos, one or two in each wing. However, the elevator trim only affects servos 2 + 3, even if you select 2ail2 -

see below. This option is designed for model aircraft with one or two aileron servos and two elevator servos. When the elevator stick is moved, the servo connected to receiver output 6 moves in parallel with servo 3. The elevator trim lever affects both ser-

vos. Note regarding 2elev sv:

In this mode a transmitter control which is assigned to input 6 in the Transmitter control settings menu is de-coupled from servo 6; this is for safety reasons. When you select tail type using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, you will see the corresponding input eld framed. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to highlight the current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button to select the option which matches your model:

normal:

This setting caters for all models in which each of the functions elevator and rudder is operated by one servo. The elevator and rudder functions are operated by two control surfaces set in a V-shape, each controlled by a separate servo. The two-way coupling function for the rudder and elevator control systems is automatically carried out by the trans-

mitter software. If necessary, the ratio of rudder travel to elevator travel can be adjusted in the Dual Rate menu (page 82). V-tail:

Ailerons / Camber-changing aps stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type aile/flap 125%

1 idle re.

+100%

1 normal 1aile When you select the Aileron / Flap line using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, you will see the corresponding input eld framed. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way but-

ton to highlight the current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to select one of the three options, which are. 1aile 2aile 2ail2 Both ailerons are actuated by a single servo. Each aileron is actuated by one servo. Each aileron is actuated by a separate servo; there are also one or two camber-

changing ap servos. Note:

The 2AL 2FL option is only available with the tail types normal and V-tail, and only if none or none/inv has been selected in the Motor at Ch 1 line. The mixers and associated adjustment facilities which appear in the Wing mixers menu (see section start-

ing on page 88) vary according to the data you enter here. The software provides a maximum of twelve ready-made mixers for up to two aileron servos and two camber-changing ap servos. Note:

If your model is equipped with only one ap servo, you should still select 2ail2 , but leave the AIL FL mixer in the Wing mixer menu, which is described on page 91, at 0%. In contrast, all the other wing mixers can be used in the usual way. The second ap socket which is now vacant must ON NO ACCOUNT be used for any other purpose!

58 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:58 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:58 06.06.2011 19:39:37 06.06.2011 19:39:37 timer Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stop-

watch and one ight timer:

GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 0:00 99%

6.1V 0:00h K78 M HoTT 0.0V You can assign a physical switch or a control switch to these two timers in the right-hand column of the timer line, indicated by the switch symbol at the bottom edge of the screen. 125%

motor at C1 cut off tail type aile/flap timer idle re.

+100%

1 normal 2aile 0:00 The assigned switch starts both timers, and also halts the stopwatch. The method of assigning a physical switch or a control switch is described on page 39. The ight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on a memory card tted in the card slot (see page 22), always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted

(switched off). It can only be stopped by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button when the stopwatch is already halted. Once the timers are stopped, you can reset both timers to their initial value by simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand key (CLEAR). Switching between count-up and count-down Count-up timer (stopwatch function) If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the initial value of 0:00, the timer runs up until the maxi-

mum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at 0:00. Count-down timer (alarm timer function) You can select a starting time within the range 0 to 180 minutes in the left-hand minutes eld, and a starting time within the range 0 to 59 seconds in the right-hand seconds eld. Any combination of times can also be selected. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets any settings you have made to 0 or 00. 125%

motor at C1 cut off tail type aile/flap timer idle re.

+100%

1 normal 2aile 0:00 3 Procedure 1. SET in the centre of the right-hand four-way Select the desired input eld using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button. Press button. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes and seconds elds using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central SET button to conclude the input 2. 3. 4. 5. process. Once you have switched back to the basic display by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button the required number of times, press the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) simultaneously, with the stopwatch stopped, to switch the stopwatch to the Timer func-

tion; see top right in the following illustration:

GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 10:01 0:00 99%

6.1V 0:00h K78 M HoTT 0.0V When you operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch now starts from the set initial value, counting down

(Timer function). When the set time has elapsed, the timer does not stop, but continues to run so that you can read off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black background). Sequence of sounds 30 sec. before zero: triple beep 20 sec. before zero: double beep 10 sec. before zero: single beep 5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher single beep every two seconds single beep every two seconds single beep every second rate zero: longer beep; display switches to inverse video 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:59 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:59 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 59 The alarm timer is reset by simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

ton (CLEAR), once you have halted the timer. Note:

A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by a ashing colon (:) between the minutes eld and the seconds eld. Phase 2 and Phase 3 You will automatically be in the normal ight phase 1 unless you have already assigned a switch to phases 2 or 3. Both the number and name of this ight phase are xed permanently as normal, and cannot be changed. For this reason the normal phase is simply concealed, i. e. it is not displayed as phase 1. tail type aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 normal 2aile 10:01 takeoff speed 3 It is also important to understand that the ight phases have their own inherent priorities which need to be ob-

served, particularly when assigning individual switches. The underlying scheme can be described as follows:

If all assigned ight phase switches are closed or open, the normal ight phase is active. If only one switch is closed, then the ight phase as-

signed to the currently closed switch is active. If two switches are closed, then the ight phase with the lower phase number is active. For example, this would be phase 2 if the switch as-

signed to phase 3 is also closed. As a result you may wish to take the inherent phase priorities into account when assigning names to the ight phases; see below. At the servo end the transition does not occur abruptly, but with a xed transition period of about one second. Programming When you select phase 2 or phase 3 using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, the Name eld for that ight phase is already framed. If the default name does not seem appropriate, press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to select an appropriate name from those available. Press the SET button to conclude the input process. Now press the button of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the right-hand column at the bot-

, tom of the screen, indicated by the switch symbol and brie y press the central SET button. You can now assign a switch to the phase as described on page 39. We recommend one of the two three-position switches SW 4/5 or SW 6/7, in each case starting from the centre toggle position. For more information on ight phase programming please refer to page 86, in the section entitled Phase trim. Receiver output For maximum exibility in terms of receiver socket assignment, the mx-12 HoTT software provides the means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 6;

this is carried out on the second page of the Receiver output sub-menu. aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out 10:01 takeoff speed 2aile 3 7 6 Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the next page of the display. Here you can assign the control channels for servos 1 6 to any receiver output you wish to use. However, please note that the display in Servo display - which you can access from virtually any menu position by simultane-

ously pressing the and buttons of the left-hand four-way button - refers exclusively to the control chan-

nels, i. e. the outputs are NOT swapped over. S 1 2 S S 3 S 4 S 5 output output output output output 1 2 3 4 5 Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the servo / output combination you wish to change, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. Now you can assign the desired servo (S) to the selected output using the right-

60 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:60 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:60 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 hand arrow buttons, and con rm your choice with SET or alternatively press the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the default sequence. Please note that any subsequent changes to servo settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must be carried out according to the original

(default) receiver socket sequence. Note:

It is also possible to distribute the control functions amongst as many receivers as you wish, using the channel-mapping function in the mx-12 HoTTs inte-

gral Telemetry menu, or even to assign the same control function to multiple receiver outputs. For example, you might wish to actuate each aileron with two servos in-

stead of just one, etc. However, we strongly recommend that you use only one of the two options, as a combina-

tion will soon lead to confusion. rx bind Graupner HoTT receivers have to be instructed to communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e. model memory) of a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This process is known as binding, and is only necessary once for each new combination of receiver and model. It can be repeated at any time. Important note:

When carrying out the binding procedure, please ensure that the transmitter aerial is always an adequate distance from the receiver aerials: keeping the aerials about 1 m apart is safe in this respect. Otherwise you risk a failed connection to the down-

link channel, and consequent malfunctions. Binding multiple receivers to one model If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one re-

ceiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially binding the receivers individually, as described in the next section. When operating the system, please note that only the receiver which was bound last will establish a telemetry link to the transmitter. For this reason all telemetry sensors installed in the model must be connected to this receiver, since only the last bound receiver is able to transmit their data via the down-link channel. The second, and all other receivers, run in parallel to the receiver last bound to the transmitter, but completely independently of it; they operate in Slave mode with the down-link channel switched off. Binding transmitter and receiver Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the rx bind line:

screen in the frame of the rx bind line, instead of the three ---:

timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out rx bind 10:01 takeoff speed 3 7 6 BINDING If the receiver LED glows a constant green within about ten seconds, then the binding process has been com-

pleted successfully; you can now release the receivers SET button. Your model / receiver combination is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen displays the code number for the receiver now bound to this model memory. For example:

timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out rx bind 10:01 takeoff speed 3 7 6 timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out rx bind 10:01 takeoff speed 3 7 6 R06 If you have not already done so, switch on the power supply to your receiver now: the green LED on the receiver flashes once briefly, then goes out. Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until the green LED starts to flash. Briefly press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to initiate the so-called binding process between a receiver and the current model memory. At the same time the word BINDING starts flashing on the Conversely, if the green LED on the receiver ashes for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will display three --- once more. If this should occur, alter the relative position of the aerials, and repeat the whole procedure. Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 61 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:61 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:61 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 range test The integral range-check reduces the transmitters out-

put power in such a way that you can test the systems operation at a distance of up to about fty metres. Carry out the range-check of the Graupner HoTT system in accordance with the following instructions. We recommend that you ask a friend to help with range-

checking. 1. Install the receiver in the model as required, prefer-

ably after completing the binding process with the transmitter. Switch the radio control system on and wait until the green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can ob-

serve the servo movements. Place the model on a at surface (paving, close-mown grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least 15 cm above the ground. This means that you may have to place the model on a raised object for the pe-

riod of the check. Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from your body. However, do not point the aerial straight at the model; instead rotate and / or angle the tip of the aeri-

al so that it is vertical while you carry out the check. If you have not already done so, use the arrow but-

tons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the Test range line, and initiate range-check mode by pressing the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. phase 2 phase 3 receiv out rx bind range test takeoff speed 7 6 R06 99sec When you start the range-check, the transmitters output power is signi cantly reduced, and the blue LED on the aerial base starts to ash. At the same time the time display on the transmitter screen starts counting down, and a double beep sounds every ve seconds. From ve seconds before the end of the range-check you will hear a triple beep every second. When the 99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed, the transmitter switches back to full power, and the blue LED glows constantly once more. Within this period walk away from the model, moving the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance of about fty metres you notice a break in the connec-

tion, attempt to reproduce it. If the model is tted with a motor, switch it on in order to check the systems interference rejection. Walk further away from the model until you no longer have full control over it. At this point wait until the test period has elapsed, with the model still switched on and ready for use. When the range-check period is over, the model should re-

spond again to control commands. It this is not 100%

the case, do not use the system. Contact your nearest Service Centre of Graupner GmbH & Co. KG. Carry out the range-check before every ight, and simulate all the servo movements which are likely to 10. occur in a typical ight. To ensure safe operation of the model, the range must always be at least fty me-

tres on the ground. Caution:

Never initiate a range-check when you are actually operating a model!

RF transmit In this menu line you can manually switch the transmit-

ters RF transmission on and off again for a speci c model for the current period that the transmitter is switched on. For example, you might wish to do this to save power when demonstrating the programming of a model. If you switch the transmitter off with the RF module switched off, next time you switch the trans-

mitter on it will be switched back on again. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the RF module line, and press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the value window:

phase 3 receiv out rx bind range test RF transmit speed 6 R06 99sec OFF Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch between OFF and ON. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button again to conclude the input. 62 Program description: base settings - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:62 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs24:62 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs59:63 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs59:63 For your notes 63 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 Base settings Basic model-speci c settings for model helicopters Before you start programming speci c parameters, some basic settings must be entered which apply only to the currently active model memory. Select the Basic settings (Basic model settings) menu using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, and press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

mod.mem. servo set. D/R expo free mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. heli mixer swashp. mix basic sett telemetry Model name mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

1

+150%

1 servo right Press the SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the next screen page, where you can select characters to assemble the model name. You can enter up to nine characters to de ne a model name:

0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQR STUVWXYZ

model name STAR to select the desired character. Press one of the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, or its central SET button, to move to the next position in the name, at which point you can again select a character. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) inserts a space at that point. You can move to any character position within the input eld using the buttons of the right-hand four-way button. You can return to the previous menu page by brie y pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-

way button. The model name entered in this way appears in the basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the Model memory menu point. Stick mode Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the principal control functions of a model helicopter on the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch. Which of these options you select depends on your individual preferences and ying style:

MODE 1 (Throttle at right stick) MODE 2 (Throttle at left stick) pitch axis throttle throttle pitch axis r o t o r l i a t t a i l r o t o r l l o r r o l l r o t o r l i a t t a i l r o t o r l l o r r o l l pitch axis throttle throttle pitch axis MODE 3 (Throttle at right stick) MODE 4 (Throttle at left stick) pitch axis Motor/Pitch throttle pitch axis l l o r r o l l r o t o r l i a t t a i l r o t o r l l o r r o l l r o t o r l i a t t a i l r o t o r Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand four-way button 64 Program description: base settings - model helicopter pitch axis throttle throttle pitch axis Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the Stick mode line; the select eld is now framed:

mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

STARLET 1

+150%

1 servo right Brie y press the SET button: the current stick mode appears highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to choose one of the options 1 to 4. By simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) the display reverts to stick mode 1. A further brief press on the SET button disables the select eld again, so that you can change to a different line. Swashplate type mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

STARLET 1

+150%

1 servo right You will require a particular program variant to suit the number of servos which operate the collective pitch function. Select Swashplate with the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, and the select eld 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:64 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:64 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 is framed. Press the SET button: the current number of collective pitch servos is highlighted on the screen. You can now determine the required variant using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button:

1 servo:

The swashplate is tilted by one roll servo and one pitch-axis servo. Collective pitch is controlled by one separate servo. The Swashplate mixer menu point is suppressed in the multi-function menu if you select 1 servo as the swashplate type. This is because model helicopters with only one collective pitch servo are controlled WITHOUT transmitter mixers for the swashplate functions collective pitch, pitch-axis and roll. The swashplate is moved axially by two roll servos for collective pitch control;

pitch-axis control is de-coupled by a mechanical compensating rocker. A symmetrical three-point swashplate linkage using three linkage points ar-

ranged equally at 120, actuated by one pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two roll servos (left and right). For collective pitch control all three servos move the swashplate axially. Asymmetrical three-point swashplate link-

age using three linkage points, connected to one pitch servo (rear) and two roll servos (front left and right). For collective pitch control all three servos move the swashplate axially. A symmetrical three-point linkage as above, but rotated through 90, i. e. one 2 servo:

3sv(2rol):

3sv(140):

3sv(2nic):

4sv(90):

roll servo on one side, and two pitch-axis servos front and rear. Four-point swashplate linkage using two roll and two pitch-axis servos. Note re. 4Sv (90):

As can be seen in the receiver assign-

ment on page 47, the second pitch-axis servo is connected to output 5. For this reason the Gyro option, which is assigned to output 5 as standard for sys-

tems with 1 3 collective pitch servos, is suppressed in the Helimix menu and the line of the same name in the Trans-

mitter control settings menu. 2 1 3 Swashplate type: 3 servos (140) 2 1 3 Swashplate type: 3 servos (pitch-axis) Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the swash-

plate type to 1 servo. Swashplate type: 1 servo 1 3 2 2 Swashplate type: 2 servos 2 1 Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 roll) Swashplate type: 4 servos (90), 2 pitch / 2 roll 2 5 3 1 Note:

With the exception of the 1 servo pre-set, the swash-

plate mixer ratios are set in the Swashplate mixers menu; see page 112. Program description: base settings - model helicopter 65 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:65 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:65 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 Cut off As part of the auto-rotation set-up procedure of the mx-12 HoTT transmitters Helicopter program there is the option to de ne a motor OFF position for the throt-

tle servo or speed controller for use in an emergency. However, if you set an idle position in the Throttle line instead of an emergency OFF position - for example, in order to avoid having to re-start the engine after every practice auto-rotation landing - then this option is not available. In this case we recommend that you use the Motor stop option described below as the emergency OFF solution. Depending on the option (forward / back) you have selected in the Collective pitch minimum line, you can de ne a Motor OFF position in this menu line which can be called up by operating a switch. The default settings are -100% for the Motor OFF position of the throttle servo and +150% for the throttle curve:

mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

STARLET 1

+150%

3sv(2rol) right mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 125%

STARLET 1

+150%

3sv(2rol) right mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct STARLET 1 3sv(2rol) 125% +100% 1 right STO STO The - high - pre-set value in the centre column ensures that the motor can be stopped over the maximum pos-

sible range of the throttle curve using the switch which has yet to be assigned in the right-hand column. However, if you prefer to set your own individual limit, i. e. the point after which it is possible to switch to the motor OFF position, move the throttle / collective pitch stick to the position you desire, than press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct STARLET 1 3sv(2rol) right 125% +100%

STO left:

Direction of rotation of main rotor mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct STARLET 1 3sv(2rol) 125% +100% 1 right In the Rotor direction line you enter the direction of rotation of the main rotor using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, after pressing the central SET button:

right:

the main rotor spins clockwise as viewed from above. the main rotor spins anti-clockwise as viewed from above. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) switches to right. STO If you wish to change the pre-set value for the Motor OFF position of the throttle servo, press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The current setting is highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to enter a value at which the motor is reliably off, but without stalling the throttle servo. For example: -125%:

Note:

You can obtain a switching threshold of more than

+100% by temporarily increasing the travel of servo 1 to more than 100% in the Servo settings menu, then returning it to the original value after storing the switch-

ing threshold. In the right-hand column you can now assign a switch which can be used (in an emergency) to cut the motor. We recommend the self-centring momentary button SW 1:

66 Program description: base settings - model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:66 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:66 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and the direction of operation of the throttle /

collective pitch stick is highlighted. Now you can select the required variant using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button:

Pitch Timers Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stop-

watch and one ight timer. STARLET

#02 stop flt 0:00 0:00 99%

6.1V 0:00h K78 M HoTT 0.0V A physical switch or a control switch - e. g. the control switch G3 located on the throttle limiter - can be as-

signed to these two timers in the Timers line The meaning is as follows:

front: minimum collective pitch when the collective pitch stick (Ch 1) is forward (away from you);

rear: minimum collective pitch when the collective pitch stick (Ch 1) is back (towards you). Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) returns the collec-

tive pitch min. position to rear. Note:

The Ch 1 trim always affects the throttle servo only. By default what is known as the throttle limiter is set

(see page 79); this limits the travel of the throttle ser-

vo in the direction of maximum throttle, acting sepa-

rately from the collective pitch servos. This point can be programmed using the Lim input in the Trans-

mitter control settings menu. swashplate cut off rotor direct pitch min timer 3sv(2rol) 125% +100% 1 right rear 0:00 at the bottom right-hand using the switch symbol side of the screen. The assigned switch starts both tim-

ers, and also halts the stopwatch. The method of assigning a physical switch or a control switch is described on page 39. The ight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on a memory card inserted in the card slot (see page 22) always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted

(switched off). It can only be stopped by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button with the stopwatch halted. Once stopped, both timers can be reset to the initial value by simultaneously pressing the buttons of right-hand rotation left-hand rotation The program requires this information in order to set up the mixers to work in the correct sense; this applies to the mixers which compensate for rotor torque and motor power. You will nd these in the Helicopter mixer menu:

Collective pitch min. Pitch Ch1 throttle Ch1 tail rotor stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct pitch min 125% +100% 1 1 3sv(2rol) right rear In the Collective pitch min. line you can set up the direction of operation of the throttle / collective pitch stick to suit your preference. This setting is crucial to the correct operation of all the other options in the helicopter program which affect the throttle and collective pitch functions, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim, tail rotor mixer etc. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:67 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:67 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 Program description: base settings - model helicopter 67 the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR). Switching between count-up and count-down Count-up timer (stopwatch function) If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the initial value of 0:00, the timer runs up until the maxi-

mum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at 0:00. Count-down timer (timer function) In the left-hand minutes eld you can select a starting time within the range 0 to 180 minutes; in the right-hand seconds eld the range is 0 to 59 seconds. Any combi-

nation of times can also be selected. Simultaneously pressing the buttons of the right-

hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets any settings you have entered to 0 or 00. swashplate cut off rotor direct pitch min timer 3sv(2rol) 125% +100% 1 right rear 10:01 G3 Procedure 1. SET in the centre of the right-hand four-way Select the desired input eld using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button. Press button. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes and seconds elds using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central process. SET button to conclude the input 2. 3. 4. 68 Program description: base settings - model helicopter 5. Switch back to the basic display by repeatedly press-

ing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button. With the stopwatch halted, press the buttons of the right-hand four-way button simultane-

ously (CLEAR) to switch the stopwatch to the Timer function; see top right in the next illustration:

ton (CLEAR) after you have halted the timer. Note:

A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by a ashing colon (:) between the minutes eld and the seconds eld. STARLET

#02 stop flt 10:01 0:00 99%

6.1V 0:00h K78 M HoTT 0.0V If you now operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch starts from the set initial value, counting down (Timer function). When the set time has elapsed, the timer does not stop, but continues to run to allow you to read off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black background). Sequence of sounds 30 sec. before zero: triple beep 20 sec. before zero: double beep 10 sec. before zero: single beep 5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher single beep every two seconds single beep every two seconds single beep every second rate zero: longer beep; display switches to inverse video The alarm timer is reset by simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

Phase 2 You will automatically be in the normal ight phase 1 unless you have already assigned a switch to phase 2 or auto-rotation. Both the number and name of this ight phase are xed permanently as normal, and cannot be changed. For this reason the normal phase is simply concealed, i. e. it is not displayed as phase 1. cut off rotor direct pitch min timer phase 2 125% +100% 1 right rear 10:01 G3 hover It is also important to understand that the ight phases have their own inherent priorities which need to be ob-

served, particularly when assigning individual switches. The underlying scheme can be described as follows:

If all assigned ight phase switches are closed or open, the normal ight phase is active. If only one switch is closed, then the ight phase as-

signed to the currently closed switch is active. The auto-rotation phase ALWAYS has precedence over all other ight phases, regardless of the priori-

ties outlined above. When the auto-rotation phase is selected, the switch is always made WITHOUT DELAY. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:68 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:68 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 With this in mind, you may wish to alter the default ight phase name Hover for ight phase 2 to take the inherent priorities into account; see below. At the servo end the transition does not occur abruptly, but with a xed transition period of about one second. Programming When you select Phase 2 using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, the Name eld for that ight phase is already framed. If the default name does not seem appropriate, press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to select an appropriate name from those available. Press the SET button to conclude the input process. Now press the button of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the right-hand column, at the bottom of the screen indicated by the switch symbol

, and press the central SET button. You can now assign a switch to the phase as described on page 39. For more information on ight phase programming please refer to page 94, in the section entitled Flight phase speci c settings for collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor. Auto-rotation rotor direct pitch min timer phase 2 autorotat. right rear 10:01 G3 hover 5 The name Auto-rotation is permanently assigned to Phase 3, and CANNOT be altered. The only available option is to assign a switch to it using the switch symbol at the right of the screen. For more information on programming ight phases please refer to the Helicopter mixers section starting on page 94. Receiver output For maximum exibility in terms of receiver socket assignment, the mx-12 HoTT software provides the means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 6;

this is carried out on the second page of the Receiver output sub-menu. pitch min timer phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rear 10:01 G3 hover 5 4 Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the next page of the display. Here you can assign the transmitters six control channels to any receiver output you wish to use, i. e. servo sockets 1 6. However, please note that the display in Servo display - which you can access from virtually any menu position by simultaneously pressing the and buttons of the left-hand four-way button - refers exclu-

sively to the control channels, i. e. the outputs are NOT swapped over. S 1 2 S S 3 S 4 S 5 output output output output output 1 2 3 4 5 Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the servo / output combination you wish to change, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. Now you can assign the desired servo (S) to the selected output using the right-

hand arrow buttons, and con rm your choice with SET or alternatively press the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the default sequence. Please note that any subsequent changes to servo settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must be carried out according to the original

(default) receiver socket sequence. Typical application:

In the helicopter program of the mx-12 HoTT the outputs for one collective pitch servo and the throttle servo have been interchanged compared to all earlier GRAUPNER/JR mc-systems. The throttle servo is now assigned to receiver output 6 and the collective pitch servo to output 1. However, you may wish to retain the earlier con guration. Program description: base settings - model helicopter 69 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:69 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:69 06.06.2011 19:39:38 06.06.2011 19:39:38 S 6 2 S S 3 S 4 S 5 S 1 output output output output output output 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note:

It is also possible to distribute the control functions amongst as many receivers as you wish, using the channel-mapping function in the mx-12 HoTTs integral Telemetry menu, or even to assign the same control function to multiple receiver outputs. However, we strongly recommend that you use only one of the two options, as a combination will soon lead to confusion.

(Bound receiver) rx bind Graupner HoTT receivers have to be instructed to communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e. model memory) of a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This process is known as binding, and is only necessary once for each new combination of receiver and model. It can be repeated at any time. Important note:

When carrying out the binding procedure, please ensure that the transmitter aerial is always an adequate distance from the receiver aerials: keeping the aerials about 1 m apart is safe in this respect. Otherwise you risk a failed connection to the down-

link channel, and consequent malfunctions. Binding multiple receivers to one model If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one re-

ceiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially binding the receivers individually, as described in the next section. When operating the system, please note that only the receiver which was bound last will establish a telemetry link to the transmitter. For this reason all te-

lemetry sensors installed in the model must be connect-

ed to this receiver, since only the last bound receiver is able to transmit their data via the down-link channel. The second, and all other receivers, run in parallel to the receiver last bound to the transmitter, but completely independently of it; they operate in Slave mode with the down-link channel switched off. Binding transmitter and receiver Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the rx bind line:

timer phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rx bind 10:01 G3 hover 5 4 If you have not already done so, switch on the power supply to your receiver now: the green LED on the receiver flashes once briefly, then goes out. Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until the green LED starts to flash. Briefly press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to initiate the so-called binding process between a receiver and the current model memory. At the same time the word BINDING starts flashing on the screen in the frame of the rx bind line, instead of the 70 Program description: base settings - model helicopter three ---:

timer phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rx bind 10:01 G3 hover 5 4 BINDING If the receiver LED glows a constant green within about ten seconds, then the binding process has been com-

pleted successfully; you can now release the receivers SET button. Your model / receiver combination is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen displays the code number for the receiver now bound to this model memory. For example:

timer phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rx bind 10:01 G3 hover 5 4 R06 Conversely, if the green LED on the receiver ashes for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will display three --- once more. If this should occur, alter the relative position of the aerials, and repeat the whole procedure. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:70 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:70 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 2. Range test The integral range-check reduces the transmitters output power in such a way that you can test the systems operation at a distance of up to about fty metres. Carry out the range-check of the Graupner HoTT system in accordance with the following instructions. We recom-

mend that you ask a friend to help with range-checking. Install the receiver in the model as required, prefer-

1. ably after completing the binding process with the transmitter. Switch the radio control system on and wait until the green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can ob-

serve the servo movements. Place the model on a at surface (paving, close-mown grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least 15 cm above the ground. This means that you may have to place the model on a raised object for the period of the check. Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from your body. Do not point the aerial straight at the model; in-

stead rotate and / or angle the aerial tip so that it is vertical while you carry out the check. If you have not already done so, use the arrow but-

tons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the Test range line, and initiate range-

check mode by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

3. 4. 5. phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rx bind range test speed 5 4 R06 99sec RF transmit In this menu line you can manually switch the transmit-

ters RF transmission on and off again for a speci c model for the period that the transmitter is currently switched on. For example, you might wish to do this to save power when demonstrating the programming of a model. If you switch the transmitter off with the RF module switched off, next time you switch the trans-

mitter on it will be switched back on again. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the RF transmit line, and press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the value window:

autorotat. receiv out rx bind range test RF transmit 4 R06 99sec ON Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch between OFF and ON. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button again to conclude the input. When you start the range-check, the transmitters output power is signi cantly reduced, and the blue LED on the aerial base starts to ash. At this point the time display on the transmitter screen starts counting down, and a double beep sounds every ve seconds. From ve seconds before the end of the range-check you will hear a triple beep every second. When the 99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed, the transmitter switches back to full power, and the blue LED glows constantly once more. Within this period walk away from the model, moving the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance of about fty metres you notice a break in the connec-

tion, attempt to reproduce it. If the model is tted with a motor, switch it on in order to check the systems interference rejection. Walk further away from the model until you no longer have full control over it. At this point wait until the test period has elapsed, with the model still switched on and ready for use. When the range-check period is over, the model should respond again to control commands. It this is not 100% the case, do not use the system. Contact your nearest Graupner Service Centre. Carry out a range-check before every ight, and sim-

ulate all the servo movements which are likely to oc-

cur in a typical ight. To ensure safe operation of the model, the range must always be at least fty metres on the ground. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Caution:

Never initiate a range-check when you are actually operating a model!

Program description: base settings - model helicopter 71 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:71 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs25:71 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Servo settings Servo direction, centre, travel S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

In this menu you can adjust parameters which only af-

fect the servo connected to a particular receiver output, namely the direction of servo rotation, neutral point and servo travel. Always start with the servo setting in the left-hand column.v Basic procedure:

1.

of the left or Use the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the relevant servo (1 to 6). If necessary, use the arrow buttons right-hand four-way button to select the desired co-

lumn, and move the associated transmitter control away from its centre position if you wish to de ne an asymmetrical setting. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button, and the corresponding input eld is high-

lighted (black background). Set the appropriate value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons

or

of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) re-

sets any settings you have entered to the default val-

ue. SET button of the right-hand four-

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. receiver output socket to which a particular servo(s) is connected, assuming that these have not been swapped over. This means that changing the stick mode does not affect the numbering of the servos. Column 2 Rev. The direction of servo rotation can be adjusted to suit the actual installation in your model. This means that you dont need to concern yourself with servo directions when installing the mechanical linkages in the model, as you can reverse them as and when necessary. The direction of rotation is indicated by the symbols => and

<=. Be sure to set the direction of servo rotation before you make adjustments to the remaining options!

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the direction of rotation to =>. normal normal reversed Column 3 Centre The facility to offset the servo travel centre is intended for adjusting servos whose centre setting is not standard

(servo centre point at 1.5 ms or 1500 s), and also for minor adjustments, e. g. when ne-tuning the neutral position of the models control surfaces. The neutral position can be shifted over the range

-125% to +125% of normal servo travel, within the maximum servo travel of +/- 150%, regardless of the trim lever position and any mixers you have set up. The setting affects the associated servo directly, independ-

ently of all other trim and mixer settings. However, please note that an extreme shift of the servos neutral point may result in servo travel to one side of neutral only, as total servo travel is limited to +/- 150%

for both electronic and mechanical reasons. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted input eld to 0%.

-1 2 5 reversed S e r vo travel r e adjustment +125

% C e n t

Important:

The numbers in the servo designations refer to the 72 Program description: servo settings 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs26:72 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs26:72 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Column 4 - Servo travel +

In this column you can adjust servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically (different each side of neutral). The adjustment range is 0 150% of normal servo travel. The reference point for the set values is the setting in the Centre column. To set symmetrical travel, i. e. to adjust travel equally on both sides of neutral, move the associated transmitter control (stick, proportional rotary knob or switch) to a position in which the marking frame encloses both sides of the travel setting. Note:

You may need to assign a transmitter control to a servo which is connected to one of the control channels 5 and 6; this is accomplished in the Transmitter control settings menu; see next page. To set up asymmetrical travel, move the associated transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob or switch) to the side to be adjusted, so that the marking frame only encloses the value you wish to change. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate value adjustment; the value eld is now highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to change the values. A further brief press on the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button concludes the input process. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the parameter in the highlighted input eld to 100%. directly by a stick channel, or by means of any type of mixer function. l e v a r t o v r e S Important:

In contrast to the Transmitter control settings menu, this setting affects the servo directly, regardless of how the control signal for this servo is generated, i. e. either The graph alongside shows an example of asymmetrical servo travel, with a setting of

-50% and +150%. Transmitter control travel Program description: servo settings 73 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs26:73 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs26:73 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Transmitter control settings Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches I5 I6 free free

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control functions 1 to 4, the mx-12 HoTT is tted as standard with a range of supplementary controls:

Two rotary proportional controls: CTRL 7 and 8. These are included in the menu as ctrl 7 and ctrl 8. Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu as ctrl 9 and ctrl 10 respectively. One two-position switch: SW 3. This is indicated in the menu by 3 plus a switch symbol, which indi-

cates the direction of operation of the switch. One momentary switch: SW 1. This is indicated by 1 plus a switch symbol and direction indicator, as mentioned above. The two dual-axis stick units directly affect the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 4 (assuming that you have set up a newly initialised model memory with the model type Fixed-wing model). In contrast, the sup-

plementary transmitter controls listed above are inactive when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered). As already mentioned on page 20, this means that the transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con-

nected to receiver outputs 1 4 using the primary sticks - even when you have initialised a new model memory with the model type Fixed-wing model and bound it to the receiver you intend to install. Any ser-

vos connected to receiver sockets 5 and 6 simply stay 74 at their centre point when you operate the associated transmitter controls. This may seem rather inconvenient at rst sight, but it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of the supplementary transmitter controls for any task you like, and that you are not required deliberately to program away the transmitter controls which are not required for a particular model. Any super uous transmitter control will have an effect on your model if you operate it by mistake -

unless it is inactive, i. e. unless no function is assi-

gned to it. That is why you can select these supplementary trans-

mitter controls with complete freedom in the Transmitter control settings menu and assign them to any function input (see page 38) you like, as this method ensures that the transmitter meets your own requirements exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter controls can be assigned to several functions simulta-

neously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X, which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be assigned as the On / Off switch controlling the Timers in the Basic settings menu. The basic procedure:

1. Select the appropriate input I5 I6 using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button. If necessary, use the arrow buttons or right-hand four-way button to switch to the desired column. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button, and the corresponding input eld is high-

lighted. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and 2. 3. 4.

of the left 5. 6. SET button of the right-hand four-

set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central way button to conclude the input process.

or buttons of Simultaneously pressing the the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets any settings you have entered to the appropriate default value. Column 2 Assigning transmitter controls and switches Select one of the function inputs 5 to 6 using the buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the assignment facility. I5 E6 E7 free frei frei

operate desired

switch or control

+100% +100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trv

Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL 7 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 and 3). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not detect-

ed until they have moved a few ratchet clicks, i. e. they need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel is not suf cient for the transmitter to detect it, move the control in the opposite direction. If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then possible to switch to and fro between two end-point values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF. The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you Program description: transmitter control settings - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs27:74 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs27:74 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 will nd in the Transmitter control settings menu as Control 9 and Control 10, provide a centre position in addition to the two end-points. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) with the switch assignment activated - see illustration above - resets the input to free. Tips:

When assigning the switches please take care to set them to the appropriate direction of travel, and en-

sure that all inputs not required are left at or set to free, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls are operated accidentally. You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned switch by adjusting servo travel, as described in the next section. The screen now displays either the transmitter control number or the switch number, followed by a switch sym-

bol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:

I5 I6 3 ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

Column 3 -Travel+

In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo travel. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select one of the inputs 5 or 6. If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 or 8 or switches 4/5 and 6/7) to a position at which the marking frame encloses both sides of the travel setting:

I5 I6 3 ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel setting you wish to change:

trv

I5 I6 3 ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the value setting; the value eld is now shown highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button to alter the values:

I5 I6 3

+100% +100%

ctrl 7 +111% +111%

trv

I5 I6 3 ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+88% +111%

trv

Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button once more to conclude the input process. Negative and positive parameter values are possible;

this enables you to set the appropriate direction of movement of the transmitter control or its direction of effect to suit your model. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the altered parameter in the highlighted input eld to +100%. Important:

In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling inputs derived from it, i. e. in the nal analysis all the servos which can be operated using the associated transmitter control. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs27:75 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs27:75 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Program description: transmitter control settings - xed-wing model 75 Transmitter control settings Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches gyr thr lim free free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control functions 1 to 4, the mx-12 HoTT is tted as standard with a range of supplementary controls:

Two rotary proportional controls: CTRL 7 and 8. These are included in the menu as ctrl 7 and ctrl 8. Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu as ctrl 9 and ctrl 10 respectively. One two-position switch: SW 3. This is indicated in the menu by 3 plus a switch symbol, which indi-

cates the direction of operation of the switch. One momentary switch: SW 1. This is indicated by 1 plus a switch symbol and direction indicator, as mentioned above. The two dual-axis stick units directly affect servos connected to receiver outputs 1 4 and 6 (assuming that you have set up a newly initialised model memory with the model type Helicopter). In contrast, the sup-

plementary transmitter controls listed above are inactive when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered). The exception is the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7

(throttle limiter), which acts upon servo 6 by default. As already mentioned on page 20, this means that the transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con-

nected to receiver outputs 1 4 using the primary sticks, plus servo 6 - depending on the position of the throttle limiter - even when you have initialised a new 76 model memory with the model type Helicopter and bound it to the receiver you intend to install. Any servo connected to receiver socket 5 simply stays at its centre point when you operate the associated transmitter controls. This may seem rather inconvenient at rst sight, but it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of the supplementary transmitter controls for any task you like, and that you are not required deliberately to program away the transmitter controls which are not required for a particular model. Any super uous transmitter control will have an effect on your model if you operate it by mistake, unless it is inactive, i. e. unless no function is assi-

gned to it. That is why you can select these supplementary trans-

mitter controls with complete freedom in the Transmitter control settings menu, and assign them to any function input (see page 38) you like, as this method ensures that the transmitter meets your own requirements exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter controls can be assigned to several functions simultane-

ously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be as-

signed as the On / OFF switch controlling the Timers in the Basic settings menu. Note:

For model helicopters input 6 must always be left free. Please see the section entitled Throttle on the next double-page. The basic procedure 1. Select the appropriate input I5 I6 using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

of the left If necessary, use the arrow buttons or right-hand four-way button to switch to the desired column. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button, and the corresponding input eld is high-

lighted. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. Simultaneously pressing the

or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets any settings you have entered to the appropriate default value. SET button of the right-hand four-

Column 2 Assigning transmitter controls and switches Select one of the function inputs gyro, throttle or lim using the buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the assignment facility. lim Gas Gyr ctrl 7 frei frei

operate desired

switch or control

+100% +100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trv

Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL 7 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 or 3). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not detected until they have moved a few ratchet clicks, i. e. they Program description: transmitter control settings model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:76 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:76 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel is not suf cient for the transmitter to detect it, move the control in the opposite direction. If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then possible to switch to and fro between two end-point values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF. The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you will nd in the Transmitter control settings menu as CTRL 9 and CTR 10, provide a centre position in addition to the two end-points. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) with the switch assignment activated - see illustration above - resets the input to free. Tips:

When assigning the switches please take care to set them to the appropriate direction of travel, and en-

sure that all inputs not required are left at or set to free, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls are operated accidentally. You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned switch by adjusting servo travel as described in the next section. The screen now displays either the transmitter control number or the switch number, followed by a switch sym-

bol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:

gyr thr lim 3 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

gyr thr lim 3 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

trv

Column 3 -Travel+

In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo travel. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select one of the inputs gyro, throttle or lim. If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switches 4/5 and 6/7) to a position at which the marking frame encloses both sides of the travel setting:

gyr thr lim 3 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel setting you wish to change:

Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the value setting; the value eld is now shown highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button to alter the values:

gyr thr lim 3 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+111% +111%

trv

gyr thr lim 3 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+111%

+88%

trv

Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to conclude the input process. Negative and positive parameter values are possible;

this enables you to set the appropriate direction of movement of the transmitter control or its direction of effect to suit your model. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the altered parameter in the highlighted input eld to +100%. Program description: transmitter control settings model helicopter 77 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:77 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:77 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Important:

In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling inputs derived from it, i. e. in the nal analysis all the servos which can be operated using the associated transmitter control. Gyr Throttle gyr thr lim free free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

gyr thr lim ctrl 8 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

trv

If the gyro you are using features in nitely variable gain control, then you can pre-set the static gyro effect by setting an offset within the range +/-125%, separately for each ight phase, in the Gyro line of the Helicopter mixers menu - see the section starting on page 98. Once you have entered these pre-de ned - static - gain settings (set separately for each ight phase in the Helicopter mixers menu), you can use a transmitter control such as the rotary proportional control CTRL 8 to vary gyro gain around the set offset point; all you have to do is assign that transmitter control in the Gyro line of this menu: in the centre position of the transmitter control this corresponds to the setting selected in the Helicopter mixers menu (see section starting on page 98). If the transmitter control is moved from this centre point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain is increased;

towards the opposite end-point it is reduced. This is a fast, simple method of ne-tuning gyro gain when the model is in ight - perhaps to suit varying weather conditions - or alternatively to nd the optimum setting. In software terms you can also limit the gain range to both sides by restricting the transmitter control travel. However, please be sure to read the set-up notes provided with your gyro before carrying out these adjustments, as you could render your helicopter uncontrollable if you make a mistake. In principle all transmitter controls (rotary proportional knob) and switches present on the transmitter can be assigned to the individual inputs within the Helicopter program. However, please note that all inputs available in this menu are already pre-de ned for helicopter-speci c functions, and for this reason cannot always be used without restriction. For example, the receiver sequence printed on page 47 shows that the throttle servo (or the speed controller of an electric-powered model helicopter) must be con-

nected to receiver output 6, i. e. control channel 6 is reserved for motor speed control. However, in contrast to a xed-wing aircraft, the throt-

tle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the throttle stick or any other transmitter control, but via a complex mixer system - see Helicopter mixers menu, starting on page 94. The throttle limit function

(described on the next page) also has an in uence on this mixer system. Assigning a transmitter control or switch in the Throt-

tle line, or its supplementary control signal, would only unnecessarily confuse this complex mixer system. For this reason the Throttle input MUST always be left free when you are programming a model helicopter. 78 Program description: transmitter control settings model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:78 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:78 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Throttle limit function Lim input By default the lim input is assigned to the rotary pro-

portional control CTRL 7, which is located at top left on the transmitter:

gyr thr lim ctrl 8 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

This pre-de ned assignment eliminates the need to program two ight phases - with idle-up and without idle-up - as are often used by other radio control sys-

tems for this purpose, since the method of raising the system rotational speed below the hover point is more exible with the mx-12 HoTT program, and can be ne-tuned more accurately than using the conventional idle-up function. However, if you prefer to program your helicopter with idle-up, then switch off the throttle limit function, described below, by setting the Lim input to free. Meaning and application of throttle limit As mentioned previously under Throttle, the power output of the engine or motor of a model helicopter is not controlled directly using the throttle (Ch 1) stick - in contrast to xed-wing model aircraft. Instead it is control-

led indirectly by the throttle curve settings which you set up in the Helicopter mixers menu. Alternatively the throttle is controlled by the speed controller if the unit you are using is a governor or regulator. Note:

Naturally it is possible to set up different throttle curves to suit different stages of ight using ight phase pro-

gramming. By their very nature, both methods of controlling power have the same result, i. e. that a helicopters motor never gets anywhere near its idle speed during normal ying, so it is impossible to start or stop the motor easily unless some other means is used. The Throttle limiter function solves this problem in an elegant manner: a separate transmitter control - as standard this is the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 located at top left on the transmitter - is employed to limit the setting of the throttle servo or the speed controller, which means that you can throttle right back to the idle position. At this setting the trim of the throttle / collective pitch stick assumes control, and can be used to switch off an electric motor directly. At the other extreme, the throttle servo or speed controller can, of course, only reach its full-throttle position if you release full servo travel using the throttle limit control. That is why the lim input is reserved in the Helicopter program for the Throttle limiter function. For this reason the right-hand positive value in the Travel column must be large enough to ensure that it does not limit the full-throttle setting available via the throttle curve settings when the throttle limit control is at its maximum position. Usually this means a value in the range +100% to +125%. The left-hand negative value in the Travel column should be set in such a way that the throttle limit control reliably cuts the electric motor, or closes the throttle to the point where you can cut the I.C. motor using the (digital) Ch 1 trim. For this reason you should leave this value at +100%, at least for the time being. This variable limiting of throttle travel provides a convenient means of starting and stopping the motor. However, it also gives an additional level of safety if, for example, you have to carry your helicopter to the ight line with the motor running: you simply move the control to its minimum position, and this prevents any accidental movement of the Ch 1 stick affecting the throttle servo. If the carburettor is too far open (or the speed controller not at stop) when you switch the transmitter on, you will hear an audible warning, and the screen displays the message:

throttle too high !

Tip:

You can call up the Servo display menu to check the in uence of the throttle limit slider. This menu can be accessed from virtually any menu points by simultane-

ously pressing the buttons of the left-hand four-way button. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mx-12 HoTT. Basic idle setting Start by turning the throttle limiter - by default the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 located at top left on the transmitter - clockwise to its end-point. Move the throt-

tle / collective pitch stick to the maximum position, and ensure that a standard throttle curve is active in the Channel 1 throttle sub-menu of the Heli mixer menu. If you have already altered the standard throttle curve which is present when you rst initialise a model memory, then this should be reset to the values Point 1 = -100%, Point 3 = 0% and Point 5 = +100%

- at least temporarily.

(page 94 105) 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:79 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:79 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 Program description: transmitter control settings model helicopter 79 ch1 thr input output point 3 0%

0%

0%

To complete this basic set-up you still have to adjust the idle trim range to coincide with point 1 of the throttle curve. This is accomplished by setting point 1 of the Ch 1 throttle mixer in the Heli mixer menu to a value of about -65 to -70%:

Note:

Since the throttle trim lever has no effect when the throt-

tle limiter is open, its position is not relevant at this point. Now - without starting the glow motor - adjust the mechanical linkage of the throttle servo so that the carburettor barrel is fully open; if necessary, carry out ne-tuning using the travel setting for servo 6 in the Servo settings menu. Close the throttle limiter completely by turning the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 anti-clockwise to its end-

point. Use the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick to move the trim position marker to the motor OFF position (see illustration in the right-hand column of the next page). Note:

In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the posi-

tion of the throttle / collective pitch stick is not relevant;

it can therefore be left in the maximum collective pitch position, i. e. the throttle linkage can be adjusted be-

tween full-throttle (throttle limiter open) and motor OFF

(throttle limiter closed) using just the throttle limiter. Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the mechani-

cal throttle linkage so that the carburettor is just fully closed. However, do check carefully that the throttle servo is not stalled at either of its extreme end-points

(full-throttle / motor OFF). ch1 thr input output point 1 100%

66%

66%

To check that the setting is exact, i. e. that there is a seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve, you need to close the throttle limiter and move the collective pitch stick to and fro slightly at the minimum end-point. When you do this, the throttle servo must not move! In any case ne-tuning must be carried out with the model ying. The motor is always started with the throttle limiter completely closed; this has the effect that the idle speed is adjusted solely using the trim lever of the throttle /

collective pitch stick. Throttle limit in conjunction with the digital trim When used with the throttle limit control CTRL 7, the Ch 1 trim places a marker at the set idle position of the motor; at this point the motor can be stopped using the trim. If the trim is in its end-range (see screen-shot: top picture in the right-hand column), then a single click immediately takes you back to the marker, i. e. to the pre-set idle position (see also page 40). The cut-off trim only acts as idle trim in the left-hand half of the travel of the throttle limit control, i. e. the marker is only set and stored within this range. 80 Program description: transmitter control settings model helicopter Current trim position GRAUBELE

#01 Last idle position stop flt Throttle limit cont 0:00 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M 2.4 RX0.0V CTRL 7 Trim at motor OFF posit For this reason the Ch 1 trim display is also completely suppressed as soon as the throttle limit control is moved to the right of the centre position. GRAUBELE

#01 stop flt 0:00 Throttle limit contro 0:00 50%

5.2V 3:33h K78 M RX0.0V 2.4CTRL 7 Note:

Since this trim function is only effective in the Motor off direction, the illustration above changes if you alter the transmitter control direction for the collective pitch minimum position of the Ch 1 stick from back (re ected in the picture above) to forward in the Collective pitch min. line of the Basic settings menu. In the same way the effects shown in the illustration swap sides if you change the stick mode from collective pitch right

(re ected in the pictures above) to collective pitch left in the Stick mode line of the Basic settings menu; see page 67. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:80 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs28:80 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs58:81 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs58:81 For your notes 81 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 D/R Expo Switchable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through to the D/R Expo menu point of the multi-function menu:

mod. mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry A press on the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button opens this menu point:

aile elev rudd 100%

100%

100%

0%

0%

0%

DUAL EXPO The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of switching to reduced control travels, and of in uencing the travel characteristics, for aileron, elevator and rudder

(control functions 2 ... 4). Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control travel adjustment in the Transmitter control settings menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, re-

gardless of whether that function controls a single servo or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. For each switch position the servo travels can be set to any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel. Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater than 0%, exponential provides ne control of the model around the centre position of the primary control func-

82 Dual Rate / Expo - xed-wing model tions (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of travel. The degree of progression can therefore be set to any value within the range -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to normal, linear control characteristics. Another application for exponential is to improve the linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear movement of the output disc or lever diminishes pro-

gressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of the output device increases disproportionately as stick travel increases. Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. The Dual Rate and Expo functions can be switched on and off together if you assign a switch to the function. The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed models. Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo set-

tings If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more appropriate name to one of the phases 2 and 3 in the Base settings menu (see page 60), then this appears at bottom left, e. g. normal. If necessary, operate the associated switch in order to switch between the ight phases. The basic set-up procedure 1. Switch to the desired ight phase, and then select the desired line aile, elev or rudd using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button. If necessary, use the

buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select the desired column. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button: the corresponding input eld is now high-

lighted (black background). Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. Simultaneously press the the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) to reset any changed settings to the default values. SET button of the right-hand four-

or buttons of 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Dual Rate function If you wish to switch between two possible D/R set-

tings, use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the screen with the switch symbol

, then press the central SET button 0%

aile 0%

HR push desired switch SR 0%

into position ON 100%

100%

100%

normal DUAL EXPO 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs29:82 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs29:82 06.06.2011 19:39:39 06.06.2011 19:39:39 and assign a physical switch as described in the sec-

tion Assigning switches and control switches on page 39. The assigned switch appears on the screen together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation of the switch. Select the left-hand column, marked DUAL at the bottom edge of the screen, and set the values for each of the two switch positions sepa-

rately in the highlighted eld using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value in the highlighted eld to 100%. Caution:

For safety reasons the Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of total control travel. Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Dual Rate = 100%

Dual Rate = 50%

Dual Rate = 20%

l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S indicates the direction of operation when you move the switch. For example, the system enables you to y with a linear curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch posi-

tion. Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in the highlighted eld, using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button. aile elev rudd 100%

100%

100%

+11%

+22%

0%

3 3 normal DUAL EXPO Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value in the highlighted input eld to 0%. Examples of different Expo values:

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%

Expo = +50%

Expo = 100%

Exponential function If you wish to switch between two settings, use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the screen with the switch symbol

, then press the central SET button and assign a switch to the function, as described in the section Assigning switches and control switches on page 39. The assigned switch ap-

pears on the screen together with a switch symbol which l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each case. Combined Dual Rate and Expo If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the two functions are superimposed as follows:

Expo = +100%, DR = 125%

Expo = +100%, DR = 50%

Expo = 100%, DR = 50%

l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection e. g. switch back:

aile elev rudd 88%

77%

100%

0%

0%

0%

3 3 normal DUAL EXPO and after moving switch 3 to the forward position:

aile elev rudd 122%

111%

100%

+11%

+22%

0%

3 3 normal DUAL EXPO 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs29:83 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs29:83 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Dual Rate / Expo - xed-wing model 83 D/R Expo Switchable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor roll nick tail 100%

100%

100%

0%

0%

0%

DUAL EXPO The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of switching to reduced control travels, and in uencing the travel characteristics, for the roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor servos (control functions 2 4). A separate curve for control function 1 (motor / collective pitch) can be set individually for throttle, collective pitch and tail rotor in the Helicopter mixers menu. These curves feature up to ve separately programmable points; see the sections starting on page 94 and 169. Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control travel adjustment in the Transmitter control settings menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, re-

gardless of whether that function controls a single servo or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. For each switch position the servo travels can be set to any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel. Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater than 0%, exponential provides ne control of the model around the centre position of the primary control func-

tions (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor), without forfeiting full travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of travel. The degree of progression can be set within the range -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to normal, linear control characteristics. Another application for exponential is to improve the linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear movement of the output disc or lever diminishes pro-

gressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of the output device increases disproportionately as stick travel increases. Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. The Dual Rate and Expo functions can also be switched on and off together if you assign a switch to the func-

tion. The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed models. Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo set-

tings If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more appropriate name to one of the phases 2 or Auto-rota-

tion in the Basic settings menu (see page 68 and 69), then this appears at bottom left, e. g. normal. If neces-

sary, operate the associated switch in order to switch between the ight phases. The basic set-up procedure 1. Switch to the desired ight phase, and then select 84 Program description: Dual Rate / Expo model helicopter 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. the desired line Roll, Pitch or Tail using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button. If necessary, use the

buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select the desired column. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button: the corresponding input eld is now high-

lighted (black background). Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. Simultaneously press the the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) to reset any changed settings to the default values. SET button of the right-hand four-

or buttons of Dual Rate function If you wish to switch between two possible D/R set-

tings, use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the screen with the switch symbol

, press the central SET button roll Nick push desired switch Heck into position ON 100%

100%

100%

0%

0%

0%

DUAL EXPO and assign a physical switch as described in the sec-

tion Assigning switches and control switches on page 39. The assigned switch appears on the screen together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation of the switch. Select the left-hand column, marked DUAL at the bottom 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs30:84 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs30:84 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 edge of the screen, and set the values for each of the two switch positions separately in the highlighted eld using the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button. Simultaneously press the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value in the highlighted eld to 100%. Caution:

For safety reasons the Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of total control travel. Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Dual Rate = 100%

Dual Rate = 50%

Dual Rate = 20%

l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S tion. Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in the highlighted eld, using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand four-way button. roll nick tail 100%

100%

100%

+11% 3

+22%

3 0%

normal DUAL EXPO Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value in the highlighted input eld to 0%. Examples of different Expo values:

Combined Dual Rate and Expo If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the two functions are superimposed as follows:

Expo = +100%, DR = 125%

Expo = +100%, DR = 50%

Expo = 100%, DR = 50%

l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection e. g. switch back:

roll nick tail 88%

77%

100%

0% 3 0%

3 0%

normal DUAL EXPO Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%

Expo = +50%

Expo = 100%

and after moving switch 3 to the forward position:

l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S l e v a r t o v r e S Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each case. roll nick tail 122%

111%

100%

+11% 3

+22%

3 0%

normal DUAL EXPO Exponential function If you wish to switch between two settings, use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the screen with the switch symbol

, then press the central SET button and assign a switch to the function, as described in the section Assigning switches and control switches on page 39. The assigned switch ap-

pears on the screen together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation when you move the switch. For example, the system enables you to y with a linear curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch posi-

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs30:85 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs30:85 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Program description: Dual Rate / Expo model helicopter 85 Phase trim Flight phase-speci c trims for aps, ailerons and elevator If you have not assigned a switch to phases 2 or 3 in the Basic settings menu, i. e. you have not assigned switches to these alternative phases, you automatically remain in ight phase 1 - normal. The number and name (normal) of this ight phase are permanently assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason the normal phase is not stated as Phase 1 normal in the Basic settings menu; it is simply concealed. tail type aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 normal 2aile 10:01 takeoff speed 3 If you select the Phase trim menu with this basic arrangement, you will nd just the normal line on the screen, whose pre-set values of 0% are not usually altered. If you wish to enter values other than 0, e. g. to have more lift at launch, or to be able to y more slowly when thermalling, or faster when ying speed tasks, but WITHOUT having to change the basic settings each time, then you need to use alternative ight phases. This is done by activating Phase 2 and, if necessary, Phase 3 in the Basic settings menu. This is accomplished by moving to the Basic settings menu and assigning a switch to the selected phase or phases. If you decide to use one of the three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7 as the phase switch, then it is advisable to assign it to the Speed phase and Launch phase at the extremes, with normal at the centre posi-

tion. Notes:

At the centre position of SW 4/5 or 6/7 the switch symbols on the screen should look as in the picture at top right. Please note the priorities of the individual ight phas-

es, as described in detail on page 60.

0%

0%

0%

AIL FLA ELE normal P H A S E T R I M The default name for Phase 2 is Launch, and that for Phase 3 is Speed. However, you can assign your own choice of names at any time by selecting the appropriate line, pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and selecting one of the following names in the highlighted eld using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Program description: Phase trim xed-wing model Note:

In this menu you will have at least one control function

(ELE), and a maximum of three functions (ELE, AIL and FLA), available for phase-speci c trim settings, depend-

ing on the settings you have entered in the Aileron /

ap line of the Basic settings menu (see page 58). take off thermal dist(ance) speed acro landing 86 air-tow test aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out 10:01 takeoff speed 2aile 3 7 6 These names will appear in the transmitters basic display GRAUBELE

#01 51%

5.2V 2:22h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M and in the Phase trim menu - see lower picture. Setting up ight phase trims In the Phase trim menu you can adjust the trims for the previously selected ight phases. The rst step is to use the phase switch you have already assigned to move to the phase which you wish to adjust (the * at far left indicates the currently active phase). P H A S E T R I M

normal takeoff speed 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

FLA AIL ELE 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs31:86 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs31:86 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Select the desired control surface function using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way but-

ton, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The trim values in the highlighted value eld can now be adjusted using the arrow-buttons of the right-hand four-way button. You can activate each phase by operating the assigned phase select switch or switches. Note that the servos do not change from one setting to another abruptly;

they move smoothly with a transition time of around one second. With this option, which works in a similar way to trans-

mitter control sub-trim or offset settings with other radio control systems, it is possible to set values within the range -99% to +99%. However, typical values are nor-

mally in single gures or low double gures. P H A S E T R I M normal takeoff speed

0%

+8%

7%

0%

4%

5%

0%

+2%

3%

FLA AIL ELE If you have made any changes, simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

ton (CLEAR) resets them to the default value of 0%. Note:

In this menu you will have at least one control function

(ELE), and a maximum of three functions (ELE, AIL and FLA), available for phase-speci c trim settings, depend-

ing on the settings you have entered in the Aileron /

ap line of the Basic settings menu (see page 58). 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs31:87 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs31:87 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Program description: Phase trim xed-wing model 87 For more information please refer to the general notes on Free mixers in the section of this manual starting on page 106. What is a mixer?

The basic function In many models it is often desirable to use a mixer to couple various control systems, e. g. to link the ailerons and rudder, or to inter-connect a pair of servos where two control surfaces are actuated by separate servos. In all these cases the signal which ows directly from the output of a transmitter stick to the associated servo is bled off at a particular point - this effect can also be concealed in transmitter control options such as D/R Expo or Transmitter control settings - and the derived signal is then processed in such a way that it affects the input of another control channel, and therefore eventually another receiver output. Example: V-tail mixer Elevator stick s t u p n i n o i t c n u f l o r t n o C 3 E l e v a t o r 3 Rudder Elevator V-tail mixer Rudder 4 R E u l e d v d a e t r o r 4 l s e n n a h c l o r t n o C

) s t u p t u o r e v e c e r

i Rudder stick V 8 4

, 1 0 1 4

. r N 7 7 5 C o v r e S

. t s e B Left rudder / elevator Right rudder / elevator V 8

, 4 1 0 1 4

. r N 7 7 5 C o v r e S

. t s e B The mx-12 HoTT transmitter software contains a large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, designed to mix together two (or more) control channels. The mixer required in this example is sup-

plied ready-made in the software, and just has to be activated in the tail line of the Basic settings menu in the form of V-tail. The software also includes three freely programmable linear mixers in the xed-wing and helicopter programs, all of which can be used in each model memory. 88 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model Fixed-wing mixers d i f f a i l e . d i f f f l a p s rudd ail ail flaps brak elev brak flap aile brak elev flap aile elev elev flap aile flap d i f f r e d 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

(The display varies according to the information you have entered in the Motor at Ch 1 and Ail / Flap lines in the Basic settings menu. The selection above shows the maximum number of options, and equates to the setting No (motor) and 2AIL 2FL). The mx-12 HoTT transmitters program contains a se-

ries of pre-programmed coupling functions, and all you have to do is set the mixer ratios and (optionally) assign a switch. The number of pre-programmed mixer func-

tions in the mixer list will vary according to the pre-set model type (tail type, number of wing servos, with or without motor - see the section starting on page 56). For example, if your model is not tted with camber-chang-

ing aps, and you have not entered any ap servos in the Basic settings menu, the software automatically suppresses all the ap mixers, as are the Brake NN

* mixers if you enter Idle forward or Idle back in the Motor at Ch 1 line. This makes the menus clearer and easier to understand, and also avoids potential program-

ming errors.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:88 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:88 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Notes:

There are various alternative methods of positioning the camber-changing aps; these include:

a) settling on just one position per ight phase, sim-

ply by setting appropriate trim values in the Pha-

se trim menu, as described on the preceding double-page;

b) controlling the aps manually using any transmit-

ter control assigned to Input 6 (in the Transmit-

ter control settings menu - see page 74), after setting the basic ap positions in the Phase trim menu, as described earlier. Ideally the transmit-

ter control would be one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 or 8. The selected transmitter control directly operates the two ap servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 1, assuming that you have speci ed aps in the Ail. / Flap line of the Basic settings menu. The same control determines the ap setting of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the FL AIL mixer line. However, for ner control of the ap positions, we recommend that you reduce their travel to about 25% in the E6 line of the Transmitter control settings menu. c) It is also possible to leave the default setting of 0% in the appropriate line of the FL AIL menu, and to assign the same transmitter con-

trol to both input 6 and input 5 in the Transmitter control settings menu. The magnitude of the ef-

fect on the two pairs of wing aps can then be ad-

justed using the servo travel adjustment facility. If the Ch 1 stick is assigned to input 1 as standard, it will be de-coupled by the software if two camber-

changing aps are de ned; this is intentional, as it eliminates the danger of errors when a ap command is given. In this case the only type of brake function available is the Butter y or Crow arrangement; see page 92. The basic programming procedure 1. at the bottom edge of the SET button of the right-hand four-

buttons of the left or right-hand four-

button of the left or right-hand four-way Use the way button to select the desired mixer. Use the button to move to the right-hand column, marked by the switch symbol screen. Press the central way button; the corresponding input eld is now high-

lighted (black background). Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

ton to set the desired value, and assign the switch if necessary, as described on page 39. With the exception of the Diff. red. line, negative and positive parameter values are possible; this may be necessary to obtain the correct direction of servo ro-

tation (control surface de ection). Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an al-

tered value to the default value. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. SET button of the right-hand four-

2. 3. 4. 5.

(offset) Mixer neutral point The neutral point of the mixers

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) Aileron NN *

Elevator NN *

Elevator NN *

Airbrake NN *

(differential aileron travel) is by default the zero point of the transmitter control, i. e. that is the point at which they have no effect. At the end-point of the transmitter control the full mixer value is applied. The default neutral point (offset) of the mixers at which the airbrakes are always retracted, is the forward position of the Ch 1 stick (throttle / airbrakes) if you select none in the Motor at Ch 1 line of the Basic settings menu, and is the back position of the Ch 1 stick if you select none/inv. diff aile Aileron differential compensates for an unwanted side-

effect which occurs when ailerons are de ected: the problem known as adverse yaw. When ailerons are de ected, the drag generated by the down-going aileron is greater than that produced by the up-going aileron. The differential drag causes a yawing motion around the vertical axis in the opposite direction to the desired turn. This effect is much more pronounced in model gliders with high aspect ratio wings than in power models with their much shorter moment arms, and usually has to be countered by giving a simultaneous rudder de ection in the opposite direction to the yaw. However, this in turns causes additional drag and reduces the aircrafts ef-

ciency even further. Aileron differential reduces the angular travel of the down-going aileron relative to the up-going aileron, and this reduces the drag and therefore the adverse yaw. However, electronic differential can only be applied if each aileron is actuated by its own servo, usually mounted in the wings themselves. The shorter pushrods also result in virtually slop-free aileron linkages with 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:89 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:89 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model 89 reliable centring. Mechanical solutions are also possible, but they usually have to be designed in when the model is built, and the degree of differential cannot be altered subsequently. In any case signi cant mechanical differential tends to cause additional slop in the control system. Electronic differential offers several important advantages:

0% (normal) 50% (differential) 100% (split) It is easily possible to vary the degree of differential without affecting the travel of the up-going aileron. At one extreme it is possible to suppress the down-aileron de ection completely, i. e. only the up-going aileron moves at all, and this arrangement is sometimes called the split setting. Split ailerons not only tend to suppress adverse yaw, but can even generate positive yaw, which means that the model yaws in the direction of the turn when an aileron command is given. In the case of large model gliders, smooth turns can then be own using ailerons alone, which with most models of this type is usually by no means the case. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it pos-

sible to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. 0%

corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential, while -100% or +100% represents the split function. For aerobatic ying it is necessary to set low absolute differential values, to ensure that the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Moderate values around -50% or

+50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to y. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope yers, when ailerons alone are often used for turning the model. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. Note:

Although it is possible to enter negative values in order to reverse the direction of servo rotation, this is not usu-

ally necessary if the correct channels are used.

(Camber-changing ap differential) diff aps The aileron / ap mixer (see below) is designed to superimpose an aileron function on the aps. Flap differential works like aileron differential, and produces a reduced ap movement in the down-direction when these surfaces are used as supplementary ailerons. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential re-

gardless of the direction of rotation of the servo. 0%

corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel is the same up and down. A setting of -100% or +100%

means that the down-travel of the aps is reduced to zero when an aileron command is given (split setting). Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. 90 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if the correct channels are used. ail rudd

(Aileron rudder) In this case the rudder automatically follows when an aileron command is given, and the mixer ratio (degree of following) can be set by the user. Coupled aileron / rud-

der (also known as combi-switch) is especially useful for suppressing adverse yaw in conjunction with aileron differential, and this combination usually makes smooth turns very easy to y. Naturally, the rudder can still be controlled separately by means of its dedicated stick. The adjustment range of +/- 150% enables the user to set up the correct direction of travel according to the direction of rotation of the ap servos. If an (optional) non-centring switch (SW 3 7) is assigned to this func-

tion, the mixer can be turned on and off in ight, so that you can control the ailerons and rudder separately if and when you so desire. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. This mixer is usually set up in such a way that the rud-

der de ects automatically to the side of the up-going aileron; a setting around 50% is likely to be approxi-

mately correct. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:90 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:90 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 ail aps

(Aileron ap) brak elev

(Airbrake elevator) brak ap

(Airbrake ap) or This mixer feeds a variable amount of the aileron signal into the ap channel. When an aileron command is given, the aps follow the ailerons, although usually through a smaller angle, i. e. the mixer ratio is gener-

ally less than 100%. The adjustment range of -150%

to +150% allows the user to set up the ap direction to match that of the ailerons. The aps should not de ect more than about 50% of the

(mechanical) travel of the ailerons. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. Note:

If your model is equipped with only one ap servo, you should still select 2FL in the aile/ ap line of the Ba-

sic settings menu (see page 58) but leave the Ail Flap mixer at 0%. In contrast, all the other wing mixers can be used in the usual way. Extending any form of airbrakes usually generates an unwanted change in airspeed; this is especially marked when a butter y (crow) braking system is deployed (see next page). This mixer feeds a corrective signal to the elevator to compensate for such an effect. The adjustment range is

-150% to +150%. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. Usual values are generally in single to low double gures. It is essential to check and adjust this setting at a safe height, and it is also important to ensure that the model does not slow down too much when the airbrakes are extended. The danger is that you might need to retract the brakes again on the landing approach when you realise the model will land short; if its airspeed is too low when you retract the brakes, the model will just fall to the ground at that point. When you operate the brake function (Ch 1 stick), both ap servos move together for the landing approach; the mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150% to

+150%. Down- ap is usually selected. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. At this point you select the value which causes the aps to de ect down as far as possible when the airbrake function is deployed. However, please ensure that none of the servos concerned strikes its mechanical end-

stops (servos stalled). To achieve this, you may need to limit the servo travel(s) using the Travel -/+ option, which is found on the RX SERVO display page of the Telemetry menu. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:91 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:91 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model 91 brak aile

(Airbrake aileron) started too soon, and has to be extended by retracting the airbrakes again, the model could then stall abruptly. elev ap

(Elevator ap) When you operate the brake function, both aileron servos move together for the landing approach; the mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150%

to +150%. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. Note:

It can also be useful to de ect both ailerons up slightly when the airbrakes are extended; in most cases this signi cantly reduces the risk of a tip-stall. Combination of the Brake NN * mixers:

Crow or Butter y setting If you have set up all three airbrake mixers for your model, it is then possible to program a special con gura-

tion known as the crow or butter y arrangement for glide path control. In the butter y setting both ailerons are de ected up by a moderate amount, and both aps down by the maximum possible amount. The third mixer provides elevator trim to counteract any unwanted pitch trim change and maintain the models airspeed at a safe level. This is necessary to avoid the danger of the model slowing up excessively; if the landing approach is This inter-action between the aps, ailerons and elevator is used to control the glide angle on the landing ap-

proach. Optionally the butter y setting can also be used without the airbrakes or spoilers; nowadays this is very commonly used for sports and competition aircraft. Note:

If your model features full-span (strip) ailerons which also double as camber-changing aps, the two mix-

ers Brake aileron and Brake elevator can be combined for glide path control. In this case up- ap is applied, but the aps can still be controlled as ailerons. Elevator pitch trim compensation is generally required. If you have programmed aileron differential, the re-

sponse of the ailerons will inevitably be adversely affected by the extreme up de ection of the ailerons in the butter y setting, because the differential travel reduces or entirely suppresses the down-aileron de-

ection. However, the up travel of the ailerons is also greatly restricted because they are already at or close to their up end-point. The remedy here is to apply dif-

ferential reduction, which is explained in its own section later.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) 92 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model The aps can be used to enhance the effect of the el-

evator in tight turns and aerobatics, and this mixer feeds part of the elevator signal to the ap servos. The mixer direction must be set so that the aps move down when up-elevator is applied, and vice versa. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. The usual settings for this mixer are in the low two-digit range. elev aile

(Elevator aileron) This mixer allows the ailerons to reinforce the elevator response in the same way as the previous mixer. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:92 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:92 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 usual settings are again in the low two-digit range. ap elev

(Flap elevator) ap aile

(Flap aileron) When the camber-changing aps are lowered, either using Phase trim or by means of a transmitter control assigned to input 6, a pitch trim change (up or down) may occur. Alternatively it may be desirable for slight down-elevator to be applied automatically when the aps are raised by a small amount, in order to increase the models basic airspeed. This mixer can be used to achieve both purposes. When the aps are deployed, this mixer causes the elevator setting to be corrected automatically in propor-

tion to the ap de ection. The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the usual settings are in the single to low two-digit range. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. This mixer causes a variable proportion of the ap signal to be mixed in with the aileron channels 2 and 5 so that the ailerons follow the movement of the aps, albeit normally with a smaller de ection. The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the usual settings are around 50%. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. Note:

If you assign a transmitter control to inputs 5 and 6 in the Transmitter control settings menu for adjust-

ing the ap positions, then you should leave the value for this mixer at 0%. See the notes on page 89 in this regard.

(Differential reduction) diff red The problem of reduced aileron response in the but-

ter y con guration has been mentioned earlier: if aileron differential is employed, the aileron response on the landing approach may be adversely affected through the extreme up de ection of the ailerons, permitting virtually no further up-movement; on the other hand the down travel has already been reduced by the programmed differential setting. The overall result is signi cantly reduced aileron response compared with the normal setting of the control surfaces. In this case you really should use differential reduc-

tion if at all possible. This reduces the degree of aileron differential when you invoke the butter y setting using the airbrake stick. Differential is reduced progressively, or even eliminated altogether, as the airbrake stick is moved towards its end-point. A value of 0% at this point means that the full pro-

grammed aileron differential is retained. A value of 100%

means that the aileron differential is completely elimi-

nated at the maximum butter y setting, i. e. when the airbrakes and other glide path control surfaces are fully extended. If you set a value above 100%, the aileron differential is eliminated even before full travel of the airbrake stick is reached. The adjustment range is 0 to 150%. Simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an altered value to 0%. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:93 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs32:93 06.06.2011 19:39:40 06.06.2011 19:39:40 Program description: wing mixers xed-wing model 93 Helicopter mixers Flight phase-speci c mixers for collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor In the Basic settings menu a method of switching ight phases can be activated by assigning the appropri-

ate switches to Phase 2 and / or Auto-rotation. You can then switch between the phases normal and a second phase - to which you can assign a more ap-

propriate name yourself, if necessary - using one of the non-centring switches SW 3 7; a further switch then selects Auto-rotation. However, auto-rotation always has precedence over the other two phases; see pages 68 / 69. If you have not yet assigned switches for the ight phases, you should do so now. Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand four-way button to move to the right-hand column, marked by the switch of the screen, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The switches are assigned as described on page 39:

symbol at the bottom rotor direct pitch min timer phase 2 autorotat. right rear 10:01 C3 hover 5 4 Phase 1 always bears the designation normal. Both the number and name of this phase are permanently assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason the normal phase is not stated as Phase 1 in the Basic settings menu; it is simply concealed. By default Phase 2 is assigned the phase name hov-

er, but you can change these at any time if you prefer:

press the central SET button with the right-hand four-

way button, and use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to select one of the following names:

hover acro acro 3D speed test Description of the helicopter mixers Five-point curves are available for setting up the control characteristics of collective pitch, Ch 1 throttle and Ch 1 tail rotor. Using these curves it is possible to program non-linear mixer ratios along the travel of the transmitter stick for these mixers. Move to the display page for setting 5-point curves by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button (see below). In contrast, the mixers Ch 1 throttle and Ch 1 tail rotor are not required for the Auto-rotation ight phase (described in the section starting on page 104);

instead they are automatically switched to a (user-varia-

ble) pre-de ned value. A value must be entered in the Gyro line: press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, then enter a value in the highlighted eld using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button - in a similar fashion to changing the transmitter centre position or the offset position with other radio control systems. This set-up facility is rounded off with the Swashplate limit option: this restricts the maximum travel of the swash-

plate servos to the value you set, in the form of a limiter. All these options are required for the basic process of setting up a model helicopter. Altered parameters can be reset to the corresponding default values at any time by simultaneously pressing the or buttons of the right-hand four-way 94 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter button (CLEAR). The name of the currently selected ight phase is displayed in the Helicopter mixers menu as well as in the transmitters basic display; this is designed to ensure that any changes you make actually apply to the appropriate ight phase. Note that the servos do not change from one setting to another abruptly; they move smoothly with a transition time of around one second. This does not apply to auto-rotation: when you switch INTO auto-rotation, the change takes place immediately. If you operate the switch selected for a particular ight phase, the associated ight phase is superimposed at the left-hand bottom edge of the screen, e. g. normal. thro tail ptch ch1 ch1 gyro swash lim. normal 0%

off SEL Now you can program the settings for this ight phase. Basic programming procedure 1.

of the left or right-hand Use the arrow buttons four-way button to select the desired option. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button, and the screen switches to the set-up page (

symbol at the bottom edge of the screen), or the corresponding input eld is highlighted (black background). De ne the mixer values using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, moving the throttle /

collective pitch stick at the same time if necessary. Simultaneously pressing the

or buttons of 2. 3. 4. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:94 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:94 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets an al-

tered value to the default value. Press the central way button to conclude the input process. SET button of the right-hand four-

5. ptch

(Collective pitch (ch1 pitch)) Select the Collective pitch line using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

ptch input output 3 point normal 0%

0%

0%

The control curve can be based on a maximum of ve nodes, known as reference points, which can be placed along the length of the control travel; separate curves can be programmed for each ight phase. However, in most cases it is suf cient to use a smaller number of reference points when de ning the collective pitch curve. As a basic rule we recommend that you start with the three default reference points offered by the software. These three points, i. e. the two end-points Point 1 (collective pitch minimum) and Point 5 (collec-

tive pitch maximum), and Point 3, exactly in the centre of the travel, initially describe a linear characteristic for the collective pitch curve; this is represented in the picture above. The programming procedure in detail The throttle / collective pitch stick can now be used to move the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points Point 1 and Point 5; at the same time the momentary position of the stick is displayed in numeric form in the Input line (-100% to +100%). The point where the vertical line crosses the curve is termed the Output, and this point can be varied within the range -125% and +125% at a maximum of ve reference points. The control signal, modi ed in this way, affects the collective pitch servos only. In the picture on the left the stick is exactly at the 0% position at Point 3, and also generates an output signal of 0% due to the linear nature of the graph. By default only points 1 (collective pitch minimum at

-100%), 3 (hover point at 0%) and 5 (collective pitch maximum at +100% travel) are active. To set a point you use the associated stick to move the vertical line to the point you wish to change. The number and current curve value of this point are displayed in the bottom line in the left-hand half of the screen in the Point line. The arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button can now be used to change the current curve value in the highlighted eld to any value within the range -125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent points. ptch input output 3 point normal 0%

+75%

+75%

In this example we have moved reference point 3 to

+75%. However, the optional points 2 and 4 can also be activated. In the next example we activate point 2 at

-50%

ptch input output 2 point normal 50%

12%

deact and point 4 at +50%

ptch input output 4 point normal

+50%

+88%

deact This is accomplished using the stick to move the vertical line to the appropriate area. As soon as the message inactive appears in the highlighted value eld, you can activate the associated point with the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button; it can then be adjusted in the same manner as the other points ptch input output point 4 normal

+50%

50%

50%

or reset to inactive by simultaneously pressing the

or buttons of the right-hand four-way button Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 95 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:95 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:95 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41

(CLEAR). Points 1 and 5, however, CANNOT be disabled. Note:

The following illustration, and all the other pictures on this page, show a control curve which we prepared for illustration purposes only. Please note that the curve characteristics by no means represent real collective pitch curves!

ptch input output point 3 normal 0%

50%

50%

Typical collective pitch curves for different ight phases:

+100%

t u p t u O

-100%

1 3 2 4 Control travel 5 Hover

+100%

t u p t u O

-100%

1

+100%

t u p t u O 5

-100%

1 3 2 4 Control travel Aerobatics 3 2 4 Control travel 5 3D ch1 thro

(throttle curve) ch1 thro input output 3 point normal 0%

0%

0%

Helicopter with glow engine or electric motor and STANDARD SPEED CONTROLLER This setting only affects the control curve of the throttle servo or speed controller. The method of setting up a throttle curve for a model helicopter tted with a speed governor or regulator is discussed later. The throttle curve can be de ned using up to ve points, in a similar way to the collective pitch curve (see previous page). In all cases the control curve must be set up in such a way that the throttle is fully open, or the speed controller of an electric helicopter is at full power, at the end-point of the throttle / collective pitch stick,

(exception: auto-rotation - see page 104). The hover point is normally located at the centre of the stick travel, and the throttle setting should be adjusted relative to the collective pitch curve in such a way that the correct system rotational speed is obtained at this point. At the minimum position of the throttle / collective pitch stick the throttle curve should initially be set up so that the (glow) motor runs at a distinctly higher speed compared to the idle setting, with the clutch reliably engaged. In all ight phases the motor (glow or electric) is started and stopped using the throttle limiter (see below). If you are used to a different radio control system which uses two separate ight phases for this - with idle-up and without idle-up; therefore incurring the loss of one complete ight phase - please note that the throt-

tle limiter renders this complication super uous, as the increased system rotational speed below the hover point in the mx-12 HoTT program is more exible, and can be ne-tuned more accurately, than the idle-up system used with earlier mc radio control systems. Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start the glow motor, i. e. the throttle can only be adjusted within its idle range using the idle trim. Be sure to read the safety notes on page 102 which refer to this. If the idle is set too high when you switch the transmitter on, you will see and hear a clear warning!

STARLET

#02 throttle too 0:00 stop Flug 0:00 normal HoTT 5.5V high !

K78 M 99%

5.2V 2:22h The following three diagrams show typical 3-point throttle curves for different ight phases, such as hover, aerobat-

ics and 3-D ying. 96 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:96 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:96 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Typical throttle curves for different ight phases:

+100%

t u p t u O

-100%

1 3 2 4 Control travel 5 Hover

+100%

t u p t u O

-100%

1

+100%

t u p t u O 5

-100%

1 3 2 4 Control travel Aerobatics 3 2 4 Control travel 5 3D Notes on using the Throttle limit function:

We strongly recommend that you make use of the throttle limit function (Transmitter control settings menu, page 79). When you use this function the throt-

tle servo is completely disconnected from the throt-

tle / collective pitch stick when the proportional throt-

tle limit control is at its left-hand end-point; the motor runs at idle and only responds to the Ch 1 trim. This feature enables you to start the motor from within any ight phase. Once the motor is running, turn the throttle limiter slowly to the opposite end-point, so that full control of the throttle servo is returned to the throttle / collec-

tive pitch stick. It is important that the throttle limiter should not restrict the throttle servo at its upper end-

point; you can avoid this by setting the control travel to +125% in the Lim line of the Transmitter control settings menu. Since electric motors by their nature require no idle setting, the only important point when setting up an electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjust-

ment range of the throttle limiter should be set signi -

cantly higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller, which is usually from -100% to

+100%. It may therefore be necessary to set the Trav-

el value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate point

contrast to the usual socket sequence - and the throttle curve adjusted so that it can simply assume the role of the usual transmitter control. In this case the throttle curve only determines the nominal rotational speed of the speed controller, and this nominal value is required to remain constant over the full range of collective pitch; for this reason a horizontal line should be set in the Ch 1 throttle mixer, i. e. every

(collective pitch) input value results in the same (throt-

tle) output value. The height of the line in the graph determines the nominal system rotational speed. Initially, then, reference point 3 should be erased, and reference points 1 (input = -100%) and 5 (input =

+100%) set to the same value; for example:

ch1 thro input output 1 point normal 100%

+30%

+30%

The value to be set varies according to the speed gov-

ernor you are using, and also to the desired nominal rotational speed; you may wish to vary it, of course, in the various ight phases. When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automati-

cally switches the value to a variable pre-set value;

see the section starting on page 104.

in the Lim line of the Transmitter control settings menu. However, the throttle curve itself has to be ne-

tuned with the helicopter in ight, just like a glow-pow-

ered machine. Releasing the full throttle range, and imposing the throttle limiter again, trips the switching threshold of the control switch C3 (i. e. in either direction); this switch can be used for automatically starting and stopping the stopwatch to record the ight time, or some similar purpose; see page 39. When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automati-

cally switches the value to a variable pre-set value;

see the section starting on page 104. Helicopter with speed GOVERNOR (REGULATOR) In contrast to speed controllers, which simply adjust pow-

er output in the same way as a carburettor, speed gover-

nors maintain a constant rotational speed in the system which they regulate; they accomplish this by adjusting the power output as required. In the case of a glow-powered helicopter the governor automatically controls the throttle servo; in an electric-powered machine the governor does the same with the speed controller. For this reason speed governors do not require a classic throttle curve; they just need a pre-set rotational speed. Once this is set, the system rotational speed does not alter unless the system calls for more power from the motor than is available. Connect your speed governor to receiver output 6 instead of the throttle servo, and adjust the throttle curve as described in the following section. This ensures that the throttle curve can assume the role of the usual transmitter control. However, if you wish to be able to exploit the conven-

ience and safety features of the throttle limiter, the speed governor should be connected to receiver output 6 - in Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 97 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:97 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:97 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Ch1 tail rotor

(static torque compensation) Ch1 tail input output 3 point normal 0%

0%

0%

The default setting is a torque compensation curve with a uniform linear mixer input of 0%, as is required for a gyro sensor operating in heading lock mode; see illustration above. Important Note:

It is absolutely essential to read and observe the set-up instructions supplied with your gyro before entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here could render your helicopter uncontrollable. If you use your gyro sensor in normal operating mode, or if the gyro only offers normal mode, then you should set up the mixer as follows:

The tail rotor control curve can be de ned using up to ve points, in a similar way to the collective pitch curve

(see previous page). You can therefore modify the mixer at any time when required, and enter symmetrical or asymmetrical mixer inputs both above and below the hover point. However, please ensure at the outset that you have entered the correct direction of main rotor rota-

tion in the Basic settings menu. CH1 tail input output 3 point normal 0%

0%

0%

Starting from -30% at Point 1 and +30% at Point 5, this mixer should be set up in such a way that the helicopter does not rotate around the vertical (yaw) axis (i. e. does not deviate from the hover heading) during a long vertical climb or descent, due to the change in torque of the main rotor. At the hover the yaw trim should be set using the

(digital) tail rotor trim lever only. For a reliable torque compensation setting it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i. e. that main rotor speed remains constant over the full range of collective pitch. When you select auto-rotation, this mixer is auto-

matically switched off. Gyro

(adjusting gyro gain) Most modern gyro systems feature proportional, in nite-

ly variable adjustment of gyro gain as well as a means of selecting either of two different methods of working from the transmitter. If the gyro you wish to use features at least one of these options, then it offers you the possibility of pre-setting both normal gyro effect and - if available - heading lock mode, and also of ying normal, slow circuits with maximum gyro stabilisation, but reducing the gyro effect for high-speed circuits and aerobatics. This is generally similar to the transmitter control centre adjustment or offset adjustment provided by other radio control sys-

98 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter tems. We recommend that you set up switchable ight phases for this, and set different gain settings for each phase in the Gyro line; values between -125% and +125% are possible. thro tail ptch ch1 ch1 gyro swash lim. normal 0%

off SEL Based on the offset values determined for each ight phase, gyro gain can be varied proportionally by means of a transmitter control assigned in the Gyro line of the Transmitter control settings menu (see page 78). This could be CTRL 8, which would provide in nitely variable gyro gain control:

At the centre position of this transmitter control the gyro effect always corresponds to the settings selected here. If you turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 8, which we are using in our example, in the direction of full travel (away from centre), the gyro gain increases accordingly and diminishes again if you turn it in the direction of the opposite end-point. Important Note:

It is absolutely essential to read and observe the set-up instructions supplied with your gyro before entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here could render your helicopter uncontrollable. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:98 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:98 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Adjusting the gyro sensor If you wish to set up a gyro to achieve maximum pos-

sible stabilisation of the helicopter around the vertical axis, please note the following points:

The mechanical control system should be as free-

moving and accurate (slop-free) as possible. There should be no spring or give in the tail rotor linkage. You must use a powerful and - above all - fast servo for the tail rotor. When the gyro sensor detects a deviation in yaw, the faster it adjusts the thrust of the tail rotor, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be advanced without the tail of the model starting to oscillate, and the better the ma-

chines stability around the vertical axis. If the corrective system is not fast enough, there is a danger that the models tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings, and you then have to reduce gyro gain further using the rotary proportional control CTRL 8, as used in our example, to adjust the pre-set Gyro value to eliminate the oscillation. If the model is ying forward at high speed, or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilising effect of the vertical n combined with the gyros stabilis-

ing effect may be an over-reaction which manifests itself as tail oscillation. In order to obtain optimum stabilisation from a gyro in all ight situations, you should make use of the facility to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter. appears as a dead zone. If this function is used, you should leave Dual Rate at 100%, and you should not set Dual Rate values greater than 100%, other-

wise travel will be limited on the roll or pitch-axis indi-

vidually if the swashplate limiter is set to 100%. Adjustment range: 100 ... 149% and off. Swashplate limiter thro tail ptch ch1 ch1 gyro swash lim. normal 0%

off SEL This function acts like a circular mechanical gate acting upon the swashplate control stick, restricting its range of travel - which is usually rectangular - to a circular pattern. This is designed to solve the following problem:

if the helicopter is set up in such a way that the roll and pitch-axis travels extend to the maximum possible in mechanical terms, e. g. for 3-D helicopter ying, then at simultaneous full travel of roll and pitch-axis the actual movement of the swashplate is higher (theoretically 141%). In this situation the mechanical swashplate sys-

tem may strike its end-stops, and in the extreme case the ball-links may even be forced off the linkage balls. In the mx-12 HoTT transmitter a software function has the effect of limiting the overall swashplate travel, i. e. the tilt angle of the swashplate between 100% (the travel is limited to the value which can be reached by one function - roll or pitch-axis - alone) and 149% (no limiting in force) is switched off (the function is completely disabled). Swashplate limiting can also be adjusted to suit individual models and ight phases. This software solution is far more exible than a physical limiter disc attached to the stick unit, and such a disc can only be used in any case if the roll and pitch-axis functions are controlled by one of the two primary sticks. The sketch alongside shows the effect of the limiter at a setting of 100%: the dotted area of travel is cut off, and 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:99 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:99 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 99 Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curves A practical procedure Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems are based on separate servos, they are always operated in parallel by the throttle / collective pitch stick (except when auto-rotation is invoked). The Helicopter program automatically couples the functions in the required way. In the mx-12 HoTT program the trim lever of control function 1 only affects the throttle servo, i. e. it acts as idle trim (see Digital trims on page 40). The process of adjusting throttle and collective pitch correctly, i. e. setting the motors power curve to match the collective pitch setting of the main rotor blades, is the most important aspect of setting up any model helicopter. The program of the mx-12 HoTT provides independent adjustment facilities for the throttle, collec-

tive pitch and torque compensation curves. These curves can be de ned using a maximum of ve reference points. To de ne the control curves all you have to do is set individual values for these ve points in order to determine each control curve. However, before you set up the throttle / collective pitch function it is important to adjust the mechanical linkages to all the servos accurately, in accordance with the set-

up notes provided by the helicopter manufacturer. Note:

The hover point should always be set to the centre position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. Idle setting and throttle curve Note:

Since electric power systems by their nature require no idle setting, it is not necessary to adjust the idle value. However, the matching of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s) must still be carried out as described here, in a similar way to a glow-powered helicopter. The idle setting is adjusted solely using the trim lever of the Ch 1 function, with the throttle limiter closed, as described in detail on pages 79 to 80. Reference point 1 of the throttle curve de nes the throttle setting when the helicopter is in a descent, but without affecting the hover setting. This is a case where you can exploit ight phase pro-

gramming to use different throttle curves. An increased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances; for example, for fast, steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics.

+100%

T U P T U O

-100%

1 2 4 Control travel 3 5 The diagram shows a curve with a slightly altered throttle setting below the hover point at the cen-

tre of stick travel. Different throttle curves are programmed for each ight phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up both for hovering and aerobatics:

Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle control response and low noise at the hover. Higher speed for aerobatics with motor power settings close to maximum. In this case the throttle curve also has to be adjusted in the hover range. The basic set-up procedure Although the mx-12 HoTT transmitter provides a broad range of adjustment for the collective pitch and throttle curves, it is essential that you rst adjust all the mechanical linkages in the model according to the information supplied by the helicopter manufacturer, i. e. all the system linkages should already be approximately correct in mechanical terms. If you are not sure of how to do this, any experienced helicopter pilot will be glad to help you with the basic set-up. The throttle linkage must be adjusted in such a way that the throttle is just at the fully open position at the full-throttle setting, or the speed controller of an electric helicopter is set to full-power. When the throttle limiter is at the idle position, the Ch 1 trim lever should just be able to close the throttle completely, without the servo striking its mechanical end-stop (quick throttle adjust-

ment using the digital trim: see page 40). With an electric helicopter the motor should stop reliably when the throttle limiter is closed. Take your time, and carry out these adjustments very carefully by adjusting the mechanical linkage and / or changing the linkage point on the servo output arm or the throttle lever. Only when you are con dent that all is well should you think about ne-tuning the throttle servo using the transmitters electronic facilities. Caution:

Read all you can about motors and helicopters, so that you are aware of the inherent dangers and the cautionary measures required before you attempt to start the motor for the rst time!

With the basic set-up completed, it should be possible to start the motor in accordance with the operating instruc-

tions supplied with it, and adjust the idle setting using the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick. The idle position which you set is indicated in the transmit-

ters basic screen display by a horizontal bar in the display of the Ch 1 trim levers position. Refer to page 40 100 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:100 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:100 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 of this manual for a full explanation of the digital trims. Around the mid-point of the collective pitch stick the model should lift off the ground and hover at approxi-

mately the rotational speed you wish to use. If this is not the case, correct the settings as follows:

1. The model does not lift off until the collective b) Rotational speed too low Remedy: on the Collective pitch graphic page, re-

duce the blade pitch angle by reducing the value at Point 3.

+100%

T U P T U O

-100%

1 Hover point 2 4 Control travel 3 5 pitch stick is above the centre point. a) Rotational speed too low Remedy: on the Ch 1

+100%

Hover point

throttle graphic page, increase the value at Point 3. T U P T U O

-100%

1

+100%

T U P T U O

-100%

1 2 4 Control travel 3 5 Hover point 2 4 Control travel 3 5 b) Rotational speed too high Remedy: on the Collec-

tive pitch graphic page, increase the blade pitch angle for collective pitch by increasing the value at Point 3. 2. The model lifts off below the centre point. a) Rotational speed too high Remedy: on the Ch 1

throttle graphic page, reduce the throttle opening by reducing the value at Point 3.

+100%

T U P T U O

-100%

1 Hover point 2 4 Control travel 3 5 Important:

It is important to persevere with this adjustment pro-

cedure until the model hovers at the correct rotational speed at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch stick. All the other model settings depend upon the cor-

rect setting of these parameters!

The standard set-up The remainder of the standard adjustment procedure is completed on the basis of the fundamental set-up which you have just carried out, i. e. we now assume that the model hovers in normal ight at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch stick, with the correct rotor speed. This means that your model helicopter is capable of hovering and also ying circuits in all phases whilst maintaining a constant system rotational speed. The climb setting The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch setting (Point 5) now provides you with a simple method of achieving constant system rotational speed from the hover right to maximum climb. Start by placing the model in an extended vertical climb, holding the collective pitch stick at its end-point: motor speed should not alter compared with the hover setting. If motor speed falls off in the climb, when the throttle is already fully open and no further power increase is pos-

sible (this assumes that the motor is correctly adjusted), then you should reduce the maximum blade pitch angle at full de ection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. the value at Point 5. Conversely, if motor speed rises during the vertical climb, you should increase the pitch angle. This is done on the Collective pitch graphic page by moving the vertical line to Point 5 using the collective pitch stick, and changing its value accordingly using the arrow but-

tons of the right-hand four-way button.

+100%

T U P T U O Hover point 1 5 3

-100%

2 4 Control travel This diagram shows the changes to the collective pitch maximum value only. Now bring the model back to the hover, which again should coincide with the mid-point of the Ch 1 stick. If you nd that the collective pitch stick now has to be moved from the mid-point in the direction of higher, then you should correct this deviation by slightly increas-

ing the collective pitch angle at the hover - i. e. Point 3 - until the model again hovers at the stick centre point. Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, cor-

rect this by reducing the pitch angle once more. You may nd that it is also necessary to correct the throttle opening at the hover point (Point 3) in the Ch 1

throttle menu. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:101 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:101 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 101

+100%

T U P T U O 1 5 3

-100%

2 4 Control travel This diagram only shows the change in the hover point, i. e. col-

lective pitch minimum and maxi-

mum have been left at -100% and

+100% respectively. Continue adjusting these settings until you really do achieve constant main rotor speed over the full control range between hover and climb. The descent adjustment should now be carried out from a safe height by fully reducing collective pitch to place the model in a descent from forward ight; adjust the col-

lective pitch minimum value (Point 1) so that the model descends at an angle of 60 80. This is done on the Collective pitch graphic page by moving the vertical line to Point 1 using the collective pitch stick, and adjust-

ing the value accordingly using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button.

+100%

T U P T U O Hover point 1 5 3

-100%

2 4 Control travel As an example, this diagram shows the changes in the collec-

tive pitch minimum value only. Once the model descends reliably as described, adjust the value for Throttle minimum - the value of Point 1 on the graph of the Ch 1 throttle mixer - so that system rotational speed neither increases nor declines. This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collec-

tive pitch. in premature wear of the clutch and gear train. The main rotor blades are generally free to swivel, and they may be unable to keep pace with such swift acceleration, in which case they might respond by swinging far out of their normal position, perhaps resulting in a boom strike. Once the motor is running, you should s l o w l y in-

crease system rotational speed using the throttle limiter. Important nal notes Before you start the motor, check carefully that the throt-

tle limiter is completely closed, so that the throttle can be controlled by the Ch 1 trim lever alone. If the throttle is too far open when you switch the transmitter on, you will see and hear a warning. If you ignore this and start the motor with the throttle too far advanced, there is a danger that the motor will immediately run up to speed after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will at once engage. For this reason you should:

always grasp the rotor head rmly when starting the motor. However, if you accidentally start the motor with the throttle open, the rule is this:

Dont panic!

Hang on to the rotor head regardless!

Dont let go!

Immediately reduce the throttle limiter, even though there may be a risk of damaging the helicopters drive train, because:

it is vital that YOU ensure that the helicopter cannot possibly move off by itself in an uncontrolled manner. The cost of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the motor itself is negligible compared with the damage which a model helicopter can cause if its spinning rotor blades are allowed to wreak havoc. Make sure that nobody else is standing in the primary hazard zone around the helicopter. You must never switch abruptly from idle to the ight set-

ting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed, as this would cause the rotor to accelerate quickly, resulting 102 Program description: helicopter mixers model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:102 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs33:102 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs34:103 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs34:103 For your notes 103 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Helicopter mixers Auto-rotation settings Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the power plant should fail. It can also be used if the tail rotor should fail, in which case cutting the motor and carrying out an auto-rotation landing is the only possible way of avoiding a high-

speed uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis, invariably terminating in a catastrophic crash. And that is the reason why switching INTO auto-rotation occurs with zero delay. When you switch to the auto-rotation phase the helicop-

ter mixers change as shown in this screen shot:

ptch thro tail gyro swash lim. Autorot 90%

0%

0%

off SEL During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the air ow through the rotor disc caused by the speed of the descent. The rotational energy stored in the still spinning rotor can be consumed to allow the machine to are out, but this can only be done once. For this reason autos are only likely to be successful if the pilot has plenty of experience in handling model helicopters, and has also set up the appropriate functions with great care. Once you have suf cient experience you should practise auto-rotation landings at regular intervals, not only so that you can demonstrate your all-round ying skill by ying the manoeuvre in competitions, but also so that you are in a position to land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if the motor should fail. For this purpose the program provides a range of adjustment fa-

(Collective pitch curve (Ch1 pitch)) cilities which are designed to help you y your helicopter in its unpowered state. Please note that the auto-rotation setting takes the form of a complete fourth ight phase, for which all the adjustment facilities are available which can be varied separately for all ight phases, especially trims, collective pitch curve settings etc. ptch In powered ight the maximum blade pitch angle is limited by the motor power which is available; however, in auto-rotation the angle is only limited by the point at which the air ow over the main rotor blades breaks away. Nevertheless, to provide suf cient upthrust even when rotational speed is falling off, it is necessary to set a greater maximum collective pitch value. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to select the graph page of Collective pitch, and then move the vertical line to Point 5 using the transmitter stick. Start by setting a value which is about 10 to 20%

higher than your normal collective pitch maximum. Do NOT set a much higher value compared with normal ight initially, because collective pitch control will then differ too greatly from the machines usual response after you have thrown the switch. The danger is that you will over-control the helicopter, and it may balloon up again during the are following the auto-rotation de-

scent. If this happens, the rotational speed of the main rotor will quickly decline to the point where it collapses, and the helicopter ends up crashing to the ground from a considerable height. Later, after a few trial autos, you may wish to adjust the value again. Under certain circumstances the collective pitch mini-

mum setting may also differ from the normal ight set-

ting; this depends on your piloting style for normal ying. In any case you must set a suf ciently generous collec-

104 Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings tive pitch minimum value at Point 1 to ensure that your model can be brought from forward ight at moderate speed into a descent of around 60 ... 70 when collec-

tive pitch is reduced to minimum. Most helicopter pilots already use such a setting for normal ying, and if this applies to you, you can simply adopt the same value. If you normally allow your model to fall at a shallower angle, increase the value for Point 1, and vice versa. Approach angle in strong wind in moderate wind no wind 60 45 75 Approach angle under varying wind conditions. For auto-rotation the collective pitch stick itself may not be positioned right at the bottom of its travel; typically it will be between the hover position and the bottom end-

point, giving the pilot scope for correction if necessary, i. e. the chance to adjust the models pitch inclination using the pitch-axis control. You can shorten the approach by pulling back slightly on the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch, or alternatively extend the approach by pushing forward on the pitch-axis stick and gently increasing collective pitch. Throttle In a competition the pilot is expected to cut the motor completely, but for practice purposes this is certainly inconvenient, as after every practice auto landing you would have to start the motor again.

(throttle curve) 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs35:104 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs35:104 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Depending on the friction and running resistance of the gearbox, you may nd that the fuselage still yaws slightly in an auto-rotation descent. If necessary, the relatively slight torque which causes this effect must then be corrected by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a small gure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the direction of tail rotor pitch required for normal ight.

(static torque compensation) For practice, then, you should set the value in this line so that the motor runs at a reliable idle during auto-

rotation, but without the clutch engaging, so that you can open the throttle immediately to recover from an emergency; for an electric helicopter the motor should be reliably off. Tail rotor For normal ying the tail rotor is set up in such a way that it compensates for motor torque when the helicop-

ter is hovering. This means that it already generates a certain amount of thrust even in its neutral position. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to compensate for varying weather condi-

tions, uctuations in system rotational speed and other in uences. However, in an auto-rotation descent the main rotor spins according to the windmill principle, i. e. it is not driven by the motor, and therefore there is no torque effect for which compensation is required, i. e. which the tail rotor would have to correct. For this reason all the appropriate mixers are automatically switched off in auto-rotation mode. However, the basic tail rotor setting therefore has to be different for auto-rotation, as the compensatory thrust described above is no longer required:

Stop the motor and place the helicopter horizontal on the ground. With the transmitter and receiving system switched on, select the Auto-rotation ight phase. Fold both tail rotor blades down and change the blade pitch angle to zero degrees in the Tail rotor line. Viewed from the rear, the tail rotor blades should now lie parallel to each other. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs35:105 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs35:105 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings 105 General notes regarding freely programmable mixers The two menus Fixed-wing mixers and Helicopter mixers, as described on the preceding pages, contain a wide range of ready-programmed coupling functions. The basic meaning of mixers has already been ex-

plained on page 88, together with the principle on which they work. In the following section you will nd informa-

tion relating to free mixers:

In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned above, the mx-12 HoTT offers three freely program-

mable linear mixers which can be used in every model memory; their inputs and outputs can be selected to suit your exact requirements. Any control function (1 to 6), or what is known as a switch channel (see below), can be assigned as the input signal of a free mixer. The signal present at the control channel, and passed to the mixer input, is deter-

mined by the transmitter control and any control charac-

teristics as de ned, for example, in the D/R Expo and Transmitter control settings menus. The mixer output acts upon a freely selectable control channel (1 to max. 6 - depending on receiver type). Before the signal is passed to the associated servo, the only in uences which can act upon it are those de ned in the Servo settings menu, i. e. the servo reverse, centre and travel functions. One control function can be set up to affect several mixer inputs simultaneously, if, for example, you wish to arrange several mixers to operate in parallel. Conversely it is possible for several mixer outputs to affect one and the same control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes examples of such arrangements. In software terms the default setting for any free mixer is that it is constantly switched on, but it is also possible 106 Program description: free mixers to assign an optional ON / OFF switch to it. However, since there are so many functions to which switches can potentially be assigned, you should take care not to as-

sign dual functions to particular switches accidentally. The two important mixer parameters are as follows:

mixer ratio, which de nes the extent to which neutral point, which is also termed the the the input signal acts on the output of the control channel which is programmed as the mixer output. the offset. The offset is that point on the travel of a transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 or 8 and SW 1, 3 7) at which the mixer has no in uence on the control channel connected to its output. Normally this is the centre point of the transmitter control, but the offset can be placed at any point on the controls travel. Switch channel S as mixer input In some cases a constant control signal is all that is required as the mixer output; a typical application would be for slight up-elevator trim when an aero-tow coupling is closed - completely independently of the normal elevator trim. If you then assign a switch, you can switch to and fro between the two mixer end-points, and adjust the sup-

plementary elevator trim de ection by altering the mixer ratio. To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function is designated S for switch channel in the software. If you do not want the target channel to be affected by the normal transmitter control, the control can be de-coupled from the function input of the associated control channel by entering free in the Transmitter control settings menu; see pages 74 and 76. The following menu description again includes an example which makes this function clear. Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to leaf through to the Free mixers menu point of the multi-function menu:

mod. mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe mod. mem. servo set. D/R expo free mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry base sett. contr set. heli mixer swashp.mix basic sett telemetry Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open this menu point. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:106 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:106 06.06.2011 19:39:41 06.06.2011 19:39:41 Free mixers Linear mixers Regardless of the selected model type, three linear mix-

ers are available for each of the ten model memories, with the additional possibility of setting up non-linear characteristic curves. In this rst section we will concentrate on the program-

ming procedure for the rst screen page. We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, as found on the second screen page of this menu. The basic programming procedure 1.

of the left or right-hand SET button of the right-hand four-

Use the arrow buttons four-way button to select the desired mixer. Press the central way button: the input eld in the column marked fro(m) at the bottom edge of the screen is now high-

lighted (black background). Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

ton to de ne the mixer input fro(m). SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button; switch to the to column using the button of the left or right-hand four-way button, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button once more: the input eld to is now high-

lighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way but-

ton to de ne the mixer input to. SET button of the right-hand four-

Press the central way button, and (optionally) use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the col-

umn marked Type at the bottom edge of the screen;

you can now include the Ch1 Ch 4 trim lever for the mixer input signal (Tr for trim) and / or use the

arrow button of the left or right-

hand four-way button to move to the column marked 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. at the bottom edge of with the switch symbol the screen, press the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button again, and assign a switch if desired, as described on page 39.

of the left or right-hand four-

Use the arrow button way button to move to the => column, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. De ne the mixer ratios on the second screen page. ESC button of the left-hand four-

Press the central way button to switch back to the rst page. 8. 9. 10. fro(m) After brie y pressing the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button, select the highlighted eld of the selected mixer line using the arrow buttons of the same four-way button, and select one of the control functions 1 6 or S. In the interests of clarity, the control functions 1 4 are abbreviated as follows when dealing with the xed-wing mixers:

c1 ar el rd Throttle / airbrake stick Aileron stick Elevator stick Rudder stick and in the Heli program:

1 2 3 4 Throttle / collective pitch stick Roll stick Pitch-axis stick Tail rotor stick Note:

If you have selected the supplementary control func-

tions, dont forget to assign transmitter controls to the selected control functions 5 and / or 6 for a xed-wing model, or 5 for a model helicopter, in the Transmitter control settings menu. S for switch channel The letter S (switch channel) in the from column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e. g. in order to apply a little extra up-elevator trim when an aero-tow coupling is closed, as mentioned earlier. Once you have assigned a control function or the letter S in the from column, an additional to appears at the bottom edge of the screen. In the input eld of this column you can de ne the control channel as the mixer destination, i. e. the mixer output. At the same time additional elds appear at the bottom line of the screen:

M1 M2 M3 6 c1 S el el el 5 c1 3 typ fro to In this example three mixers have already been de ned. The second mixer (Brake el) is already familiar to us from the Fixed-wing mixers menu. As a general rule you should always start by using these pre-pro-

grammed mixers if possible. However, if you need asymmetrical mixer ratios on both 107 Program description: free mixers 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:107 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:107 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 sides of centre, or have to offset the mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the pre-set mixers at 0, and program one of the free mixers instead. Erasing mixers If you need to erase a mixer that you have already de ned, use the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select its line, then use the arrow buttons to move to the from column before pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button. The eld in the from column of the mixer to be erased is now highlighted: simultaneously press the two arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-

way button (CLEAR). Mixer switches In our example above, a physical switch 5 and the control switch C1 have been assigned to the two linear mixers 1 and 2, and switch 3 to mixer 3. The switch symbol to the right of the switch number shows the current status of that switch. Any mixer to which no switch has been assigned in the column marked by the switch symbol at the bottom of the screen is permanently switched on.

(including the trim) Type If you wish, and if you are using one of the primary control functions 1 4, you can set the trim value of the digital trim lever for the associated stick to affect the mixer input. This is accomplished by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, then using its arrow buttons to select Tr in the highlighted eld. Note:

The effect of the Ch 1 trim lever on the mixer output var-

108 Program description: free mixers ies according to the function which has been assigned to it in the Basic settings menu (pages 56 and 64) in the Motor at Ch 1 column for xed-wing models. Additional special features of free mixers If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e. g. c1 c1, exotic results can be obtained in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off. You will nd one typical example of this on pages 152 154. Before we come to setting mixer ratios, we have to consider what happens if a mixer input is allowed to act on the pre-set coupling of aileron servos, ap servos or collective pitch servos:

Fixed-wing models:

Depending on the number of wing servos set in the Aileron / Flap line of the Basic settings menu, receiver outputs 2 and 5 are reserved for the aileron servos, and outputs 6 and 1 for the two ap servos, as special mixers are assigned to these functions. If mixer outputs are programmed to this type of cou-

pled function, you have to consider their effect on the associated pair of wing aps, according to the re-

ceiving control channel:

Mixer Wirkung Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with aileron NN * 2 function Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with ap function Servo pair 6 + 1 responds with ap function NN * 5 NN * 6

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) NN * 1 Servo pair 6 + 1 responds with aileron function Model helicopters:

Depending on the type of helicopter, up to four ser-

vos may be employed for collective pitch control;

these will be connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5. The transmitter software links them together to provide the functions collective pitch, roll and pitch-

axis. It is not advisable to mix one of the transmitter con-

trols into these occupied channels using the free mix-

ers available outside the Heli mixers menu, as you may inadvertently generate some extremely complex and unwanted interactions. Collective pitch trim via a separate transmitter control counts as one of the few exceptions to this rule; see example 2 at page 111. Important note:

When dealing with the interaction of multiple mixers on one control channel, it is essential to remember that the mixed travels of the individual mixers are cumulative when multiple stick commands are made simultaneously, and this brings a danger that the servo concerned may strike its mechanical end-

stops. If you encounter this problem, simply reduce the servo travel in the Servo settings menu, and /

or reduce the mixer values. However, if you do not wish to reduce the travels in this way, because this method would unnecessarily reduce the control travels you normally use, then you may prefer an alternative method of preventing the servos striking their end-stops: set a suitable travel limit in the TRAVEL -/+ lines of the RX SERVO display page of the Telemetry menu. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:108 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:108 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, we can move on to the method of programming linear and non-linear mixer curves. For each of the three available mixers the mixer curves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select the desired mixer line, use its arrow buttons to move to the right-hand column

(=>), then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to switch to the graphic page. Setting up linear mixer values In the next section we will describe a typical practical application, by de ning a linear mixer curve intended to solve the following problem:

We have a powered model with two ap servos con-

nected to receiver output 6 using a Y-lead. These control surfaces are to be employed as landing aps, i. e. when the associated transmitter control is operated, they de ect down only. However, this ap movement requires an elevator trim correction to counteract the resultant pitch trim change. In the Transmitter control settings menu, assign the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 (for example) to input 6. Transmitter control settings menu I5 I6 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

Start by rotating the transmitter control to its left-hand end-point, and adjust the landing ap linkages so that they are in the neutral (retracted) position at this setting. If you now turn the knob to the right, the aps should de ect down; if they move up, you must reverse the direction of servo rotation. Now we turn to the rst mixer on the screen on page 107; this is the mixer 6 el, to which switch 5 has been assigned:

M1 M2 M3 6 c1 S el el el 5 c1 3 typ fro to Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the second screen page:

MIX1 6 el off If this display appears, you have not activated the mixer by operating the assigned external switch - in this case 5. To correct this, operate the switch:

MIX1 6 el trv offs 0% 0%

0%

SYM ASY The full-height vertical line in the graph represents the current position of the transmitter control assigned to input 6. (In the above graph this is located at the left-

hand edge because CTRL 7 is at its left-hand end-point, as already mentioned.) The full-length horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value of zero over the whole of stick travel; this means that the elevator will not follow when the aps are operated. The rst step is to de ne the offset (mixer neutral point). To do this press the arrow button of the left or right-

hand four-way button and move to the Offs line:

MIX1 6 el trv offs 0% 0%

0%

STO SEL The dotted vertical line indicates the position of the mixer neutral point (offset), i. e. that point along the control travel at which the mixer has NO in uence on the channel connected to its output. By default this point is set to the centre position. However, in our example the neutral (retracted) posi-

tion of the aps is located at the left-hand end-stop of the rotary proportional control, and in this position the elevator must not be affected. We therefore have to Program description: free mixers 109 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:109 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:109 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 shift the mixer neutral point exactly to that position. If you have not already done so, turn the control - in our example this is CTRL 7 - to the left-hand end-stop and press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The dotted vertical line now moves to this point

- the new mixer neutral point - which always retains the OUTPUT value of zero in accordance with the mixer de nition. As it happens, this setting is dif cult to show in a screen shot, so we will change the offset value to only -75%. MIX1 6 el trv offs 0% 0%

75%

STO SEL Notes:

If you wish, you can move the offset value back to centre or otherwise adjust it as follows: select SEL using the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button, followed by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button; you can now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move the offset value. You can also return the mixer neutral point to cen-

tre automatically as follows: select SEL using the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button, then simultaneously press the two arrow but-

tons or of the right-hand four-way button

(CLEAR).

Symmetrical mixer ratios The next step is to de ne the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point, starting from its current position. Use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the Travel line: if necessary, use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the SYM eld, so that you can set the mixer value symmetrically relative to the offset point you have just programmed. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, then set the values in the two highlighted elds within the range -150% to

+150% using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-

way button. Remember that the set mixer value always refers to the input signal from the associated transmitter control (control signal)! Setting a negative mixer value reverses the direction of the mixer. Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons or

of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) erases the mixer ratio in the highlighted eld. The optimum value for our purposes will inevitably need to be established through a ight testing pro-

gramme. MIX1 6 el trv +20% +20%

offs 75%

SYM ASY Since we previously set the mixer neutral point to -75%

of control travel, the elevator (el) will already exhibit a

(slight) down-elevator effect at the neutral point of the landing aps, and this, of course, is not wanted. To cor-

rect this we shift the mixer neutral point back to -100%

of control travel, as described earlier. MIX1 6 el trv +20% +20%

offs 100%

STO SEL If you were now to reset the offset from -75% to, say, 0%

control travel, by selecting the SEL eld using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button, and then brie y pressing the two arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) simultane-

ously, the screen would look like this:

MIX1 6 el trv +20% +20%

offs 0%

STO SEL Asymmetrical mixer ratios For many applications it is necessary to set up different mixer values on either side of the mixer neutral point. Start by resetting the offset of the mixer used in our ex-

ample (6 el) to 0%, as shown in the picture above. Now use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the ASY eld, and then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. If you now turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 -

assigned in our example to input 6 - in the appropriate direction, the mixer ratio for each direction of control can be set separately, i. e. to left and right of the selected offset point using the arrow buttons of the right-hand 110 Program description: free mixers 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:110 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:110 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 four-way button:

MIX1 6 el trv offs

+55%

+20%

0%

SYM ASY Note:

If you are setting up a switch channel mixer of the S

NN * type, you must operate the assigned switch to achieve this effect. The vertical line then jumps between the left and right sides. Examples:

1. The switch SW3 has already been assigned to con-

trol channel 6 in the Transmitter control settings menu, in order to open and close the aero-tow re-

lease. I5 I6 free 3

100% 100%

100% 100%

trv

In the meantime you have carried out a few aero-tow ights, which showed that you always needed to hold in slight up-elevator during the tow. You now wish to set the elevator servo (connected to receiver output 3) to slight up trim when the tow release is closed. In the screen display familiar from page 107 we have set up the third linear mixer to accomplish this, using

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) the switch channel S as the mixer input. Now move the selected switch to the OFF position, and move to the M1 M2 M3 6 c1 S el el el 5 c1 3 MIX3 S el trv offs

+10% +10%

+100%

SYM ASY typ fro to mixer set-up page. Use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the Offs line, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way but-

ton according to the travel setting selected in the Transmitter control settings menu and the switch position, the offset value now jumps to +X% or -X%, e. g.:

MIX3 S el trv offs 0% 0%

+100%

STO SET Use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-

way button to move to the Travel line, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. After moving the selected switch to the mixer ON po-

sition, set the required mixer ratio in the now high-

lighted value elds using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button. 2. The following example applies to model helicopters:

In the case of helicopters with one to max. three swashplate servos, receiver socket 5 is generally used for gyro gain control. For example, if you wish to use a gyro without an adjustment facility from the transmitter, or dont wish to use such a facility, con-

trol channel 5 can be used for some other purpose:

you may wish to assign one of the rotary proportional knobs (CTRL 7 or 8) to the collective pitch trim func-

tion. In the Transmitter control settings menu as-

sign one of these two transmitter controls to input E5. Now simply de ne a free mixer 5 1 with a symmetrical mixer ratio of, say, 25%. Due to the inter-

nal coupling, this transmitter control now acts equally on all the collective pitch servos you are using, with-

out affecting the throttle servo. MIX1 5 1 trv +25% +25%

offs 0%

SYM ASY If you use this mixer, you MUST leave receiver socket 5 unused. Program description: free mixers 111 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:111 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs36:111 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Swashplate mixers Collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis mixers SP MIXER ptch roll nick

+61%

+61%

+61%

the proper manner, then the rst step is to change the mixer directions (+ or -), before you attempt to correct the directions of servo rotation. Note:

Ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical end-stops if you change the mixer values. In the Swashplate line of the Basic settings menu you have already de ned the number of servos which are installed in your helicopter to provide collective pitch control; see page 65. With this information the transmit-

ter software automatically superimposes the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch as required, i. e. you do not need to de ne any additional mixers yourself. If you have a model helicopter which only has a single collective pitch servo, the Swashplate mixer menu point is - of course - super uous, since the three swash-

plate servos for collective pitch, pitch-axis and roll are controlled independently of each other, i. e. no mixers are used. In this case the swashplate mixer menu does not appear in the multi-function list. With all other swash-

plate linkages employing 2 4 collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios and directions are set up by default, as can be seen in the screen shot above. The pre-set value is +61% in each case, but the value can be varied within the range -100% to +100% using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, after pressing the central SET button of the same four-way button. Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons or

of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the mixer input in the highlighted eld to the default value of +61%. If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis) does not follow the transmitter sticks in 112 Program description: Swashplate mixers - model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs37:112 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs37:112 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Servo display Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through to the Servo display menu point of the multi-function menu:

mod.mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry Open the menu point by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. However, this visual display of the current servo posi-

tions can be called up not only by selecting this menu, but also directly by simultaneously pressing the buttons

of the left-hand four-way button from the transmit-

ters basic display, and also from almost any menu posi-

tion. Pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button returns you to your starting point again. 1 3 5 100%

0%

0%

2 4 6 0%

+100%

0%

The current position of any servo is displayed in bar-

chart form, which takes into account the transmitter con-

trol and servo settings, the Dual-Rate / Expo functions, the interaction of all active mixers etc., within the range

-150% to +150% of normal travel. 0% corresponds exactly to the servo centre position. The servo display provides a quick method of checking your settings, with-

out having to switch on the receiving system. However, this does not relieve you of the need to check all your programming steps carefully on the model before oper-

ating it for the rst time, as this is the only safe method of excluding possible programming errors. The display is based on the following scheme for xed-wing models:

Bar 1 = throttle / brake servo or (right) ap Bar 2 = aileron or left aileron Bar 3 = elevator Bar 4 = rudder Bar 5 = right aileron Bar 6 = (left) ap / free channel or 2nd elevator servo and for model helicopters:

Bar 1 = collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis (2) ser-

vo Bar 2 = roll (1) servo Bar 3 = pitch-axis (1) servo Bar 4 = tail rotor servo (gyro) Bar 5 = gyro or pitch-axis (2) servo Bar 6 = throttle servo or speed controller Note:

Please bear in mind that the servo display refers exclu-

sively to the original servo sequence, i. e. it does NOT take into account any output swapping, as can be car-

ried out in the Receiver output sub-menu in the Basic settings menu, page 60 / 69. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs38:113 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs38:113 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Program description: servo position 113 Basic settings Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through to the basic settings menu point of the multi-function menu:

mod. mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the menu point:

Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light RF Country Voice volume Beep volume Ni-MH 4.7V 2 0 unlim Euro 3 3 In this menu you can enter basic settings which are speci c to the transmitter. Note:

Settings in this menu only need to be entered once, and apply to the whole transmitter. This means that the last valid settings always appear when you call up this menu from another model memory. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the appropriate line, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. The value eld is now highlighted (black background), and you can use the arrow buttons of the right-hand 114 Program description: basic settings four-way button to alter the default value. Pressing the central SET button once more concludes the entry process. Battery type Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light Ni-MH 4.7v 2 0 unlim 4.2 V (LiPo battery) - according to your choice of bat-

tery type - in increments of 0.1 Volt. However, never be tempted to enter too low a value here, to ensure that you always have ample time to land your model safely if a battery warning should be triggered. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to 4.7 V or 3.4 V respec-

tively. Button response In this line you inform the transmitter whether its power is to be drawn from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-

cell LiPo battery. The voltage range offered in the (next) line Battery warning threshold will vary according to this setting. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to NiMH. Battery warning threshold Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light Ni-MH 4.7v 2 0 unlim In this line you can enter any voltage you like battery needs charging within the range 4.5 to 5.5 V (NiMH battery) or 3.4 to Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light Ni-MH 4.7v 2 0 unlim In this line you can select the speed of response of the four-way buttons within the range 1 to 10. The higher the set value, the longer the button has to be pressed before the software responds. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to 2. Contrast You can adjust the contrast of the mx-12 HoTTs in-

tegral screen to optimise its legibility in varying weather and temperatures:

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs39:114 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs39:114 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 GRAUBELE

#01 50%

5.2V 3:33h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M GRAUBELE

#01 50%

5.2V 3:33h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M This is accomplished by selecting the Contrast line using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button:

Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light Ni-MH 4.7v 2 0 unlim Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button: the value eld is now highlighted, and you can adjust the screen contrast within the range +/- 20 using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button:

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to 0. Screen backlight Batt type Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light Ni-MH 4.7v 2 0 unlim This line determines how long the screen backlighting remains on when you switch the transmitter on, and after the last button-press. The available values are unlimited 30 s, 60 s and 120 s. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to unlimited. Country setting Batt warning Touch Sense Contrast Display light RF Country 4.7v 2 0 unlim Euro The purpose of the country setting is to ful l the require-

ments of various directives (FCC, ETSI, IC, etc.). For example, radio control systems operated in France must be set to a restricted frequency band. For this reason the transmitters country setting MUST be set to France mode before the system is used in that country. It is prohibited to use the Universal / EURO mode in France. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to Euro. Voice volume Touch Sense Contrast Display light RF Country Voice volume 2 0 unlim Euro 3 In this line you can de ne the volume of the speech output which is generated through earphones when the optional earphone socket, Order No. 33001.71, is tted;

the available range is 0 to 10. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to 3. Beep volume Contrast Display light RF Country Voice volume Beep volume 0 unlim Euro 3 3 This line determines the volume of the transmitters internal sounder within the range 0 to 6. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the value in the highlighted eld to 3. Program description: basic settings 115 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs39:115 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs39:115 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Fail-Safe FAIL SAFE Pos hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delay 0.25s STO The inherently higher operational security of the HoTT system compared with classic PPM technology is due to the ability of the HoTT receivers integral micro-proc-

essor to process the signals from its transmitter ex-

clusively, and also to process any dirty control signals which it picks up. The receiver constantly stores the latest valid signals, and invalid signals are automatically replaced by the stored signals - but only if the control signal is seriously inaccurate or even damaged, e. g. due to interference from an outside source. This process is dependent upon various settings which are described later in this section. For example, the receiver sup-

presses brief interference such as eld strength holes and similar effects which would otherwise result in the familiar glitches. When this happens, the red LED on the receiver lights up. If you have not yet programmed any Fail-Safe settings in the currently active model memory, the following warning display will appear in the basic display for a few seconds when you switch the transmitter on:

fail safe setup t.b.d transmitter to receiver. The receiver outputs 1 6 can optionally 1. maintain (hold) their current position:

If interference should occur, all servos programmed to hold mode remain at the position last assessed by the receiver as correct until such time as a new, correct control signal arrives at the receiver, or move to a user-selectable position (Pos) if interfer-

ence occurs, after a delay time has elapsed. 2. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the desired servo socket 1 to 6

(), then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to switch between hold ( ) and posi-

tion ( ) mode:

FAIL SAFE s, 0.75 s and 1 s). Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons or of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) resets the highlighted eld to the default value of 0.75 s. Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the STO eld at bottom right of the screen; SIMULTANEOUSLY move the servos for which you have selected Position mode to the desired positions using the associated transmitter controls. A press of the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button stores these positions in the receiver as the Fail-Safe settings, so that it can revert to these if interfer-

ence should strike. The transmitter informs you of the stored data by brie y displaying:

Pos hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delay 0.25s STO Pos hold FAIL SAFE Position stored 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delay 0.25s STO Now select the Delay option at bottom left of the screen using the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button FAIL SAFE Pos hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delay 0.25s STO Caution:

We strongly recommend that you make use of the safety potential of this option by at least setting the throttle position (glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric motor to stop, if a fail-safe event should be triggered. Model helicopters should be pro-

grammed to hold. This simple precaution ensures that the model is much less likely to cause havoc and cause property damage or personal injury. Programming The Fail-Safe function determines the receivers beha-

viour when interference occurs in the transmission from 116 Program description: Fail-Safe press the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button, and use its arrow buttons to select your preferred delay period from the four on offer (0.25 s, 0.5 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs40:116 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs40:116 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Telemetry The Telemetry menu is used to call up and program transmitter and receiver data, and data generated by optional telemetry sensors (see Appendix), in real time. Receiver data are transmitted to the transmitter via the HoTT receivers integral downlink channel. One telemetry sensor can be connected to the Telem-

etry input of the following receivers: GR-12S HoTT

(Order No. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (Order No. 33506) and GR-16 (Order No. 33508). Two telemetry sensors can be connected to the HoTT GR-24 HoTT receiver (Order No. 33512). Since this and future receivers can be updated by the user, the associated Telemetry menus can constantly be kept up-to-date, and expanded with the introduction of additional functions or languages in future. Note:

If you register your product under http://www.graupner. de/en/service/product_registration you will automatically be informed about new updates by e-mail. Before updating the transmitter software you should always back up all occupied model memories to a compatible laptop or PC in order to avoid a possible loss of data. In addition to the back-ups mentioned above, rmware updates are transferred using the transmitters PC socket and the optional USB adapter, Order No. 7168.6 and the connecting lead, Order No. 6466.S, in con-

junction with a PC running the Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system. The programs required for this and related information can be found in the Download area for the correspond-

ing products at the website www.graupner.de. We always recommend that you load the latest rmware into your equipment, to ensure that your system is constantly kept up-to-date. Important information:

These instructions cover the functions available at the time of going to press. As mentioned in the sections entitled Binding mul-

tiple receivers on pages 61 and 70, it is possible to bind more than one receiver per model. However, in subsequent operations only the receiver which was bound last is able to make a telemetry con-

nection to the transmitter. On the other hand, this also means that only the last bound receiver can be addressed using the Telemetry menu. You may there-

fore need to change the binding sequence before you can enter settings which relate to a particular receiv-

er. When setting up the radio control system, please ensure at all times that the transmitter aerial is an adequate distance from the receiver aerials. A safe distance is about one metre. If you ne-

glect this, you risk interference with the downlink channel, and consequent malfunctions. Since the transmitter and receiver only exchange te-

lemetry data after each fourth data packet, data transmission inevitably requires a certain amount of time, which means that there will be some delay in responding to button-presses and set-up changes. This does not constitute an error. Changes to model and sensor programming must only be carried out when the model is on the ground. Do not make any alterations unless the motor is switched off and the ight battery is disconnected. If you ignore this, unwanted effects of programming changes cannot be excluded.

Telemetry For example, if you accidentally initiate an active ser-

vo test at the receiver, the model could crash and cause personal injury or property damage. Please see the Safety Notes on pages 3 6 of this manual and the various individual instructions. All settings which you enter using the menu, such as Fail-Safe, servo direction, servo trav-

el, mixer and curve settings etc., are stored exclu-

sively in the receiver, and are therefore carried over if you install the receiver in a different model. For this reason we strongly recommend that you re-initial-

ise your HoTT receiver if you wish to use it in another model; see Reset on page 33. We therefore recommend that you program directions of servo rotation, servo travel, mixer and curve set-

tings using only the mx-12-speci c standard men-

us Servo settings (page 72), Free mixers (page 107) and D/R Expo (pages 82 and 84). If you ignore this, the settings may overlap and interfere with each other; in the most favourable case this can result in confusion when operating the model, and in the least favourable case it could cause problems. The channel-mapping function of the HoTTs integral Telemetry menu can be used to share out control functions between multiple receiv-

ers in any way, or even to assign the same control function to several receiver outputs; for example, you may wish to operate each aileron with two servos in-

stead of just one, etc. Once again we strongly re-

commend that you act as cautiously as possible when carrying out the programming. mx-12 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:117 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:117 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 Program description: Telemetry menu 117 Telemetry The menus grouped together under the overall heading Telemetry are called up from the basic display of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter by holding the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button pressed in for about three seconds. An alternative method of calling up this menu, which also applies to the transmitters other menus, is to brie y press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button in the multi-function list:

If you wish to change a parameter, press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to highlight the parameter (black background)). Change the value within the possible range using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, and then press the SET but-

ton again brie y to accept the value. At this point you can use the arrow buttons of the left or right four-way button to select the desired sub-

menu. However, if the message CANT RECEIVE DATA OK appears instead of the desired sub-menu when you press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, then the transmitter has no connection to a receiver. In this case, switch your receiving system on, or re-bind the receiver you wish to address, if this should not be the last bound one; see Important information on the previous page. mod. mem. servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe base sett. contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry Basic menu operation In general terms the Telemetry menu is operated just like the other menus of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter. The few differences are described below:

You can switch between the individual pages of the Te-

lemetry menu using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button: you will nd corresponding direction indicators at top right of every screen page in the form of angle brackets (< >); see illustrations. If only one angle bracket is visible, then you are currently at the rst or last page. In this case it is only possible to switch pages in the direction indicated by the angle bracket. Menu lines in which parameters can be altered are marked with an angle bracket pre x (>). Pressing the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button causes the > pointer to jump forward or back by one line. Lines to which you cannot jump contain no user-variable values. 118 Program description: Telemetry menu SETTING & DATA VIEW SETTING & DATA VIEW TELEMETRY SETTING & DATA VIEW SIMPLE DATA VIEW RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER On the rst screen page of the sub-menu Setting &

Data View, headed RX DATAVIEW you cannot enter any settings. This page is for infor-

mation purposes only:

RX DATAVIEW SQUA100%SdBM030dBM SSTR100% RTEM.+28C L PACK TIME 00010msec R-VOLT :05.0V L.R-VOLT:04.5V SENSOR1 :00.0V 00C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00C Explanation Signal quality in %

Receive performance in dBm Signal strength in %

Receiver temperature in C Value S-QUA S-dBm S-STR R-TEM. L PACK TIME Indicates the time in ms for which the longest data packet was lost in transmission between transmitter and receiver Current receiver operating voltage, in Volt R-VOLT 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:118 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:118 06.06.2011 19:39:42 06.06.2011 19:39:42 L.R-VOLT SENSOR1 SENSOR2 Lowest receiver operating voltage since the last power-on, in Volt Shows the values of the optional telemetry sensor 1 in Volt and C Shows the values of the optional telemetry sensor 2 in Volt and C Signal quality (S-QUA) The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent live to the transmit-

ter via the receivers downlink channel, and shows the signal strength in %. Receive performance (S-dBm) The receive performance (S-dBm) is displayed as a negative value, i. e. a value approaching zero is the highest value (= best reception). The lower the value falls, the worse is the receive performance. This is an important item of information, particularly when you are carrying out a range-check before operating the model. Note:

In the case of negative numbers the value is reversed:

the higher the number following the minus sign, the lower the value. Carry out a range-check as described on pages 62 and 71 before every ight, and remember to simulate all the servo movements which are likely to occur in the air. In active range-check mode the range must be at least fty metres on the ground. To guarantee safe operation of your model, a value no higher than -80 dBm must be displayed in the RX DATA display under S-dBm at this distance. If the value falls below this (e. g. -85 dBm), you should under no circumstances y your model. Instead check the receiving system installation and the aerial positions. When operating a model this value should not fall below

-90 dBm; if it does, reduce the distance between the pilot and the model. However, the audible range warn-

ing (beeping at one-second intervals) will normally be triggered before this value is reached, in order to ensure safe operation. Signal strength (S-STR) The value for signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. An audible range warning (beeping at one-second inter-

vals) will always be generated as soon as the receiver signal in the downlink channel is too weak. However, since the transmitter has a much higher transmitting power than the receiver, the model can still be operated safely at this point. Nevertheless, in the interests of safety the distance to the model should be reduced until the audible warning ceases. Receiver temperature (R-TEM.) Ensure under all ight conditions that the receiver stays within its speci ed temperature range (ideally between

-10 and +55C). The limit values for receiver temperature after which a warning occurs can be set in the SERVO TEST sub-menu under ALARM TEMP+ (50 80C) and ALARM TEMP- (-20 +10C). If the temperature exceeds or falls below the set limit, an audible signal

(continuous beeping) is triggered, and TEMP.E is displayed at top right in all the RX receiver sub-menus. At the same time the R-TEM parameter is highlighted on the RX DATAVIEW screen page. Data packets (L PACK TIME) This displays the longest period in ms in which data packets were lost in transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. In practice this means the longest time in which the radio control system went into Fail-Safe mode. Operating voltage (R-VOLT) Check the receivers operating voltage constantly. If it is too low, you must under no circumstances continue to operate your model, and certainly not launch it. The low receiver voltage warning can be adjusted within the range 3.0 to 6.0 Volt in the SERVO TEST sub-menu under ALARM VOLT. If the voltage falls below the threshold, an audible signal (repeated double beep, long

/ short) is generated, and in all the receiver sub-menus RX you will see VOLT.E at top right. At the same time the parameter R-VOLT is highlighted in the RX DATAVIEW sub-menu. The current receiver battery voltage is also shown in the basic display; see page 24. Minimum operating voltage (L.R-VOLT) L.R-VOLT shows the receivers minimum operating voltage since the last time it was switched on. If this voltage differs signi cantly from the current operating voltage R-VOLT, this could mean that the receiver battery is being overstressed by the servos, causing collapses in battery voltage. If this should occur, we recommend installing a higher-performance receiver battery to ensure maximum operating safety. Sensor 1 + 2 Shows the values of the optional telemetry sensor 1 and, if present, sensor 2 in Volt and C. You will nd a description of these sensors in the Appendix. Program description: Telemetry menu 119 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:119 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:119 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 RX SERVO RX SERVO OUTPUT CH: 01 REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500sec TRIM : 000sec TRAVEL : 150%

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec Before you carry out any programming at this screen display be sure to read the information on page 117. Value OUTPUT CH Channel select Explanation REVERSE CENTER Servo reverse Servo centre in s TRIM TRAVEL TRAVEL+

PERIOD Trim position in s deviating from the CENTRE position Travel limitation at

% servo travel Travel limitation at

% servo travel Cycle time in ms Possible settings 1 according to receiver OFF / ON If active (high-

lighted), according to transmitter control position

-120 +120 s 30 150%

30 150%

10 or 20 ms OUTPUT CH (Channel select) Select the Channel line if necessary using the arrow buttons. Press the SET button of the right-hand four-way button to highlight the value eld. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button to set the 120 Program description: Telemetry menu desired channel (e. g. 01). The following parameters always refer to the channel which you set at this point:

REVERSE (servo reverse) Sets the direction of rotation of the servo connected to the selected control channel: ON / OFF CENTER (servo centre) The CENTRE line displays the current pulse width in s of the control channel selected in the OUTPUT CH line. The displayed value varies according to the current posi-

tion of the transmitter control which affects this control channel, and also its trim position. A pulse width of 1500 s corresponds to the standard centre position, and therefore the usual servo centre setting. To change this value, select the CENTRE line and press the SET button. Move the corresponding transmit-

ter control to the desired position, and press the SET button again to store the current transmitter control position. This position is now stored as the new neutral position. TRIM (trim position) The purpose of the TRIM line is to provide ne adjust-

ment of the neutral position of a servo connected to the control channel selected in the OUTPUT CH line. Adjustments are made in 1 s increments using the ar-

row buttons of the right-hand four-way button. The value in the CENTRE line can be adjusted over the range

+/- 120 s around the TRIM value set here. Default setting: 0 s TRAVEL/+ (servo travel /+) This option can be used to place a limit on servo travel

(control surface travel) for the servo connected to the control channel selected in the OUTPUT CH line. The value is set separately for each side of centre. The setting can be altered separately for both directions within the range 30 ... 150%. Default setting: 150% on both sides. PERIOD (cycle time) In this line you can determine the frame time for the individual channel signals. This setting applies to all control channels. If you use digital servos exclusively, it is safe to set a cycle time of 10 ms. If you are using a mixture of servo types, or exclusively analogue servos, it is essential to set 20 ms, otherwise the servos will be over-stressed and may response by jittering or making rumbling noises. RX FAIL SAFE RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 01 INPUT CH: 01 MODE : HOLD F.S.Pos. : 1500sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1500sec Before we describe this menu a few words as a re-

minder:

Doing nothing is the worst thing you can do in this regard. The default setting for the HoTT receiver is HOLD mode. If interference should occur with hold-mode in force, and 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:120 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:120 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 if you are very lucky, the model aircraft will y straight ahead for an inde nite period and then land some-

where or other without causing major damage. However, if the interference strikes in the wrong place and at the wrong time, then a power model could become uncon-

trollable and tear wildly across the ying eld, endanger-

ing pilots and spectators. For this reason you really must consider whether you should at least program the throttle to motor stopped, to avoid the worst of these risks. After that warning we present a brief description of the three possible Fail-Safe variants offered by the mx-12 HoTT transmitter:

The simplest way of setting Fail-Safe - and the one we recommend - is to use the Fail-Safe menu, which is accessed from the multi-function list; see page 116. A similar alternative, albeit slightly more dif cult to ac-

cess, is to use the FAIL-SAFE ALL option described on the next double-page. And nally there is the relatively complex method of entering individual settings using the MODE, F.S.Pos. and DELAY options. The description of this variant starts below with the MODE option. Value OUTPUT CH Output channel

(receiver servo socket) Input channel

(control channel coming from transmitter) Possible settings 1 according to receiver Explanation INPUT CH 1 16 MODE Fail-Safe mode F.S.Pos. DELAY FAIL SAFE ALL POSITION Fail-Safe position Response time

(delay) Stores fail-safe positions for all control channels Displays stored Fail-Safe position HOLD FAIL SAFE OFF 1000 2000 s 0,25, 0,50, 0,75 and 1,00 s NO / SAVE between approx. 1000 and 2000 s OUTPUT CH (servo socket) In this line you select the OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket) which is to be adjusted. INPUT CH (input channel select) As already mentioned on page 117, the six control func-

tions of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter can be shared out between several receivers if necessary, or alternatively several receiver outputs can be assigned to the same control function; for example, you may wish to be able to operate each aileron with two servos, or to control an oversized rudder using two coupled servos instead of a single one. Sharing control functions amongst multiple HoTT receiv-

ers is a useful idea for large-scale models, for example, to avoid long servo leads. In this case bear in mind that only the last bound receiver can be addressed using the Telemetry menu. The six control channels (INPUT CH) of the mx-12 HoTT can be managed in the appropriate manner using the facility known as channel mapping, i. e. by assign-

ing a different control channel in the INPUT CH line to the receiver servo socket selected in the OUTPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: if, for example, you have entered 2AIL in the Aileron/ ap line of the Basic settings menu at the transmitter, then control function 2 (aileron) is already divided to control channels 2 + 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding receiver INPUT CH, i. e. those to be mapped, would in this case be channels 02 + 05. Examples:

You wish to assign two or more servos to each ailer-

on of a large-scale model aircraft:

Assign one and the same INPUT CH (control chan-

nel) to each of the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo sockets). The appropriate servo sockets are selected for the left or right wing, while the INPUT CH will be one of the two default aileron control channels 2 + 5. You wish to control the rudder of a large-scale model aircraft using two or more servos:

Assign one and the same INPUT CH (control chan-

nel) to each of the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo sockets); in this case the default rudder channel 4.

MODE The settings you enter for the options MODE, F.S.Pos. and DELAY determine the receivers behaviour if inter-

ference should affect the transmission from transmitter to receiver. The setting programmed under MODE always refers to the channel you have set in the OUTPUT CH line. The default setting for all servos is HOLD. For each selected OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket) you can choose between:

FAI(L) SAFE Program description: Telemetry menu 121 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:121 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:121 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 If interference occurs, the corresponding servo moves to the position displayed in the POSITION line for the duration of the interference, after the de-

lay time set in the DELAY line. HOLD If interference occurs, a servo set to HOLD main-

tains the position last assessed as correct for the du-

ration of the interference. OFF If set to OFF when interference occurs, the receiv-

er continues to send the last correct control signals

(which it has stored) to the corresponding servo out-

put for the duration of the interference. This can be imagined as the receiver switching the signal wire off. But CAUTION: if the control signal is absent, ana-

logue servos and many digital servos offer no resist-

ance to the forces acting on the control surfaces, with the result that the models control surface positions are more or less quickly lost. F.S.Pos. (Fail-Safe position) For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket) activate

(highlight) the value eld by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, then use the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button in the F.S.POS. line to set the servo position which the servo is to take up in FAIL-SAFE mode if interference should occur. The setting can be entered in increments of 10 s. Default setting: 1500 s (servo centre) Important note:

The F.S.POS. function is also signi cant if the receiver is switched on, but is (not yet) receiving a valid signal;

this applies to all three modes OFF, HOLD and FAIL-

122 Program description: Telemetry menu SAFE:

The servo immediately runs to the Fail-Safe position pre-

viously set in the Position line. This can be exploited, for example, to prevent the operation of a retractable un-

dercarriage or similar function if the receiver is switched on accidentally. However, during normal model opera-

tions the corresponding servo behaves in accordance with the set MODE if interference should strike. DELAY (fail-safe response time or delay) At this point you can set the delay time after which the servos are to run to their previously selected positions if the signal should be interrupted. This setting applies to all channels, but only affects the servos programmed to FAIL-SAFE mode. Default setting: 0.75 s FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting) This sub-menu can be used to de ne the Fail-Safe position of the servos simply by pressing a button; it operates in a similar manner to the Fail-Safe menu described on page 116, and is simple to use:

Move to the FAIL-SAFE ALL line and press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the value eld; NO is highlighted (black background). Now set the parameter to SAVE using one of the ar-

row buttons of the right-hand four-way button. Use the transmitter controls to move all the servos which you have assigned - or intend to assign later - in the MODE

- FAIL-SAFE line, to the desired fail-safe positions. In the extreme bottom line Position displays the current position of the transmitter control for the channel you have just set:

RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 01 INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.Pos. : 1500sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE POSITION : 1670sec After pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button once more, the display reverts from SAVE to NO. This indicates that the position of all the servos affected by the procedure have now been stored, and have also been adopted in the F.S.Pos. line. At the same time the position for the current OUTPUT CH

(servo socket) is immediately displayed on the screen. RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 01 INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.Pos. : 1670sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1670sec Switch the transmitter off, and check the Fail-Safe posi-

tions by observing the servo movements. Fail-Safe in combination with channel mapping It is clearly desirable that mapped servos - i. e. servos which are controlled by a common control channel

(INPUT CH) - should respond in the same way when interference occurs, so the corresponding settings of the INPUT CH determine the behaviour of mapped servos. For example, if you are using a GR-16 eight-channel receiver, Order No. 33508, and receiver servo sockets 6, 7 and 8 are mapped together, i. e. if the same control channel 04 is assigned as INPUT CH to OUTPUT CH

(servo sockets) 06, 07 and 08 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:122 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:122 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 06 INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.Pos. : 1670sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1670sec RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 07 INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.Pos. : 1230sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1670sec RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 08 INPUT CH: 04 MODE : HOLD F.S.Pos. : 1770sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1670sec RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 04 INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.Pos. : 1500sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1500sec In this case servo socket 04 would respond in accord-

ance with the Fail-Safe settings for CH 01. In contrast, the response or delay time set in the DE-

LAY line always applies uniformly to all channels which are set to FAIL-SAFE. RX FREE MIXER RX FREE MIXER MODE : 1 MASTER CH: 00 SLAVE CH : 00 STRAVEL: 100 STRAVEL+: 100 RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE: NORMAL then INPUT CH 04 determines the Fail-Safe behav-

iour of the three servos connected to control channel 4, regardless of the individual settings of the OUTPUT CH for INPUT CH 04:

Value MODE MASTER CH Primary channel Explanation Mixer select RX FAIL SAFE OUTPUT CH: 04 INPUT CH: 04 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.Pos. : 1500sec DELAY : 0.75sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1500sec SLAVE CH S-TRAVEL S-TRAVEL+

Secondary channel Negative mix value Positive mix value Possible settings 1, 2 or 3 0, 1 according to transmitter 0, 1 according to receiver 0 100%

0 100%

This also applies, for example, if it is mapped in turn to INPUT CH 01:

RX WING MIXER Tail type NORMAL, V-TAIL ELEVON

(aileron / elevator mixer for deltas and ying wings) MIXER Up to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously. You can switch between mixer 1, mixer 2 and mixer 3 using MIXER. The following settings on this screen always apply to the mixer selected in the MIXER line. Important note:

If you have already programmed mixer functions in the Wing mixers or Free mixers menus, check very carefully that those mixers do not overlap with those of the RX FREE MIXER menu. MASTER CH (from) The signal present at the MASTER CH (master chan-

nel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (slave channel) to a user-variable extent, following the same principles as described in detail in the section entitled Free mixers on page 107. Select 00 if no mixer is to be set. SLAVE CH (to) A proportion of the signal of the MASTER CH (master channel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (slave channel);

the mixer ratio is determined by the percentage gures entered in the TRAVEL- and TRAVEL+ lines. Select 00 if no mixer is to be set. TRAVEL/+ (mixer ratio in %) The mixer ratio in relation to the MASTER signal is Program description: Telemetry menu 123 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:123 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:123 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 determined separately for each direction by the values entered in these two lines. TAIL TYPE The following model types are also available in the Tail line of the Basic settings menu (see page 58), and should normally be set up at that point. If you have done this, you should always leave the TAIL TYPE at NOR-

MAL. However, if you prefer to use the receivers integral mixers, you can select the pre-set mixer function for the corresponding model type:

NORMAL This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type with tail-mounted stabiliser panels and separate rud-

der and elevator. No mixer function is required for this model type. V-TAIL For this model type the control functions elevator and rudder are linked together in such a way that each of the two control surfaces - actuated by a separate ser-

vos - carries out superimposed elevator and rudder functions. The servos are usually connected to the receiver as follows:

OUTPUT CH 3: left V-tail servo OUTPUT CH 4: right V-tail servo If you nd that the servos rotate in the wrong direc-

tion, please see the notes on page 44. ELEVON (delta / ying wing models) The servos connected to outputs 2 and 3 assume su-

perimposed aileron and elevator functions. The ser-

vos are usually connected to the receiver as follows:

OUTPUT CH 2: left elevon OUTPUT CH 3: right elevon If you nd that the servos rotate in the wrong direc-

tion, please see the notes on page 44. RX CURVE (EXPO) RX CURVE CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : B CURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04 TYPE : B Value CURVE1, 2 or 3 CH TYPE Explanation Channel assign-

ment of the selec-

ted curve setting Curve type Possible settings 1 according to receiver A, B, C see illustration TYPE A Expo = 100%

DR = 125%

TYPE B linear TYPE C Expo = +100%

DR = 70%

l e v a r t o v r e S

0 0 1

0

0 0 1 100%

0

+100%

l e v a r t o v r e S

0 0 1

0

0 0 1 100%

0

+100%

l e v a r t o v r e S

0 0 1

0

0 0 1 100%

0

+100%

Transmitter control travel Transmitter control travel Transmitter control travel In most cases a non-linear control function is used for aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder

(channel 4), and the default settings assume that this is the case. BUT CAUTION: this assignment only applies if you have not set either 2 ELE Sv in the Tail line of the Basic settings menu, or 2AIL or 2AIL 2FL in the Ail

/ ap line, at the transmitter. Otherwise control function 3 (elevator) is already split over control channels 3 +

6, and control function 2 (aileron) is split over control channels 2 + 5 for the left and right ailerons. In both these cases the corresponding receiver control channels

(INPUT CH) would then be channels 03 + 06 or 02 + 05. For example, if you have set 2AIL at the transmitter, and wish to use the RX CURVE option discussed here instead of the D/R Expo menu (see page 82) of the mx-12 HoTT transmitter - which offers more individual adjustment options - then two curves must be set:

RX CURVE CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : A CURVE3 CH : 04 TYPE : B If you ignored this, the left and right ailerons would exhibit different control characteristics. The RX CURVE function can be used to manage the control characteristics for up to three servos:

CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) for the rst servo. The following setting in TYPE only affects the chan-

nel you select at this point. TYPE Select the servo curve:

A: EXPO = -100% and DUAL RATE = 125%

The servo responds slowly to stick movements around the neutral position, but the curve becomes steeper with increasing control travel. B: Linear setting 124 Program description: Telemetry menu 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:124 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:124 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 The servo follows the stick movement with a linear response. C: EXPO = +100% and DUAL RATE = 70%

The servo responds slowly to stick movements around the neutral position, but the curve becomes steeper with increasing control travel. ALARM TEMP+

ALARM TEMP Note:

The control characteristics programmed at this point also affect mapped receiver outputs. CH OUTPUT TYPE 50 80 C Default setting:

70 C

-20 +10 C Default setting:

-10 C Alarm limit for excessive receiver temperature Alarm limit for excessively low receiver temperature Channel sequence ONCE, SAME, SUMI, SUMO RX SERVO TEST RX SERVO TEST ALLMAX : 2000sec ALLMIN : 1000sec TEST : STOP ALARM VOLT : 3.8V ALARM TEMP+: 70C ALARM TEMP:10C CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE Value ALL-MAX ALL-MIN TEST ALARM VOLT Explanation Servo travel on the + side for all servo outputs in the servo test Servo travel on the - side for all servo outputs in the servo test Test procedure Alarm limit for the receiver low-

voltage warning Possible settings 1500 2000 s 1500 1000 s START / STOP 3,0 6,0 V Default setting:

3,8 V ALL MAX (maximum servo travel) In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the servo test on the plus side of control travel. 2000 s corresponds to full travel, 1500 s corresponds to the neutral position. ALL MIN (minimum servo travel) In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the servo test on the minus side of control travel. 1000 s corresponds to full travel, 1500 s corresponds to the neutral position. TEST In this line you can start and stop the receivers integral servo test. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the input eld:

RX SERVO TEST ALLMAX : 2000sec ALLMIN : 1000sec TEST : STOP ALARM VOLT : 3.8V ALARM TEMP+: 70C ALARM TEMP:10C CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE Now select START with one of the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button:

RX SERVO TEST ALLMAX : 2000sec ALLMIN : 1000sec TEST : START ALARM VOLT : 3.8V ALARM TEMP+: 70C ALARM TEMP:10C CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to start the test-run. The input eld now reverts from highlighted to normal:

RX SERVO TEST ALLMAX : 2000sec ALLMIN : 1000sec TEST : START ALARM VOLT : 3.8V ALARM TEMP+: 70C ALARM TEMP:10C CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE To stop the servo test, re-activate the input eld as de-

scribed previously, then select STOP and con rm your choice with the SET button of the right-hand four-way button. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:125 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:125 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 Program description: Telemetry menu 125 ALARM VOLT (low receiver voltage warning) ALARM VOLT monitors the receiver voltage. The thresh-

old can be set to any value within the range 3.0 to 6.0 Volt. If the voltage falls below the set alarm limit, an audible signal (interval beeping, long / short) is trig-

gered, and VOLT.E ashes at top right in all RX screen displays:

VOLT.E RX SERVO OUTPUT CH: 01 REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500sec TRIM : 000sec TRAVEL : 150%

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec The parameter R-VOLT is also highlighted in the RX DATAVIEW display:

RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E SQUA100%SdBM030dBM SSTR100% RTEM.+28C L PACK TIME 00010msec R-VOLT :03.7V L.R-VOLT:03.5V SENSOR1 :00.0V 00C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00C ALARM TEMP +/- (receiver temperature monitor) These two options monitor the temperature of the receiver: a lower limit value ALARM TEMP- (-20 ...

+10C) and an upper limit value ALARM TEMP+ (50 ... 80C) can be programmed. If the temperature exceeds the upper limit or falls below the lower one, an audible signal (continuous beeping) is triggered, and TEMP.E appears at top right in all receiver displays. The param-

eter R-TEM is also highlighted in the RX DATAVIEW display. Ensure that the receiver remains within the permitted 126 Program description: Telemetry menu temperature range under all ight conditions (ideally between -10 and +50C). CH OUTPUT TYPE At this point you can select how the receiver outputs are to be addressed. ONCE The receiver servo sockets are addressed in se-

quence; this is recommended for use with analogue servos. At this setting the servos are automatical-

ly operated at a frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the twelve-channel receiver, Order No. 33512) - regard-

less of what is set or displayed in the PERIOD line of the RX SERVO display. SAME The receiver servo sockets are addressed in parallel blocks of four, i. e. if you are using the GR-12 receiv-

er included in the set, channels 1 to 4 and channels 5 and 6 each receive their control signals simultane-

ously. This is recommended for use with digital servos, and especially where multiple servos are employed for a single function (e. g. ailerons), to ensure that the groups of servos run absolutely synchronously. If you are using digital servos, we recommend that you set 10 ms in the PERIOD line of the RX SER-

VO display so that you can exploit the fast response of these servos. If you are using analogue servos, it is essential to select 20 ms. If you choose the faster setting, please take par-

ticular care when selecting the receiver power supply: since up to four servos can start moving si-

multaneously, the load on the battery is fairly severe, so it must be a high-performance type. SUMO (Sum signal OUT) A HoTT receiver con gured as SUMO constant-

ly generates what is known as a sum signal from the control signals of all its control channels. This signal is present, for example, at servo socket 8 of the GR-

16 and GR-24 receiver. The receiver outputs are addressed in sequence at a frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the GR-24 receiver, Order No. 33512), even if you have set 10 ms in the PERIOD line of the RX SERVO screen page. Although primarily intended for satellite mode with two HoTT receivers, as described below, the sum signal generated by the receiver de ned as SUMO can also be used, for example, to control a ybar-

less system, or to control a ight simulator (using the adapter lead, Order No. 33310). In Satellite mode two HoTT receivers are inter-connected using a three-core connecting lead (Order No. 33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm) by the highest-numbered servo sockets. For more details on this please visit www.graupner.de on the Internet. All channels of the HoTT receiver which is con gured as SUMO, and is de ned as the satellite receiver, are constantly transferred to the second HoTT receiver -

the primary receiver - via this connection . The prima-

ry receiver must be programmed as the SUMI (Sum signal IN). Note that the signal only ever moves in one direction:

towards the SUMI. However, if reception fails, the receiver de ned as SUMI only uses the sum signal coming from the 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:126 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:126 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 1 red power supply using its own power lead. If high cur-

rents can be expected, duplicated power connections are recommended. However, if each of the two re-

ceivers is to be powered by its own battery, then it is essential to withdraw the central (red) wire from one of the two sat-

ellite lead connectors, as shown in the illus-

tration. If you wish to carry out further programming, such as the Fail-Safe settings, disconnect the three-core satellite connection between the two receivers, and switch on just the receiver you wish to address. Note that you may also need to change the binding se-

quence. 2 3 SUMO if at least one channel at the SUMI is pro-

grammed to Fail-Safe. If the receiver programmed as the satellite (SUMO) suffers signal reception failure, the servos connected to that receiver take up the Fail-Safe positions pro-

grammed in the satellite receiver, regardless of the primary receiver. If, in contrast, reception fails at both receivers simul-

taneously, then the receiver software (the version current at the time of printing these instructions) al-

ways reverts to the SUMOs fail-safe settings. Howe-

ver, mutual interactions can certainly not be ruled out in individual cases, and for this reason we ur-

gently advise you to carry out appropriate tests BEFORE ying a model. This receiver con guration is recommended in partic-

ular circumstances: for example, if one of the two re-

ceivers has to be installed in an unfavourable position in the model, or if there is a danger that the received signal will be weak in certain ight attitudes, per-

haps due to a turbine, carbon bre in the airframe, or a similar problem, with the result that sporadic range problems might be expected. For this reason it is essential to connect the most im-

portant control functions to the primary receiver (the one programmed as SUMI), so that interference to the satellite receiver (SUMO) does not cause the model to go out of control. Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the airborne power supply, are only sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver (con gured as SUMO), i. e. all te-

lemetry sensors must be connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO). Each receiver should be connected to the shared 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:127 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:127 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 Program description: Telemetry menu 127 Value RX-S QUA RX-S ST RX-dBm TX-dBm V PACK RX-VOLT M-RX V TMP Explanation Signal quality in %

Signal strength in %

Receive performance in dBm Transmit power in dBm shows the longest period in ms in which data packets were lost in transmission from transmitter to receiver Current receiver operating voltage in Volt Lowest receiver operating voltage in Volt since the last time it was switched on The thermometer indicates the receivers current operating temperature SIMPLE DATA VIEW SIMPLE DATA VIEW Select the desired menu line using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button TELEMETRY SETTING & DATA VIEW SIMPLE DATA VIEW RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER and then press the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button to bring up a list of further sub-

menus. SIMPLE DATA VIEW RECEIVER RX+GENERAL MODUL RX+ELECTRIC AIRMODUL RX+VARIO MODUL RX+GPS CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE RECEIVER RXS QUA: 100%

RXS ST : 100%

RXdBm: 33dBm TXdBm: 33dBm VPACK: 10ms RXVOLT:4.8 TMP CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE MRX V :4.6 +22C This screen displays the data which can also be viewed in the RX DATAVIEW screen of the telemetry menu SETTING & DATA VIEW, but in graphic form. The meanings are as follows:

128 Program description: Telemetry menu RX + GENERAL MODUL BAT1 E FUEL F 0.0V T1 +20C BAT2 0.0V T2 +20C CELL V 1:0.00 2:0.00 3:0.00 4:0.00 5:0.00 6:0.00 0 BAT1 0.0V E FUEL F T1 +20C BAT2 0.0V T2 +20C ALT

+500m 0m1 0m3 CURRE. 0.0A POWER 0.0V If a General Engine module, Order No. 33610, or a General Air module, Order No. 33611, is connected to the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display of the data supplied by it. For more information on these modules please see the Appendix, or refer to the prod-

uct on the Internet at www.graupner.de. Depending on the types of sensor tted to the modules, the display constantly shows the following data:

The actual voltage of up to two rechargeable batteries

(BAT1 and BAT2); the measured values from up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a fueltank level indicator. At the right-hand edge the screen shows either an al-

ternating list of the actual cell voltages of a LiPo battery with up to six cells, or the current altitude relative to the location, climb / descent in m/1sec and m/3sec, current in Ampere plus the actual voltage of the battery con-

nected to the sensor. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:128 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:128 06.06.2011 19:39:43 06.06.2011 19:39:43 The meanings are as follows:

Explanation Value Battery 1 / Battery 2 BAT1 / BAT2 FUEL Fuel level / Fueltank indicator Empty / full E / F Temperature of sensor 1 / sensor 2 T1 / T2 CELL V Cell voltage of cell 1 max. 6 Current altitude ALT m/1 sec climb / descent 0m1 m/3 sec climb / descent 0m3 CURRE. Actual current in Ampere Actual voltage of drive battery POWER RX + ELECTRIC AIRMODUL 0.0V 0A ALT +500m BAT1 0m/1s 0.0V 0m/3s T1 +20C BAT2 0.0V T2 +20C 0.0V 0A ALT +500m BAT1 0m/1s 0.0V 0m/3s T1 +20C BAT2 0.0V T2 +20C CELL V 1L0.00 2L0.00 3L0.00 4L0.00 5L0.00 6L0.00 7L0.00 CELL V 1H0.00 2H0.00 3H0.00 4H0.00 5H0.00 6H0.00 7H0.00 If an Electric-Air module, Order No. 33620, is connected to the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display of the data supplied by it. For more information on this module please see the Appendix, or refer to the product on the Internet at www.graupner.de. Depending on the types of sensor tted to the module, the display constantly shows the following data:

The actual voltage of up to two rechargeable batteries

(BAT1 and BAT2); the measured values from up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2); the current altitude relative to the location, and the climb / descent of the model in m/1sec and m/3sec; the centre of the screen also displays the current actually being drawn from a power source. At the right-hand edge the screen shows an alternating display of the actual cell voltages of the battery packs

(max. seven cells each) connected to balancer sockets 1 (L) or 2 (H). The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation Actual voltage V Actual current A BAT1 / BAT2 Battery 1 / Battery 2 Current altitude ALT m/1 sec climb / descent m/1s m/3s m/3 sec climb / descent Temperature from sensor 1 / 2 T1 / T2 Cell voltage of cell 1 max. 14 CELL.V L Balancer socket 1 Balancer socket 2 H RX + VARIO m/1s 0 m/3s 0 m/10s 0 H L RXSQ 0 ALT

+500 MAX

+500m MIN

+500m If a Vario module, Order No. 33601, is connected to the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display of the data supplied by it. For more information on this module please see the Appendix or refer to the product on the Internet at www.graupner.de. The meanings are as follows:

Explanation Value ALT Current altitude Signal strength of the signal picked up RXSQ by the receiver in %

The pre-set altitude limit relative to the launch point; above this altitude the transmitter emits audible warning signals The pre-set altitude limit below the launch point; below this altitude the transmitter emits audible warning signals m/1 sec climb / descent m/3 sec climb / descent m/10 sec climb / descent m/1s m/3s m/10s MAX MIN 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:129 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:129 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Program description: Telemetry menu 129 Signal quality in % for the signal arriving at the receiver Reception performance in dBm Number of lost receiver data packets Reception performance in dBm of the signal picked up by the receiver Actual receiver operating voltage in Volt Lowest receiver operating voltage in Volt since the last time it was switched on RX + GPS N W 0 Kmh E S RXSQ 0 DIS 0m ALT +500m 0m/1s 0m/3s 0m/10s N 000.0000 E 000.0000 If a GPS module with integral vario, Order No. 33600, is connected to the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display of the data supplied by it. For more information on this module please see the Appendix, or refer to the product on the Internet at www.graupner.de. The centre of the screen shows the current positional data and the models speed; the display also shows the models current altitude in relation to the launch point, its climb / descent rate at m/1 sec, m/3 sec and m/10 sec, the current reception quality and the models range from the launch point. The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation W / N / E / S West / North / East / South Kmh RXSQ DIS ALT m/1s m/3s m/10s Speed Signal strength of downlink channel Distance Current altitude relative to launch point m/1 sec climb / descent m/3 sec climb / descent m/10 sec climb / descent 130 Program description: Telemetry menu RF STATUS VIEW RF STATUS VIEW Select the desired menu line with the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button TELEMETRY SETTING & DATA VIEW SIMPLE DATA VIEW RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER and then press the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button to open the selected sub-menu:

S TD E RD VC VM R100%

S 95%

TD 22 E 10 RD 41 4.8VC 4.8VM 0123456789ABCDE Top row:

Bottom row:

receive performance in dBm of channels 1 ... 75 on the 2.4 GHz band. receive performance in dBm of the sig-

nal of channels 1 ... 75 on the 2.4 GHz band, as picked up by the receiver. This screen provides a graphic display of data showing the occupation of the 2.4 GHz band. As well as the graphic depiction of band occupation, additional numeric information is generated to the left of the graphs. The meanings are as follows:

Value R Explanation Signal quality in % for the signal arriving from the receiver 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:130 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:130 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 VOICE TRIGGER VOICE TRIGGER First select the desired menu line using the arrow but-

tons of the left or right-hand four-way button TELEMETRY SETTING & DATA VIEW SIMPLE DATA VIEW RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the selected sub-menu:

REPEAT VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER Speech output is available via the headphone socket, but not until you have at least assigned a switch in the REPEAT line. This is accomplished as described in the section entitled Assigning switches and control switches on page 39:

VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC push desired switch TRIG into position ON VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER 3 VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER 3 1 7 All the time the assigned switch is closed, the last speech output is repeated for the period set to the left of the switch. TRIG Using a switch assigned to this line - preferably the momentary switche SW 1 - you can cycle through the speech outputs selected under the TRANSFER, RECEIVER and SENSOR options, as described in the following section. VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER 3 1 VARIO If you assign a switch in this line, and activate the RX

+ VARIO sub-menu of the DISPLAY DATA menu as described on the next page under Sensor, you can use a switch assigned in this line to call up vario-speci c outputs (i. e. those triggered by height changes, such as slow climb / descent etc.) via the optional headphone socket, Order No. 33001.71 - completely independently of the other speech outputs. TRANSFER Select the desired menu line using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER 3 1 7 then brie y press the central SET button of the right-

hand four-way button to open the selected sub-menu:

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

STOPWATCH:

RUNTIME:

TIME:

) or de-select (

In this menu you can select (

chosen speech output after using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the desired line, followed by a brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

) the 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:131 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:131 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Program description: Telemetry menu 131 VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

STOPWATCH:

RUNTIME:

TIME:

TEMP:

STRENGTH:

VOLT:

LOWVOLT:

desired line. Note:

The voice output you select here is completely inde-

pendent of the VARIO outputs. RECEIVER Select the desired menu line with the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER 3 1 7 then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to call up the selected sub-menu:

TEMP:

STRENGTH:

VOLT:

LOWVOLT:

) or de-select (

In this menu you can select (

chosen speech output after using the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the desired line, followed by a brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button:

) the SENSOR This line only appears if you have already activated one of the RX sub-menus of the SIMPLE DATA VIEW menu, and then returned directly to the VOICE TRIG-

GER menu:

VOICE TRIGGER REPEAT 1SEC TRIG VARIO TRANSFER RECEIVER SENSOR 3 1 7 For example, if you selected the RX + VARIO option, then selected the SENSOR line and pressed the cen-

tral SET button of the right-hand four-way button, you will see the display shown below:

ALT :

MAXALT :

MINALT :

VOLT MINIMUM:

As described in the left-hand column, you can also select (

) any available speech output by brie y pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button after you have selected the

) or de-select (

132 Program description: Telemetry menu 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:132 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs45:132 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs52:133 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs52:133 For your notes 133 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Trainer Mode Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode operations using a Trainer lead Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through to the Trainer menu point of the multi-function menu:

servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi servo set. D/R expo free mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry info disp contr set. heli mixer swashp.mix basic sett telemetry info disp Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the menu:

TRAINER/Pupil P T 1 2 3 4 5 6 Teacher transmitter settings Up to six transmitter control functions of the Teacher transmitter T can be transferred individually or in any combination to the pupil transmitter P. The lower line of the display marked T therefore indicates those transmitter controls which are perma-

nently connected to the inputs Ch 1, AIL, ELE and RUD

(dual-axis stick functions, xed-wing model) or 1 4

(dual-axis stick functions, model helicopter). Notes:

This means that the rotary proportional knobs CTRL 7 and 8, and the three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, designated CTRL 9 and 10, explicitly CANNOT be transferred. Transmitter controls can only be assigned in the Transmitter control settings menu when the Train-

er connection is switched off.

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the transmitter controls 1 to 6

() to be transferred to the pupil, and brie y press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button in each case, so that they switch from T (Teacher) ( ) to P (Pupil) ( ):

SW:

BIND:

N/A TRAINER/Pupil The illustration above shows the initial state of this menu: transmitter controls have not been released ( ) to the pupil, and a switch has not been assigned (SW: ---

at bottom right and -P on the left of the display). 134 Program description: Trainer system P T 1 2 3 4 65 SW:

BIND:

N/A You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the right of the screen so that you can actually transfer con-

trol to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to place the marker next to SW at bottom right, and assign a switch as described on page 39. We recommend that you use the momentary switch SW 1 as the transfer switch, to ensure that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly at any time. TRAINER/Teach

P T SW:

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 BIND:

N/A Note:

The switch assignment procedure described above determines which transmitter provides the Teacher function, and which provides the Pupil function. For this reason a switch must NEVER be assigned to the Pupil transmitter in this menu. To underline this, the menu headline switches from TRAINER / pupil to TRAI-

NER / teacher as soon as a switch is assigned. The model to be controlled by the pupil must be pro-

grammed completely in a model memory of the mx-

12 HoTT Teacher transmitter, i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions. The HoTT re-

ceiver in the model must also be bound to the Teacher transmitter, since it is this transmitter which actually controls the model in Pupil mode, even in Trainer opera-

tions. The mx-12 HoTT Teacher transmitter MUST ALWAYS BE SWITCHED ON FIRST. ONLY THEN MAY THE CONNECTING LEAD BE PLUGGED INTO IT. If you neglect this, the RF module will not be activated. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:134 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:134 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 The mx-12 HoTT Teacher transmitter can be linked to any suitable Pupil transmitter - even those operating on the classic 35 / 40 MHz band. For example, an mx-

12 HoTT Teacher transmitter can certainly be used in conjunction with an mx-12s Pupil transmitter. However, if the connection at the pupil end is NOT made using a two-pole DSC socket, but instead - for example - using a three-pin Trainer socket from the Graupner range, the basic requirement for a correct connection with a Pupil transmitter is that PPM (18 or 24) modulation must ALWAYS be set on the Pupil transmitter, regardless of the modulation used by the Teacher transmitter. Pupil transmitter settings The model to be controlled by the pupil must be pro-

grammed completely in a model memory of the Teacher transmitter, i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions, and the HoTT receiver in the model must be bound to the Teacher transmitter. In principle, however, an mx-12 HoTT Pupil transmitter can also be linked to a Teacher transmitter operating on the classic 35 / 40 MHz band, since the PPM signal required from the Teacher transmitter is present at the transmitters DSC socket. The Pupil transmitter can be virtually any transmitter from the former and current Graupner range with at least four control functions. More information on this is available in the main FS catalogue, and on the Internet under www.graupner.de. Some transmitters will need to be retro- tted with the appropriate module in order to act as the Pupil transmit-

ter. This should be connected to the transmitter circuit board as described in the installation instructions supplied in the set. Information on the Pupil module required can be found in the main Graupner FS catalogue and on the Internet at www.graupner.de. The Pupil transmitter must be connected to the Teacher transmitter using the appropriate lead - see next double page. The control functions of the Pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control channels, i. e. the receiver outputs, without the intervention of any mixers. If you are using an mc or mx series transmitter, it is best to set up a free model memory in the Pupil transmitter with the required model type (Fixed-wing or Helicopter). Assign the model name Pupil to the memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 4) and Throttle min. forward / back to suit the pupils prefer-

ence. All the other settings should be left at the appropri-

ate default values. If you select the Helicopter model type, the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim must also be set accordingly on the Pupil transmitter. All other functions, including mixer and coupling functions, are carried out by the Teacher transmitter, which trans-

mits them to the receiver in the model. If you are using a D or FM type transmitter, you should check the servo directions and stick mode, and alter them by re-connecting the appropriate leads if re-

quired. All mixers should be switched off or set to zero. When assigning the control functions the usual conven-

tions should be observed:

Channel Function Throttle / Collective pitch Aileron / Roll 1 2 3 4 Elevator / Pitch-axis Rudder / Tail rotor If you wish to transfer other control functions to the Pupil transmitter, in addition to the functions of the two dual-axis sticks (1 4), then you will need to assign additional transmitter controls in the Pupil transmitters Transmitter control settings menu to those inputs which correspond to transmitter control numbers 5 and

/ or 6, as released in the Teacher transmitters Trainer menu. Important:

If you forget to assign a transmitter control, then the servo or servos concerned will remain in the centre position when control is transferred to the Pupil transmitter. The Pupil transmitter must always be operated in PPM mode, regardless of the type of RF link be-

tween the Teacher transmitter and the model. If the Pupil transmitter is connected using a DSC socket, then you should ALWAYS leave the Pu-

pil transmitters On / Off switch at the OFF posi-

tion, as this is the only way to ensure that the Pu-

pil transmitter module does not generate an RF signal even when the DSC lead is plugged in.

Trainer mode operations Connect the two transmitters using the appropriate lead; see the overview on the next page: connect the plug marked M (Master) to the socket on the Teacher transmitter, and the plug marked S (Student) (not present on all leads) to the appropriate socket on the Pupil transmitter. Program description: Trainer system 135 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:135 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:135 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Important note regarding three-pole barrel connec-

tors:

If you are using a Trainer lead with three-pole barrel connectors, on no account connect one of the ends marked S or M to a DSC system socket, as it is not suitable for this purpose. The DSC socket is only suitable for leads tted with two-pole barrel connec-

tors. Checking the system Operate the assigned Trainer transfer switch:

T to P, the If the screen display changes from Trainer system is working properly. However, if both the ters basic display show the following warning mes-

sage Trainer menu and the transmit-

no student signal and the display -P appears on the left of the screen in the Trainer menu, and at the same time the transmitter emits audible signals, then there is a problem with the connection between Pupil and Teacher transmitter. If this should happen, note that all the functions remain under the control of the Teacher transmitter, regardless of the position of the Trainer transfer switch; this ensures that the model is not out of control at any time. Possible errors:

Pupil transmitter not ready The interface in the Pupil transmitter, which replaces the RF module, is not connected correctly Incorrect cable connection: see next section for cable 136 Program description: Trainer system selection Pupil transmitter not set to PPM (10, 18, 24) mode. Further possible errors:

Teacher transmitter and HoTT receiver in trainer model not correctly bound. Trainer leads 4179.1 3290.7 3290.8 For Trainer mode operations between any two Graupner transmitters equipped with a DSC socket - identi able by two-pole barrel connectors at both ends. Trainer lead for connecting a Teacher trans-

mitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12 HoTT), or a transmitter retro- tted with the option-

al DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a Graupner Pupil transmitter with opto-elec-

tronic Pupil socket - identi able by the letter S at the end with the three-pole barrel con-

nector. Trainer lead for connecting a Pupil transmit-

ter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12 HoTT) or a transmitter retro- tted with the option-

al DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a Graupner Teacher transmitter with opto-elec-

tronic Teacher socket - identi able by the let-

ter M at the end with the three-pole barrel connector. For more detailed information about the leads and mod-

ules for the Teacher and Pupil transmitters listed on this page, please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your transmitter, the main Graupner FS catalogue, or the Internet at www.graupner.de. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:136 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:136 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Trainer mode operations with the mx-12 HoTT transmitter Due to the constant expansion of our range of products please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de for the latest information. mx-12 HoTT Pupil transmitter mitter mx-12 HoTT Teacher transmitter ter Trainer lead, Order No. 4179.1 Trainer lead, Order No. 3290.8 M Trainer lead, Order No. 4179.1 Trainer lead, Order No. 3290.7 S Teacher transmitter with DSC socket mx-12(s)HoTT, mx-16s/iFS/

HoTT, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and, if tted with DSC socket, Order No. 3290.24, mc-19(s + iFS), mc-22(s

+ iFS) and mc-24 Teacher transmitter with Teacher module Order No. 3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22 mc-19 to mc-24, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s Pupil transmitter with DSC socket mx-12(s)HoTT, mx-16s/iFS/

HoTT, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and, if tted with DSC socket, Order No. 3290.24, mc-19(s + iFS), mc-22(s + iFS) and mc-24 Pupil transmitter with Pupil module Order No. 3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33 D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10 mc-24, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s Note:

These lists represent the transmitters and transmitter combi-

nations which are possible at time of going to press. Program description: Trainer system 137 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:137 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:137 06.06.2011 19:39:44 06.06.2011 19:39:44 Wireless HoTT system Two HoTT transmitters can also be combined by wire-

less means to form a Trainer system as an alternative to the classic system using a Trainer lead, as described on the preceding pages. Preparations The trainer model must be programmed completely, i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions, both in a model memory of the mx-12 HoTT Pupil transmitter and also in the mx-12 HoTT Teacher transmitter. This means that it must be possible to control the trainer model fully, without restriction, by both transmitters, i. e. by the Teacher and the Pupil transmitters. It is very important to avoid any major set-up differences, otherwise there is a risk that the servos will jump abruptly from one position to another when control is transferred between the Teacher and Pupil transmitters, which can place a severe strain on the servos. Nevertheless, it may be sensible to program smaller control surface travels on the Pupil model at least, as this makes it easier to learn the basic skills of model ying. Once both transmitters are prepared for training opera-

tions as described above, the trainer model should be bound to the Pupil transmitter. A detailed description of the binding procedure can be found on pages 61 and 70. Binding the Teacher and Pupil transmitters Switch both transmitters on, and use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through on both transmitters to the Trainer menu point of the multi-function menu. (The trainer models receiving sys-

tem, previously bound to the Pupil transmitter, does not need to be switched on during the following procedure.) 138 Program description: Trainer system servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi servo set. D/R expo free mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry info disp contr set. heli mixer swashp.mix basic sett telemetry info disp Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the following menu point:

TRAINER/Pupil P T 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW:

BIND:

N/A The illustration above shows the initial state of this menu: no transmitter controls have been released to the Pupil ( ), and no switches have been assigned (SW: ---

bottom right and -S on left of illustration). Pupil transmitter Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move the marker / cursor to the input eld marked Bind. If a switch is displayed adjacent to SW on the right, then it is essential to erase this: see the following illustration:

TRAINER/Pupil P T 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW:

BIND: N/A Teacher transmitter Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to release the control channels to be transferred to the Pupil. When you do this, the corresponding sym-

bol changes from to . For example:

TRAINER/Pupil P T 1 2 3 4 65 SW:

BIND:

N/A Important Note:

In contrast to the wired Trainer system described in the previous section, in which TRANSMITTER CONTROL SIGNALS are released to the Pupil exclusively, it is CONTROL CHANNELS which are transferred when using the wireless HoTT system which is described in this section. For example, if the aileron function (2) is to be trans-

ferred, and if the model is equipped with two aileron servos which are usually connected to receiver sockets 2 and 5, then in the wireless system control channels 2 and 5 must also be transferred, and not just - as with the wired system - number 2; see illustration above. The same applies to ap servos connected to 6 and 1 (2AIL 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:138 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:138 06.06.2011 19:39:45 06.06.2011 19:39:45 2FL setting in the Basic settings menu), or two eleva-

tor servos connected to 3 and 6 (2Sv EL setting in the Basic settings menu). You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the right of the screen so that you can actually transfer con-

trol to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to place the marker next to SW at bottom right, and assign a switch as described on page 39. We recommend that you use the momentary switch SW 1 as the transfer switch, to ensure that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly at any time. TRAINER/Teach

P T SW:

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 BIND:

Note:

The switch assignment procedure described above determines which transmitter provides the Teacher function, and which provides the Pupil function. For this reason a switch must NEVER be assigned to the Pupil transmitter in this menu. To underline this, the menu headline switches from TRAINER / pupil to TRAI-

NER / teacher as soon as a switch is assigned. Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to move the marker to BIND: N/A on the right:

TRAINER/Teach P

T SW:

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 BIND:

N/A

P T and immediately afterwards that of the Teacher transmitter:

TRAINER/Teach N/A TRAINER/Teach

P T SW:

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 BIND:

N/A P T Binding the Pupil transmitter to the Teacher trans-

mitter Note:

During the binding procedure the distance between the two transmitters should not be too great. You may need to change the relative position of the two transmitters and initiate the binding process a second time. If necessary, close the Trainer transfer switch which you have just assigned and start the BINDING process rst at the Pupil transmitter by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button TRAINER/Pupil P T 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW:

BIND:

BINDING 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW: 1 BIND:

BINDING As soon as this process is concluded, both screens dis-

play ON instead of the ashing message BINDING:

TRAINER/Teach

P T 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW: 1 BIND: ON TRAINER/Pupil 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW:

BIND: ON This concludes the binding process, and you can return to the basic display of both transmitters, and start trainer mode operations - once you have checked the operation of all the functions. However, if neither transmitter, or only one of the trans-

mitters, displays ON, indicating that the binding proce-

dure has failed, try changing the relative position of the two transmitters, and repeat the whole procedure. During Program description: Trainer system 139 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:139 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:139 06.06.2011 19:39:45 06.06.2011 19:39:45 TRAINER Wireless Link ACT INH Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to con rm ACT(ivate), or alternatively wait for about two seconds until the message disappears; the last link you created with a Teacher or Pupil transmitter is now restored. However, if you select INH(ibit) using one of the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button TRAINER Wireless Link ACT INH and con rm your choice by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, this resets that transmitter to normal operation. In this case you will have to repeat the binding process with a Teacher or Pupil transmitter as and when required. Trainer mode operations it is no problem for the Teacher and Pupil to stand a little way apart. However, you should never exceed a distance of 50 m (this is known as the call range), and no other persons should stand between the Teacher and Pupil, as this could reduce the effective range. Please note also that the wireless Trainer function exploits the downlink connection, and for this reason no telemetry data are transmitted from the model in this mode. In this mode of operation the basic display of the Teach-

er transmitter looks like this GRAUBELE

#01 RFCTeach 51%

5.2V 2:22h 0:00 stop flt 0:00 normal HoTT 5.5V K78 P and that of the Pupil transmitter typically like this:

GRAUBELE

#09 RFC-Pupil 4.9V 1:11h 33%

0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 If it should occur that the link between the Teacher and Pupil transmitters is lost during Trainer mode operations, note that the Teacher transmitter automatically assumes control of the model. In this situation, if the Trainer change-over switch is in the Pupil position, then the central LED on the Teacher transmitter starts to ash blue / red for the duration of the signal loss, and the transmitter emits audible warn-

140 Program description: Trainer system ing signals. At the same time RFC- ashes in the basic display, and the following warning is displayed:

no student signal However, if only RFC- ashes in the basic transmitter display, and - relatively quiet - audible signals are heard GRAUBELE

#01 RFCTeach 51%

5.2V 2:22h 0:00 stop 0:00 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 P then this indicates that the Pupil signal has also been lost, but the Trainer transfer switch is in the Teacher position. In either situation your rst recourse should be to reduce the distance between the two transmitters. If this does not help, land the model immediately, and seek the cause. However, if both transmitters are operating with the re-

ceiving system switched off, then the familiar symbol appears in the basic display of the Teacher transmitter instead of the two Resuming Trainer mode operations If - for whatever reason - one or both transmitters are switched off during a Trainer mode session, then the screen displays the following query when the transmitter or transmitters are switched on again:

symbols. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:140 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs41:140 06.06.2011 19:39:45 06.06.2011 19:39:45 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs53:141 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs53:141 For your notes 141 06.06.2011 19:39:45 06.06.2011 19:39:45 Info Display Date, time, transmitter ID and memory card Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to leaf through to the info disp menu point of the multi-function menu:

button, and conclude your input with a further press of the central SET key. RFID SD card servo set. D/R expo wing mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi servo set. D/R expo free mixer servo disp fail-safe teach/pupi contr set. phase trim free mixer basic sett telemetry info disp contr set. heli mixer swashp.mix basic sett telemetry info disp Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to open the menu point:

RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 0MB 0MB 0%

This menu displays transmitter-speci c information, some of which can be altered where necessary and sensible. Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the appropriate line, then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. In the highlighted value eld you can now alter the default value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way 142 Program description: Info display RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 0MB 0MB 0%

This line displays the transmitters identi cation number. This number is speci c to the transmitter, and is only issued once for each transmitter. During the binding process this ID is transmitted to the receiver (amongst other data), so that it is able at any time to identify the radio signals of its transmitter. Firmware version RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 0MB 0MB 0%

This line displays the version number of the transmitter software currently installed. By comparing the number shown here with the update version available for the same product on the Internet at www.graupner.de you can judge whether an update to the transmitters operating system is necessary and useful. In some circumstances our Service department may also ask you for the version number. RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 2048MB 1234MB 60%

This line displays the storage capacity in MB of a memory card installed in the transmitter. Depending on the memory capacity of the micro-SD or micro-SDHC memory card tted in the transmitter, it may take several minutes for the display to show the correct value after you switch the transmitter on. available RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 2048MB 1234MB 60%

Display of the available memory in MB. As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of time for the available memory to be displayed after you switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capac-

ity of the installed memory card. The next line down displays the available memory in relation to the total memory capacity:

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs43:142 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs43:142 06.06.2011 19:39:45 06.06.2011 19:39:45 RFID firmware ver. SD-CARD available ABCDEF12 1.11 2048MB 1234MB 60%

As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of time for the available memory to be displayed after you switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capac-

ity of the installed memory card. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs43:143 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs43:143 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Program description: Info display 143 mx-12 HoTT programming techniques Preparation, using a xed-wing model aircraft as an example Programming model data into an mx-12 HoTT is easier than it might appear at rst sight. There is one basic rule which applies equally to all pro-

grammable radio control transmitters, and not just to the mx-12 HoTT: if the programming is to go smoothly and the systems work as expected, the receiving sys-

tem components must rst be installed correctly in the model, i. e. the mechanical systems must be rst-rate. This means: ensure that each servo is at its correct neutral position when you t the output lever or disc and connect the linkage to it. If you nd this is not the case, correct it! Remove the output arm, rotate it by one or more splines and secure it again. If you use a servo tester, e. g. the RC-Tester, Order No. 2894.12, to centre the servos, you will nd it very easy to nd the correct position. Virtually all modern transmitters offer facilities for offset-

ting the neutral position of servos, but this is no substi-

tute for a correct mechanical installation; this function is only intended for ne tuning. Any substantial deviation from the 0 position may result in additional asymmetry when the signal undergoes further processing in the transmitter. Think of it this way: if the chassis of a car is distorted, you may be able to force the vehicle to run straight by holding the steering wheel away from centre, but it does not make the chassis any less bent, and the basic problem remains. Another important point is to set up the correct control travels wherever possible by using the appropriate link-

age points in the mechanical system; this is much more ef cient than making major changes to the travel set-

tings at the transmitter. The same rule applies: electronic travel adjustment facilities are designed primarily to compensate for minor manufacturing tolerances in the 144 Programming example - xed-wing model servos and for ne adjustment, and not to compensate for poor-quality construction and defective installation methods. If two separate aileron servos are installed in a xed-

wing model aircraft, the ailerons can also be employed as aps by de ecting both of them down, and as air-

brakes by de ecting both of them up - simply by setting up a suitable mixer (see the section starting on the next double page). Such systems are generally more often used in gliders and electric gliders than in power models. braking effect of the crow system is provided primarily by the down-movement of the aps rather than the up-movement of the ailerons, so in this case the servo output arms should be angled aft, i. e. offset towards the trailing edge of the wing, as this makes greater travel available for the down-movement. When this combina-

tion of lowered aps and raised ailerons is used, the ailerons should only be raised by a moderate extent, as their primary purpose in this con guration is to stabilise and control the model rather than act as brakes. You can see the difference in terms of braking effect by deploying the crow system, then looking over and under the wing from the front: the larger the projected area of the de ected control surfaces, the greater the braking effect. Outboard ailerons In such cases the servo output arms should be offset forward by one spline relative to the neutral point, i. e. towards the leading edge of the wing, and tted on the servo output shaft in that position. The mechanical differential achieved by this asym-

metrical installation takes into account the fact that the braking effect of the up-going ailerons increases with their angle of de ection, and this means that much less travel is usually required in the down-direction than the up-direction. Similar reasoning applies to the installation of the ap linkage when separately actuated ap servos are in-

stalled, designed to be used in a butter y (crow) system. Here again an asymmetrical linkage point is useful. The Inboard camber-changing flaps

(This type of asymmetrical installation of the servo output arms can also make sense when you are setting up split aps or landing aps on a power model.) Once you have completed your model and set up the mechanical systems accurately in this way, you are ready to start programming the transmitter. The instruc-

tions in this section are intended to re ect standard practice by describing the basic general settings rst, and then re ning and specialising them to complete the set-up. After the initial test- ight, and in the course of continued test- ying, you may need to adjust one or oth-

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:144 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:144 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 er of the models settings. As your piloting skills improve and you gain experience, it is very likely that you will feel the need to try out re nements such as expanded control systems, and to cater for these requirements you may nd that the text deviates from the obvious order of options, or that one or other of the options is mentioned more than once. On the other hand, it can certainly occur that not every step described in these instructions is relevant to a particular model, just as some users might miss the description of a particular step which is relevant to his model only Regardless of all this, it is worthwhile thinking carefully about a sensible layout of the transmitter controls at this point, just before you start programming the model data. If the model in question is one with the emphasis on power - whether the power of an electric motor or internal-combustion engine (glow motor) - you will prob-

ably encounter few problems in this matter, because the two stick units are primarily employed to control the four basic functions power control (= throttle), rudder, elevator and aileron. Nevertheless, you still have to call up the Basic settings menu

(pages 56 62) mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap GRAUBELE 1 no normal 1aile and de ne your preferred throttle direction, i. e. throttle minimum forward (Idle forward) or back (Idle back), because the programs default setting is none

(i. e. no motor) when you rst set up a model memory. The basic difference between none or none/inv and throttle min. forward / back is the effect of the Ch 1 trim. The trim is effective over the full stick travel if none (/

inv) is entered, but it only affects the idle range if you enter throttle min. forward or back. However, it also affects the direction of effect of the Ch 1 stick, i. e. if you switch from forward to back or vice versa, you do not also have to reverse the direction of the throttle

(or brake) servo. For safety reasons you will also see a warning message, and hear an audible warning, if you switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick positioned towards full-throttle - but only if you have already set throttle min. forward or back. GRAUBELE

#01 throttle stop Flug too 50%

5.2V 0:33h high !

K78 M 0:00 0:00 HoTT 0.0V Your choice of none (no motor) or throttle min. forward or back also affects the range of mixers available in the Wing mixers menu. The mixers Brake NN * are only present if you choose none (no motor) or none/

inv; otherwise they are suppressed. The same applies to the selection facilities in the Aileron / ap line of the Basic settings menu: 2AL 2FL, and the associated mixers in the Wing mixer menu, are only available if you select none (no motor) or none/inv, otherwise they are also suppressed. (In this case the second ap servo should be connected to receiver output 1 instead

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) of the throttle servo. In addition to these basic matters you will certainly need to consider carefully how best to control any auxiliary functions present on your model. In contrast, if your model is a glider or electric glider the whole situation may be rather different. The immediate question is: what is the best way of operating the motor and braking system? Now, some solutions have proved to be practical, and others less so. For example, it is not a good idea to be forced to let go of one of the primary sticks in order to extend the airbrakes or deploy the crow braking system when your glider is on the landing approach. It surely makes more sense to set up switchable functions for the Ch 1 stick

(see example 4 on page 152), or to assign the braking system to the throttle stick, and shift the motor control to a slider - or even a switch. With this type of model the electric motor is often little more than a self-launching system, and is used either to haul the model into the sky at full power, or to pull it from one area of lift to the next at, say half-power, and for such models a three-

position switch is usually quite adequate. If the switch is positioned where you can easily reach it, then you can turn the motor on and off without having to let go of the sticks - even on the landing approach. Incidentally, similar thinking can be applied to ap control systems, regardless of whether they are just the ailerons, or full-span (combination) control surfaces which are raised and lowered in parallel. Once you are satis ed that all these preparations have been completed successfully, programming can com-

mence. Programming example - xed-wing model 145 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:145 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:145 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 First steps in programming a new model Example: non-powered xed-wing model aircraft When programming a new model you should start by activating the select model sub-menu

(page 52) in the Model memory menu. Use the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand four-way button to select a free model memory R06 01 02 03 04 05 06

free

free

free

free

free then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button. You are now immediately requested to select the type of model you wish to program. Sel model type

( empty mod mem ) Since in this example we are setting up a xed-wing model, we simply con rm the xed-wing model symbol by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button; the screen now reverts to the basic display. Notes:

Naturally you can also use the pre-de ned model memory 01 for programming your rst model; this is the xed-wing model type by default. Once you have called up the Model select option it

146 Programming example - xed-wing model is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must choose one or other model type. Even if you switch off the transmitter at this point, you cannot avoid this select procedure. However, if you make a mistake you can always correct it simply by erasing the mod-

el memory. If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able to change model memories for safety reasons. The screen then displays an appropriate message:

to this line:

In this line you trigger the bind process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on pages 61. Without this step you cannot address the receiver. The next step is to press the arrow button of the left-

hand or right-hand four-way four-way button to move up into the rst line, where you can start the actual model programming in the mod name line:

not possible now voltage too low Once you have overcome this initial hurdle, you may need to bind the receiver installed in the model to this model memory in the Basic settings menu This is accomplished by moving to the rx bind line:

(pages 56 62) timer phase 2 phase 3 receiv out rx bind 0:00 takeoff speed mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap 1 no normal 1aile At this point you can enter the Model name by press-

ing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button in order to move to the character table:

0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ

Note:

When you con rm the model selection the following message appears in the basic display for a few seconds:

BIND N/A OK If you con rm your choice by pressing the SET button of the right-hand four-way button, you automatically taken model name GRAUB You should also check the settings for Stick mode and Motor at Ch 1 and change them if necessary:

none:

The brake system is retracted at the forward posi-

tion of the throttle / brake stick; in the Wing mixers menu the Brake NN* mixers are activated. In the Aileron/ ap line of the base sett. menu it is possible to select 1AL, 2AL and 2AL 2FL, and in 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:146 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:146 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 the Wing mixers menu the mixers Brake NN*

and all mixers from and to aps are activated. The warning message Throttle too high - see page 28 - and the Motor stop option in the base sett. menu is disabled. none/inv:

The brake system is retracted at the back posi-

tion of the throttle / brake stick; in the Wing mixers menu the Brake NN* mixers are activated. In the Aileron/ ap line of the base sett. menu it is possible to select 1AL, 2AL and 2AL 2FL, and in the Wing mixers menu the mixers Brake NN*

and all mixers from and to aps are activated. The warning message Throttle too high - see page 28 - and the Motor stop option in the base sett. menu is disabled. Throttle min. forward or rear:

Ch 1 trim works forward or back. If the throttle stick is too far in the direction of full-throttle when you switch the transmitter on, you will be warned of this with the message Throttle too high and the Motor stop option in the base sett. menu is activated. In the Aileron/ ap line of the base sett. menu it is only possible to select 1AL or 2AL, and in the Wing mixers menu the mixers Brake NN* and all mixers from and to aps are disabled. Note:

As mentioned previously, selecting motor or no motor affects not only the range of mixers available in the Wing mixer menu, but also the maximum number of wing servos which can be addressed. For this reason we shall initially consider none (no motor) in the following

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) programming example. In the next two lines you select the basic arrangement of the servos in the model, and inform the transmitter of your choice:

mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap 1 no normal 2aile tail type:

aile/ ap:

normal, V-tail, delt/FlW or 2elev sv 1 or 2 aileron servos and 0 or 2 ap servos Note:

If your model is tted with only one camber-changing ap servo, you should still select 2FL. Later, in the Fixed-wing mixers menu (see page 88), you should select the AIL FL mixer and set it to 0%. You can still exploit all the other mixers available at that point in the usual way. At this juncture - if not before - you should check that the servos are connected to the receiver in the standard Graupner sequence:

Free or flap servo or left flap servo Receiver power supply Right aileron servo Rudder servo or V-tail Elevator servo or V-tail Aileron servo or left aileron servo Receiver power supply Airbrakes or throttle / speed controller (electric), alternatively right flap servo Notes:

If you set up a V-tail, but the up / down and / or left

/ right functions work the wrong way round, please refer to the table in the right-hand column on page 44 for the remedy. The same procedure can be used if you set up aperons (superimposed ailerons and aps), and they work the wrong way round. If you select 2AL, the second aileron servo should be connected to output 5; in this case a telemetry sensor cannot be connected. If you select 2AL 2FL, the second ap servo should be connected to output 1; in this case a throttle or air-

brake servo cannot be connected. The following settings apply to a model with a nor-

mal tail and no motor (none); if your model has a V-

tail, the settings can be adopted virtually unchanged. However, if the model is a delta or ying wing, the sit-

uation is not quite so straightforward. A special pro-

gramming example covering this model type will be found in the section starting on page 158. In the Programming example - xed-wing model 147 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:147 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:147 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Servo settings menu

(page 72) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

... you can set various parameters relating to the ser-

vos, i. e. direction of rotation, neutral setting and servo travel, to suit the requirements of the model. By requirements we mean adjustments to servo centre and servo travel which are needed to compensate for minor tolerances in servos and slight inaccuracies on the model itself. Note:

The facilities provided in this menu for setting asym-

metrical servo travels are NOT intended as a means of setting up differential travel on ailerons and / or camber-

changing aps. There are more suitable options for this in the form of speci c functions in the Fixed-wing mixers menu; see the rst two options in the picture on the right. Once you have completed the settings described thus far, a xed-wing or powered model aircraft (the latter if you enter the idle direction of the throttle stick in the Motor at Ch 1 line of the Basic settings menu) will, in principle, y. However, there are no re nements in this set-up, and it is the re nements which will give you more long-term pleasure in your ying. Assuming that you are already capable of controlling your model safely, its time to get a taste of these extra facilities; to this end we now move 148 Programming example - xed-wing model on to the Fixed-wing mixers menu

(pages 88 93) d i f f a i l e . d i f f f l a p s rudd ail ail flaps brak elev brak flap aile brak elev flap aile elev elev flap aile flap d i f f r e d 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Note:

This menu will show a varying range of options depend-

ing on the information you have entered in the Basic settings menu. In the illustration above, the full range is shown, as generated by the entries 2AIL 2FL in the Ail/Flap line, and none (/inv) in the Motor at Ch 1 line. Of particular interest at the moment are AIL-Diff.

(aileron differential) and the AIL RUD (aileron rudder) mixer, sometimes known as a combi-switch, and perhaps the mixers Brake AIL and Brake FLAP. As already described in detail on pages 89 and 90, the purpose of AIL-Diff. (aileron differential) is to eliminate adverse yaw. When a model aircraft turns, the down-going aileron produces more drag than the up-going one if both move through the same angle, and this causes the model to yaw in the opposite direction to the turn. This can be eliminated by setting differential aileron travel. A value between 20% and 40% is usually a good starting point, but the perfect setting nearly always has to be estab-

lished by practical testing. The same applies to the FL-Diff. ( ap differential) option if your model also features two camber-changing ap servos, assuming that the aps are also to be used as ailerons, e. g. using the AIL FL mixer. The AIL RUD (aileron rudder) mixer serves a similar purpose, but also makes many models generally easier to handle when turning. A value of around 50%

is usually a practical starting point. However, it is advis-

able to be able to switch this function off, particularly if you have ambitions as an aerobatic pilot; this is done by assigning a physical switch to the mixer (for example, the writer switches this mixer off automatically when he switches into the Speed ight phase, simply by assign-

ing the same switch to both options). It is usually only necessary to set up a Brake ELE

(brake elevator) mixer if your model suffers an excessive change of speed when you deploy the brak-

ing system. The danger is that you might need to retract the brakes again on the landing approach when you realise the model will land short; if its airspeed is too low when you retract the brakes, the model will just fall to the ground at that point. If you set up such a mixer it is important to test the setting at a safe height, and adjust the trim compensation if necessary. If you have selected 2AIL or 2AIL 2FL in the Aileron /

Flap line of the Basic settings menu 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:148 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:148 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap 1 no normal 2aile and if you wish to be able to de ect both ailerons up using the throttle / brake stick (Ch 1), then a suitable value should be entered in the Brake AIL line. d i f f a i l e . ail brak brak elev rudd elev aile aile 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

In principle the same applies to the Brake FL line, which also becomes available if you have selected 2AIL 2FL, although the set value should cause the aps to de ect as far as possible in the downward direction when the brake stick is operated. It is important to en-

sure that the servos do not strike their mechanical end-

stops. To achieve this, you may need to limit the servo travel(s) for the servos concerned using the TRAVEL-

or TRAVEL+ line on the RX SERVO display page of the Telemetry menu. If the ailerons are set up to act as simple brakes, as de-

scribed previously, or as part of the braking arrangement in a butter y (crow) system, then you should always enter a value for Diff.-Red. (differential reduction -

see page 93) - selecting 100% is the safe option here!

Differential reduction means that aileron differential is suppressed proportionally only when you operate the airbrake stick. The purpose of this is to increase the down-going aileron travel on the landing approach, with the aim of improving aileron response. If the wing is equipped with two camber-changing ap servos in addition to two separately actuated ailerons, then the AIL FL (aileron ap) mixer transfers the aileron movements to the aps; we suggest that the aps should not follow the movement of the ailerons to a greater extent than about 50%. Note:

If you have only installed one ap servo, you should leave this mixer at 0%. The FL AIL ( ap aileron) mixer works in the opposite direction; depending on the layout of the model we suggest values between about 50% and 100% for this option. The aps are controlled using the transmitter control or switch assigned to the input E6. Preferably, however, one of the rotary proportional controls (CTRL 7 or 8) should be used for this. Note:

We strongly recommend that you reduce the travel of the aps to about 25% in the Transmitter control settings menu, as this gives ner control of the ap positions using the selected transmitter control. The remaining options in the Fixed-wing mixers menu are designed to provide further ne-tuning of multi- ap wing systems, and are largely self-explanatory. When you have completed the model-speci c settings up to this point, you are probably ready to consider the models rst ight. At this juncture you should certainly take the time to carry out a series of dry runs, i. e. check all the settings thoroughly while the model is still on the ground. Remember that a serious programming error may damage more than just the model. If you are not sure of any point, please ask an experienced model pilot for advice. If during the test phase you realise that one or other of the settings needs to be changed in order to tailor the models control response to your preferences - perhaps the servo travels are too great or too small overall - then we suggest that you turn to the D/R / Expo menu

(page 82) aile elev rudd 122%

111%

100%

+11%

+22%

0%

3 3 normal DUAL EXPO in order to adjust the overall set-up to suit your requirements and ying style. The Dual Rate function is used to adjust the relationship between stick travel and control surface travel (see page 82). However, if it is only the models control response around neutral which is too powerful for comfortable ying, i. e. the maximum travels are acceptable, then Exponential can be employed, either instead of Dual Rates or in addition to them. If a physical switch is as-

signed to this function, you can switch between two Dual Rate / Expo settings while the model is ying. Programming example - xed-wing model 149 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:149 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:149 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Including an electric power system when programming a model and ap servos in your model. Connect your speed controller to the next vacant input, and assign one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 or 8 - in our example CTRL 7 - to the selected input -

for example, I6. This is accomplished in the Transmitter control settings menu Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button to select the desired line. Pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button activates Switch / transmitter control assignment. Now turn the knob of the rotary proportional control: after a brief delay the entry ctrl 7 will appear in the highlighted eld:

(page 74) I5 I6 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the speed controller you are using; alternatively you could use the -Travel+ column in the Servo settings menu

(page 72). S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from the basic display to Servo display, typically by simultane-

ously pressing the buttons of the left-hand four-

way button: In the OFF position of the rotary control CTRL 7 the control channel you have selected - in this example channel 6 - should be at -100%, and at the full-throttle setting at +100%. Example 2 Using a two-position switch, SW 3 This variant implements a pure ON / OFF function, and results in the motor starting abruptly unless the speed controller you are using features what is known as a soft start function. At the receiving end you need either a simple electronic switch or - if you want a smoother motor start - a suit-

able speed controller. The settings for this arrangement are entered in the Transmitter control settings menu First check which receiver socket (5 or 6) is available for connection to your speed controller. If you have assigned two aileron servos in the Basic settings menu, and if you have not connected any other auxiliary function, then this would be channel 6; this is the option we will use in our example. First set the selected switch to the OFF position, then use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand four-

way button to select the desired line in the menu. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate Switch / transmitter control assignment, then move the selected switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The highlighted eld now shows the switch number together with a symbol which indicates the direction of switching:

(page 74) An electric power system can be controlled in various ways:

The simplest method of including such a power plant in a model program is to use the throttle / brake stick

(Ch 1). However, in the preceding programming instruc-

tions we have already reserved the Ch 1 transmitter control for the airbrakes, which means that we have to explore other possibilities for controlling the motor: one is to use the switchable solution described in the section starting on page 152, and another is to use an alterna-

tive transmitter control. A suitable option is one of the two three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, and another is one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 or 8. However, another alternative would be the two-position switch SW 3. The deciding factor in your choice ought to be that the switch is within easy reach of your ngers. Example 1 Using one of the rotary proportional knobs CTRL 7 or 8 If one of these transmitter controls is used, the set-up is extremely easy. All you have to do is connect the speed controller to a vacant receiver servo socket 5 or 6. However, please bear in mind that outputs 2 + 5 and 6

+ 1 may already be linked together, depending on the model type you have selected and the number of aileron 150 Programming example - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:150 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:150 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 use the Servo travel column in the Servo settings menu

(page 72). S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from the basic display to Servo display by simultaneously pressing the buttons of the left-hand four-way button: in the (upper) OFF position of the three-position switch the control channel you have selected - in our example this is channel 6 - should be at -100%. If you now move the switch toggle to the centre position, the bar should be in the middle, and at the (lower) full-

throttle setting it should be at +100%. I5 I6 free 3

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the speed controller you are using; alternatively you could use the Servo travel column in the Servo settings menu

(page 72). S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from the basic display to Servo display by simultaneously pressing the buttons of the left-hand four-way button: in the switchs OFF position, the control chan-

nel you have selected - in our example this is channel 6 - should be at -100%, and at the full-throttle setting at +100%. Example 3 Using one of the three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7 This variant implements a three-stage solution for switching an electric motor on and off, and also results in an abrupt motor start-up unless the speed con-

troller you are using features what is known as a soft start function. At the receiving end you need a suitable speed controller. First check which receiver socket (5 or 6) is available to connect your speed controller. If you have assigned two aileron servos in the Basic settings menu, and if you have not connected any other auxiliary function, then this would be channel 6; this is the option we will use in our example. Move to the Transmitter control settings menu and use the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand four-way button to select the desired line. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate Switch / transmitter control assignment. Move the selected three-position switch; the highlighted eld now shows the number of this transmitter control, for example Transmitter control 9.

(page 74) I5 I6 free ctrl 9

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the speed controller you are using; alternatively you could 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:151 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:151 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Programming example - xed-wing model 151 Controlling the electric motor and up-aileron braking system using the Ch 1 stick Up-aileron de ection as landing aid Example 4 Butter y / crow system as landing aid: ailerons up, aps down Before we start the programming of this fourth example, and turn our attention to expanding the basic program-

ming we have already discussed, we need to consider brie y the position of the throttle / brake stick at motor OFF or brake OFF. Usually the Ch 1 stick is moved forward to open the throttle, and back to extend the brakes. However, if you adopt this classic con gura-

tion, and switch, say, from motor OFF (stick back) to the braking system, full brake would immediately be applied, and vice versa: if you switch from brakes retracted to power, this would instantly switch to full power. It is certainly possible to make a virtue out of this vice: a glider pilot - usually ying with brakes re-

tracted = forward will only switch to motor ON when necessary, and then reduce power to suit the situation

(and - we hope - does not forget to move the Ch 1 stick back to the forward position when switching back). In contrast, a typical power pilot would probably operate with the reverse priority, i. e. he would only switch to brake when necessary, etc. In any case, it is possible to avoid these inter-connected effects by positioning the zero point of both systems so that they coincide. The above considerations mean that a glider pilot will prob-

ably prefer the zero point forward arrangement, while a power pilot might well decide on zero point back. The mx-12 HoTT transmitter can cope with whichever arrangement you prefer. However, the following section assumes that both OFF positions will be set to for-

ward. If you prefer the alternative arrangement, there is no problem: the only difference compared with the ver-

152 Programming example - xed-wing model sion described here is that you would select none/inv in the Motor at Ch 1 line of the Basic settings menu instead of none. All the other settings can be adopted as described. In the Transmitter control settings menu

(page 74) mod name stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap GRAUBELE 1 no normal 2aile leave the motor at Ch 1 line at none if you have set Motor ON = forward, or switch to none/inv if preferred. This is essential, otherwise the Brake 1 NN * mixers which we need will be suppressed in the Fixed-wing mixers menu. Important Note:

As it is essential to set the motor to none, this also automatically disables the Throttle too high power-

on warning! For this reason please take great care to set the Ch 1 stick to the correct position before you switch the receiving system on. The next step is to ensure that the speed controller con-

nected to receiver output 1 is switched off at the right end. To accomplish this you may have to move to the

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) Servo settings menu

(page 72) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

and reverse the direction of servo 1. For safetys sake you should check this setting now, before you continue with the programming procedure. Take the transmitter and model to a location where it is safe to run the motor. Switch the transmitter on, and move the Ch 1 stick to the motor OFF position, i. e. ei-

ther fully forward or back. Hold your model rmly, or ask a friend to hold it for you. Check that the propeller is free to rotate without causing havoc, then connect the ight battery and switch your models receiving system on. If the motor does NOT run when the stick is in the for-

ward or back position (as appropriate), then everything is in order. However, please check the system anyway by gradually advancing the stick until the motor begins to run. When you are satis ed, stop the motor, then switch off the receiving system in the model and nally switch off the transmitter. Note:

If the motor does not start, or spins in the wrong direc-

tion, this indicates that there are other problems which you must correct before you continue with programming. For example, check the wiring of your motor, and refer to the operating instructions supplied with your speed controller. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:152 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:152 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Once you are con dent that the direction of the Ch 1 stick is correct as far as the motor is concerned, the next step is to ensure that you can switch its effect on the motor on and off, so that you can also control the braking system. This is carried out in the Free mixers menu

(pages 107 111) MIX1 c1 c1 trv offs 100% 100%

0%

SYM ASY M1 M2 M3 3 c1

c1

typ fro to symbol, and assign your where you need to program a free mixer c1 c1. When you have done this, use the arrow button

of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the column above the selected change-over switch to this mixer; for example SW 3. This is done by activating the switch assignment by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and moving the switch from forward to back, i. e. towards you. With the mixer switched on, move to the column above symbol using the arrow button of the left or the right-hand four-way button, and then on to the second screen page by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button once more. At this point you should set an initial SYMmetrical mixer value of -100%. Now move to the Offs line: when you do this, the SYM and ASY elds are replaced by STO and SET. With the STO button highlighted, move the Ch 1 stick to the OFF position you have selected, and then press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button: the value to the right of Offs now changes from 0% to ap-

prox. +100%, and the graphic display of the mixer curve displayed on the right also changes accordingly:

MIX1 c1 c1 trv offs 100% 100%

+100%

STO SET If you now press the buttons of the left-hand four-

way button simultaneously to move to the Servo display menu

(page 113), you can immediately check the effect of the settings you have entered so far: with the mixer switched off, the bar display for Channel 1 follows the movement of the Ch 1 stick. With the mixer switched on it stops - as shown - at around -100%. 1 3 5 100%

0%

0%

2 4 6 0%

0%

0%

Note:

If you carry out this test with the receiving system and power system switched on, please take great care that you operate the change-over switch only in the motor OFF position! If you ignore this, there is a danger that the power system will be severely overloaded by being switched on abruptly, and it could even suffer damage. For the same reason you should be careful only to use the change-over switch at the motor OFF setting when you are y-

ing the model. To conclude the programming procedure, return the selected change-over switch to the motor ON posi-

tion, i. e. forward; move back to the multi-function menu and from there to the Fixed-wing mixers menu where - assuming that you have not already done this in your general model programming - you can select the Brake AIL line and set the desired aileron travel when the Ch 1 stick is operated in the up direction

(Brake). In the column above the the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button before assigning your selected change-over switch by moving your preferred switch from forward to back.

(pages 88 93) symbol press 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:153 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:153 06.06.2011 19:39:46 06.06.2011 19:39:46 Programming example - xed-wing model 153 d i f f a i l e . ail brak brak elev rudd elev aile aile

+33%

+55%

5%

+44%

0%

3 Note:

The settings shown here are just examples, and must not be adopted under any circumstances without careful checking. If you now return to the Servo display menu and move the Ch 1 stick alone, you will see that the bar display for Channel 1 either remains at around -100% while the displays for channels 2 + 5 follow the stick movement, or the other way round: when the switch is operated, the latter stay at around the mid-point, and only the Channel 1 display moves. 1 3 5 100%

0%

88%

2 4 6

+ 88%

0%

0%

154 Programming example - xed-wing model 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:154 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:154 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Operating the timers using the Ch 1 stick or a switch SW 1, 3 7 If, following on from the model programming described on the preceding pages, you have decided on Examp-

le 4 from the previous page, or you are using the Ch 1 stick (throttle / brake stick) to control motor power - inde-

pendently of this programming example - then you can use the associated control switch to turn the stopwatch on and off automatically. To assign this control switch, move the Ch 1 stick to the Idle position, then move to the Timers line in the Basic settings menu

(pages 56 62) Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to activate the switch assignment, then select the input eld above the switch symbol and move the throt-

tle / brake stick from its idle position in the direction of full throttle. Depending on the direction of movement, the switch C1l or C2l will appear on the screen at a particular position of the Ch 1 stick:

when you move the stick past the switching point in the direction of full-throttle, and that the stopwatch alone halts again when you move the stick back to the idle position. When the stopwatch is halted, you can stop the ight timer by pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button, and then reset both timers to their starting value by simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) or re-start them by moving the stick beyond the switching point again. GRAUBELE

#01 50%

5.2V 3:33h 2:22 stop 11:11 flt normal HoTT 5.5V K78 M With the stopwatch halted, press the central ESC but-

ton of the left-hand four-way button (CLEAR) button in the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to the Timer function. The timer can now be started and stopped using the throttle control. Alternatively, if you control your motor using one of the switches SW 1, 3 7, as described in Examples 2 or 3, you do not need any of the previously described control switches. All you need to do is locate the switch which you use to turn your motor on and off, and assign the same switch to the Timers, with the same switching direction, so that they start running at the same moment you turn the motor on. In contrast, if you have decided on the solution de-

scribed in Example 1, then unfortunately there is no al-

ternative but to operate the motor and timers separately. stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap timer 1 no normal 2aile C2 0:00 If you now move the stick back towards idle, you will see that the switch symbol changes again at around 80% of stick travel: between the idle position and the switch-

ing point the switch symbol is open, beyond this it is closed (see Control switches on page 39). If you now repeatedly press the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button to return to the transmit-

ters basic display, in order to check the system, you will see that the stopwatch and ight timer start running Tip:

When using an electric motor the motor run is usually limited by the capacity of the battery, and in this case you would normally set the stopwatch to count down. Simply enter the maximum permitted motor run, e. g. 5 min.. As described on pages 59 and 67 68, the transmitters sounder starts to emit warning tones 30 sec before zero. stick mode motor at C1 tail type aile/flap timer 1 no normal 2aile C2 5:00 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:155 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:155 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Programming example - xed-wing model 155 Using ight phases Within any of the ten model memories you can program up to three different ight phases (states of ight), each incorporating settings which can be entirely different from the others. Each ight phase can be called up by means of a switch. Flight phases represent the simplest and most conven-

ient method of switching between different model set-

tings in ight, and are programmed for different stages of a typical ight, such as normal, thermal, speed, distance etc. We assume that you have already programmed the model in the transmitters model memory, set it up care-

fully, test- own it and trimmed it out properly. First move to the Basic settings menu

(pages 56 62) tail type aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 normal 2ail2fl 5:00 takeoff speed 3 and then to the line Phase 2 and / or Phase 3, where you can either accept the default name or assign a speci c, more appropriate, name to each ight phase. The purpose of this name is just to help you differentiate between the ight phases; it has no signi cance in terms of programming. It will later appear in the transmitters basic screen display, and also in the Phase trim and D/R Expo menu. A physical switch must be assigned so that you can select the different ight phases. The ideal one for switching a maximum of three ight phases is one of the 156 Programming example - xed-wing model three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, located at front left and right on the transmitter. Each of the two end-points of this switch should be assigned to one ight phase, starting from the centre position. We recommend that the switch direction should match the phase numbering: as shown in the left-hand illustration, for example, Phase 2 is forward from the centre position, while Phase 3 is back (towards you). Select the appropriate line, name, and switch assign-

ment in the usual way, i. e. using the various four-way buttons. tail type aile/flap timer phase 2 phase 3 normal 2ail2fl 5:00 takeoff speed 3 4 5 Note:

In principle it makes no difference which names you as-

sign to the various phases - with the exception of Phase 1, which is assigned the name normal, and is always active when ight phases 2 and 3 are disabled. For general model ying three ight phases are usually quite suf cient:

Launch or Thermal for launch and staying up, Normal for normal conditions, and Speed for ying in top gear. At this point all three phases have been set up and assigned names, and you can switch between them;

however if you operate the phase switch you will soon notice that nothing has changed, i. e. all the settings for the control surfaces, and especially the wing aps, are the same. To change these settings, call up the Phase trim menu

(page 86) move the phase switch (or switches) to the appropri-

ate position, and enter the desired values in the stand-

ard way by pressing the input buttons, in a similar way to the method of adjusting transmitter control centres and offsets with other radio control systems. P H A S E T R I M normal takeoff speed

0%

+8%

7%

0%

4%

5%

0%

+2%

3%

FLA AIL ELE If you now switch the receiving system on and select the different phases in turn, you will see a difference in con-

trol surface response. The differences are also re ected in the bar display for the servos in the Servo display menu, which you can call up from virtually any menu position by simultaneously pressing the buttons of the left-hand four-way button. Note:

Depending on the information you have entered in the aile/ ap line of the Basic settings menu, the ELE column alone, the AIL and ELE columns, or - as shown above - FLAP, AIL and ELE may appear on the screen for Phase trimming. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:156 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:156 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Programming example: servos running in parallel In some cases a second servo is required to run in parallel with an existing servo; for example, if a second elevator or rudder is to be actuated by a separate servo, or where a second servo is needed to cope with very high control forces, or where two servos are required for a large control surface due to the high forces involved. This task could be solved simply by connecting both ser-

vos together in the model using a conventional Y-lead. However, this has the drawback that the linked servos cannot be adjusted individually from the transmitter, i. e. you forfeit the basic advantage of the computer radio control system: separate adjustment of individual servos from the transmitter. Another option would be to call up the Telemetry menu and use its Channel mapping option instead of a simple Y-lead; see page 121. However, the simplest method is to use the transmitters software facilities. For example, it is easy to set up Two elevator servos to operate in parallel. First move to the Basic settings menu

(page 56 62) Two rudder servos In this example we will connect two rudders in parallel using the Free mixers menu. The second rudder could be connected to receiver output 6, which is not already in use. The rst step is to move to the Free mixers menu

(pages 107 111) second rudder control channel - in our case 6 - with suitable servo travel settings. An offset of +100% is then selected for both mixers, as the Ch 1 stick is (usually) at its top end-point when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet rudders are only required to de ect outwards proportionally when the brakes are extended. M1 M2 M3 tr rd

6

typ fro to and set up a mixer Tr RUD 6. In the Type column select the Tr setting, so that the rudder trim affects both rudder servos. Finally switch to the graphics page and set a SYMmetri-

cal mixer input of +100%:

MIX1 tr rd 6 mod name stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type 100%

GRAUBELE 1

+150%

idle re. 2elev sv and set 2elev sv in the tail type line. The two elevator servos are then connected to receiver output sockets 3 and 6. trv Offs

+100% +100%

0%

SYM ASY Once again, for safety reasons it is really essential that you set input 6 to free in the Transmitter control settings menu. As an added re nement, you may want both rudders to de ect outwards only, as part of a braking system controlled by the Ch 1 stick. This can be accomplished by setting up two additional mixers c1 4 and c1 Programming example - xed-wing model 157 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:157 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs42:157 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Programming example: Delta / ying wing On page 144, where the section on xed-wing model programming starts, you will nd general notes regard-

ing the installation and set-up of the RC system in a model, and - of course - this applies equally to deltas and ying wings. The information on test- ying and re n-

ing the settings is also relevant, including the section on programming ight phases. Free or auxiliary function Receiver power supply Free or telemetry sensor or auxiliary function Free or rudder Right elevon (aileron / elevator) servo Left elevon (aileron / elevator) servo Receiver power supply Airbrakes or throttle or speed controller (electric motor) left and with four wing-mounted control surfaces as fol-

lows:

Left flap (aileron) / elevator Receiver power supply Right flap (aileron) / elevator Free or rudder Right elevon (aileron / elevator) servo Left elevon (aileron / elevator) servo Receiver power supply Airbrakes or throttle or speed controller (electric motor) If your ying wing features inboard elevators, the nor-

mal servo sequence has proved useful; this arrange-

ment can also be employed for canards:

Left flap (/ elevator) Receiver power supply Right elevon (aileron / elevator) Rudder (if present) Elevator (if present) Left elevon (aileron / elevator) servo Receiver power supply Airbrakes or throttle or speed controller (electric motor) or alternatively right flap (/ elevator) Depending on the receiver servo sequence you select, you should rst move to the right In their characteristic shape and geometry, deltas and ying wings differ very signi cantly from normal models even at rst sight, but the differences in the requisite servo arrangement are rather more subtle. The clas-

sic model delta or ying wing generally has only two control surfaces, which act both as ailerons (in opposite directions) and as elevators (in the same direction), in a similar way to the superimposed rudder / elevator func-

tions of a V-tail. More modern designs tend to be more complex; one (or two) inboard control surfaces may be used purely as elevators, while the outboard ailerons also act as elevators, but to a reduced extent. If a ying wing has four or even six wing control surfaces, it is certainly feasible nowadays to set them up with camber-

changing ap functions and / or even a butter y (crow) system. However, most of these models still rank as classic deltas and ying wings, with two wing-mounted control surfaces, and for them the servos should be connected to the receiver as follows (see also page 43):

158 Programming example: delta and ying wing Basic settings menu and select the following options in each line:

motor at C1: none:

The brake system is retracted at

(pages 56 62) the forward position of the throttle /

brake stick. In the Aileron / ap line of the base sett. menu it is possible to select 1AL, 2AL and 2AL 2FL, and the mixers Brake NN* in the Wing mixers menu and all mixers from and to aps are activated. The warning message Throttle too high (see page 28) and the Motor stop option in the base sett. menu are disabled. none/inv:

The brake system is retracted at the back position of the throttle /

brake stick. In the Aileron / ap line of the base sett. menu it is possible to select 1AL, 2AL and 2AL 2FL, and the mixers Brake NN* in the Wing mixers menu and all mixers from and to aps are activated. The warning message Throttle too high (see page 28) and the Motor stop option in the base sett.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:158 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:158 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Fixed-wing mixers menu

(pages 88 93) d i f f a i l e . ail rudd brak elev d i f f r e d 0%

0%

0%

0%

affect the elevator (up / down) function of the two elevon (combined aileron / elevator) servos, as well as the ap / elevator servos. Notes:

The flap mixers and flap differential only appear in the list if you have also entered 2fl in the aile/flap line at the Delta / Flying wing model type; see illus-

tration on the right. In principle the same applies to the Brake mixers. These are also suppressed if you have de-

cided on Throttle min forward / back in the motor at C1 line of the Basic settings menu. Even if you have selected 2aile2fl, the (digital) ele-

vator and aileron trims only affect aileron / elevator. If you wish to circumvent this, it is simpler to program your model as described in the following section.

NN *

tail type:

aile/ ap:

menu are disabled. Idle forward or Idle rear The Ch 1 trim operates either forward or back. If you switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick too far in the direction of full-throttle, you will see the warning message Throttle too high on the screen. In the Aileron / ap line of the base sett. menu it is only possible to select 1AL or 2AL, and the mixers Brake NN* in the Wing mixers menu and all mixers from and to aps are disabled. In the base sett. menu the Motor stop option is activated. Delta / ying wing or Normal Two ailerons 2aile and - if present and selectable - two aps 2 . The primary function of these settings is to de ne the range of wing mixers which the software makes avail-

able. If you select the Delta / ying wing tail type, the software automatically superimposes the elevator and aileron functions. In this case the mixer ratios can be adjusted by varying the Dual Rate settings in the D/R /

Expo menu (see page 82). If you select Delta / ying wing, all settings of the NN * elev wing mixers in the

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated) Programming a model delta using the normal tail setting Alternatively, if you select the normal tail type in the Basic settings menu, and connect the servos to the receiver as shown in the lower of the two receiver socket sequence diagrams on the left-hand page, then the aileron function of the two elevon servos will work cor-

rectly, but not the elevator function. In the normal tail type you have to force the two ailer-

on servos and the two ap servos to move in the same direction and provide an elevator effect when an eleva-

tor command is given. This requires the elev NN *

wing mixers, whose effect can be adjusted separately. The procedure starts by selecting the Fixed-wing mixers menu

(pages 88 93)

(The following settings are model-speci c, and you must check carefully that they work correctly on your model before accepting them.) d i f f a i l e . d i f f f l a p s rudd ail ail flaps brak elev brak flap aile brak elev flap aile elev elev flap aile flap d i f f r e d 0%

0%

0%

+55%

0%

+55%

+66%

+77%

+77%

0%

0%

0%

where you set values other than zero for these mixers. With this set-up the tailless model is considered to be a Programming example: delta and ying wing 159 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:159 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:159 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 normal four- ap wing (two ailerons and two aps), and therefore has all the options associated with this wing type. The method involves the elev NN * mixers, which were originally intended only for pitch trim com-

pensation and non-standard applications. In this case they are abused by setting higher values than normal, in order to transfer the elevator signal to the control surfaces of the tailless model. However, none of the xed-wing mixers includes the digital trim of the elevator stick - so an alternative has to be found. Start by switching to the Transmitter control settings menu

(page 74) I5 I6 ctrl 6 ctrl 6

+15% +15%

+15% +15%

trv

and assign the same transmitter control to the inputs 5 and (if required) 6, e. g. the rotary proportional control CTRL 7. Now move to the Travel column and reduce the travel of the transmitter control for these two inputs symmetrically to around 50%, or even less, because: the lower this value, the ner the trim control. However, if you prefer to use the normal elevator trim lever, set - or leave - the elev NN * mixers to 0%, and instead set up free linear mixers to do the job. This is done by calling up the 160 Programming example: delta and ying wing Free mixers menu

(pages 107 111) M1 M2 M3 tr tr el el

5 6

typ fro to and setting up one linear mixer Tr elev 5, and - if necessary - Tr elev 6. Move to the graphic page of this menu to set the re-

quired mixer ratios. Check the settings, and above all the direction of effect, in the Servo display, or on the model itself, and change the pre xes if necessary. If you carry out the programming as described above, the ailerons will also move in the same direction, like aps, when you move the elevator stick. The effect of the tr option is that the elevator trim lever also affects the associated mixer when you operate the elevator stick. Since an additional transmitter control is no longer required for this arrangement, you should disable input 5 and (if used) input 6 in the second column of the Trans-

mitter control settings menu; simply set these inputs to free. Many years ago, the author ew a model delta pro-

grammed exactly in this way using the mc-20, with the following additional re nements: ap settings used as trim, and butter y (crow) as landing aid - the latter exploiting the Brake AIL and Brake FL wing mixers to provide complete compensation for pitch trim changes in both directions. In this case the term ailer-

ons means the outboard wing control surfaces, and aps the inboard pair of control surfaces. A modern sweptback ying wing can be controlled in a similar fashion. These models also feature inboard and outboard control surfaces: the former forward of the Centre of Gravity, the latter aft of it. De ecting the inboard control surface(s) down increases lift and pro-

duces an up-elevator effect; de ecting them up creates the opposite effect. In contrast, the outboard ailerons act in the reverse direction: a down-de ection produces a down-elevator effect, and vice versa. There are really no limits to what can be achieved with appropriate settings of the systems sophisticated mixers. However, please note that you should be extremely careful when setting differential travel with such a con-

guration, regardless of your models set-up, its tail type and the number of servos you are using. This is because differential travels on a tailless model tend to produce an asymmetrical elevator effect, rather than the desired adverse yaw reduction. For this reason it is advisable to start with a differential setting of 0% - at least for the rst few ights. When you are familiar with the model and feel the need to experiment, it may then be feasible under certain circumstances to try differential settings deviating from zero. For larger models it could be advisable to install winglets tted with rudders, i. e. small vertical surfaces at the wingtips. If these are actuated by two separate servos, they can be controlled as described in the example on page 157 dealing with Servos running in parallel, or using Channel mapping in the Telemetry menu; see page 121. You may also want both rudders to de ect outwards when a braking system is operated using the Ch 1 stick, and this can be accomplished as follows: if you have selected the normal tail type, set up two further mixers c1 4 and c1 second rudder control channel 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:160 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs47:160 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 with suitable travel settings. The offset for both mixers should be +100%, as the Ch 1 stick is usually at the forward end-point when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet rudders are only required to de ect outwards proportionally when the brakes are extended. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs11:161 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs11:161 For your notes 161 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Programming example: F3A model aircraft F3A models belong to the category of powered xed-

wing model aircraft designed for competition ying. They may be powered by an internal combustion engine or an electric motor. Electric-powered models are eligible and totally competitive in the international F3A pattern class, and also in the F5A electric aerobatic class. xed-wing models we have already described. The auxiliary function Retracts is usually assigned to the auxiliary channel 6. Ideally the retracts are oper-

ated using the switch without a centre detent (SW 3). An optional extra - used only if necessary - is mixture adjustment control for the carburettor. This is gener-

ally operated by one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 or 8, connected to one of the auxiliary channels not already in use. Free, or retracts, or mixture adjustment Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or right aileron Rudder Elevator Aileron or left aileron Receiver power supply Throttle or speed controller

(electric motor) When assigning functions to the auxiliary channels at the transmitter, it is advisable to ensure that the controls required are within easy reach, since the advanced aerobatic pilot has very little time to think about letting go of the sticks - especially when ying under competi-

tion conditions. In this programming example we assume that you have already read through the description of the individual menus, and are therefore familiar with the general method of handling the transmitter. On page 144, where the section on xed-wing model programming starts, you will nd general notes on installing and setting up the RC system in a model, and - of course - this applies equally to F3A models, and therefore does not need to be repeated at this point. If an F3A model is accurately built, it usually exhibits y-

ing characteristics which are almost completely neutral. The perfect aerobatic model has a very smooth but pre-

cise control response, and any movement around any one of its ight axes should not affect the other axes. F3A models are own using aileron, elevator and rudder controls. The use of separate servos for each aileron is almost universal. The ying controls are supplemented by control of motor power (throttle function) and in many cases a retractable undercarriage. As a result the servo assignment for channels 1 to 5 is no different from the 162 Programming example: F3A model Programming The basic programming of the transmitter has already been described in detail in the section starting on page 144, so this section concentrates on tips speci c to F3A models. In the Servo settings menu

(page 72) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

you can adjust the servo settings to suit your model. It has proved advisable to use at least 100% servo travel, as precision of control can be perceptibly better if relatively large servo travels are employed. This should be borne in mind when building the model and design-

ing the control surface linkages. Any minor corrections required can be made in the third column during the initial test ights. The next step is to select the Basic model settings menu and activate the idle trim for Channel 1 (normally Idle back; i. e. full-throttle forward). The digital trim now works at the idle end of stick travel. The cut-off trim enables you to switch immediately from the motor stopped position to the idle position you have previously established just by applying a single click on the trim lever (see page 40).

(page 56 62) 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:162 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:162 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 stick mode motor at C1 cut off tail type aile/flap 100%

1 idle re.

+150%

1 normal 2aile The remaining settings should be adjusted as required to suit your personal preferences. You may nd it necessary to assign transmitter controls to particular inputs to operate the retractable undercar-

riage or carburettor mixture adjustment. This is carried out in the Transmitter control settings menu For example, you may like to assign a particular trans-

mitter control - perhaps one of the two rotary proportion-

al knobs - e. g. CTRL 7 - for mixture adjustment, or the ON / OFF switch SW 3 for the retracts, to the input E6:

(page 74). I5 I6 free 3

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

The retracts are extended and retracted when you oper-

ate the switch SW 3. You may need to adjust the travel of the transmitter control, and perhaps reverse that channel by setting a negative pre x for servo travel. F3A models y fairly fast, and respond very solidly to corrective movements of the servos. However, in com-

petition ying it is vital that all abrupt control movements and corrections should be kept to a minimum, as the judges will invariably notice any lack of smoothness and dock a few points, so it is advisable to set exponential control characteristics on the stick functions. Move to the D/R Expo menu

(page 82). Exponential values of around +30% on aileron, elevator and rudder have proved to be a good starting point, and you can set them in the right-hand column of this menu. These values provide smooth, well-de ned control of the typical F3A model. Many experts use higher values;

even up to +60% exponential. aile elev rudd 100%

100%

100%

+33%

+33%

+33%

DUAL EXPO Since F3A models generally have two aileron servos, it has proved useful to de ect both ailerons up slightly for the landing. In most cases this causes the model to y a little more slowly and with a more stable attitude on the landing approach. To achieve this you will need to program mixers in the Free mixers menu Both ailerons are usually required to de ect up as a landing aid, in parallel with the movement of the throttle stick, but only from the half-throttle setting in the direc-

tion of idle. From that point on, the further the stick is moved towards the idle position, the more the ailerons de ect up. The reverse occurs when you open the throttle: the ailerons are returned to neutral to avoid the model suddenly ballooning up.

(section starting on page 106). A little down-elevator must usually be mixed in to ensure that the aeroplane does not climb when the ailerons /

aps are deployed. To meet these requirements you need the two mixers shown in the illustration below. M1 M2 M3 c1 c1

5 el

6 6 typ fro to The mixers are activated using one and the same ex-

ternal switch, e. g. SW 6, which therefore has to be as-

signed to both mixers, with the same direction of effect. Press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button to move to the mixer inputs on the second screen page, and set the appropriate mixer ratios. In both cases the mixer neutral point should be left at the centre posi-

tion of the Ch 1 stick travel. For this reason you should now move the Ch 1 stick to the Idle range, select the ASY eld, and enter the follow-

ing values:

MIX 1:

MIX 2: -5% -10%.

-60% -80% and Example of MIX 1:

MIX1 c1 5 trv offs 66%

0%

0%

SYM ASY Programming example: F3A model 163 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:163 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:163 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 This completes the basic set-up for a typical F3A model. Correcting model-speci c errors It is an unfortunate fact of life that even very carefully built models exhibit minute faults and inaccuracies which produce unwanted deviations when the model is ying;

the mixers of a computer radio control system are then needed to compensate for these de ciencies. In this section we will describe how to carry out the adjust-

ments required, but please note the following points before we get started: it is vital to ensure that the model is built as accurately as humanly possible, is balanced perfectly around the lateral and longitudinal axes, and that motor downthrust and sidethrust are set correctly. Rudder causes unwanted movement around the 1. longitudinal and lateral axes It is often the case that a rudder command caus-

es the model to rotate slightly around the longitudi-

nal and / or lateral axis. This is particularly trouble-

some in what is known as knife-edge ight, where the models total lift is generated by the fuselage, aided by the rudder de ection. The result is that the mod-

el rotates and changes heading slightly, as if the pi-

lot were applying aileron or elevator at the same time. These tendencies have to be corrected with compen-

sation around the lateral axis (elevator) and around the longitudinal axis (aileron). These corrections can be achieved easily with the mx-12 HoTT, exploiting the free mixers once again. For example, if the model rotates to the right around the longitudinal (roll) axis when the rudder is de ected to the right for a knife-edge pass, then a mixer is set up which de ects the ailerons slight-

ly to the left. Heading changes around the lateral (el-

evator) axis can be corrected in a similar way using a 164 Programming example: F3A model mixer acting upon the elevator:

a) Correction around the lateral axis (elevator) MIX rd el ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required must be found by ight testing. b) Correction around the longitudinal axis (aileron) MIX rd al ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required must be found by ight testing. In most cases relatively small mixer values are called for - typically below 10% - but this does vary from model to model. Vertical climb and descent Many models exhibit a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical climbs and descents. To correct this we need an elevator neutral position which varies according to the throttle setting. For example, if the model tends to pull out of a vertical descent by itself when the motor is throttled back, slight down-elevator must be mixed in at this throttle setting. MIX c1 el As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%, but once again there is no substitute for test- ying. 2. 3. 4. Rolling (movement around the longitudinal axis) at idle When you reduce the throttle setting, the model may tend to roll slightly in one direction. Clearly an ai-

leron correction must be made. However, it is much more elegant to let a mixer correct this effect for you than to move the stick manually. Once again, a mixer needs to be set up:

MIX c1 al As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%, but once again test- ying is called for. The adjustment process should only be carried out in calm weather. Often all you need to do is apply the mixer in the control segment between half-throttle and idle. To achieve this, leave the Offset point at the centre position, and set up the mixer ASYmetrically. Rolling when ailerons and aps are extended If you y the landing approach with both ailerons de-

ected up, the model may show a tendency to roll slightly due to minor variations in aileron servo trav-

el (or constructional inaccuracies); i. e. the model may turn to either side by itself. Once again, this tenden-

cy can easily be corrected using a mixer to vary the compensation according to the position of the ailer-

ons / landing aps. MIX c1 al It is essential to provide a means of switching the mixer on and off using the switch which controls the aileron / landing ap function (see previous page), to ensure that this mixer only has any effect when the aileron / landing ap function is activated. The opti-

mum value has to be found by test- ying. And nally a few words on the 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:164 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:164 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 FAIL-SAFE settings We strongly recommend that you make use of the safety potential of this option by at least setting the throttle position (glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric motor to stop, if a fail-safe event should be triggered. This simple precaution ensures that the model is much less likely to create havoc and cause property dam-

age or personal injury. If you also program the fail-safe positions of the control surfaces in such a way that the model ies steadily descending circles in case of inter-

ference, then you have a good chance that it will land relatively gently even if the radio link fails for a protracted period. This also gives you plenty of time to restore the connection, should the whole 2.4 GHz frequency band suffer interference for a while. In the receivers default state, however, the servos remain in their last valid position (hold mode) when in-

terference occurs. You can program any individual servo output of your receiver to a fail-safe position (fail-safe mode), as described on page 116. Summary The settings described on this page are intended primarily for the expert yer. Please bear in mind that re ning the ying characteristics of a model aeroplane to this extent involves tremendous effort, time, sensitivity and expertise. Some experts continue the program-

ming procedure even when they are ying, although it is not advisable to try this if you are just a moderately advanced pilot making your rst attempt with an F3A aerobatic model. You would be well advised to request help from an experienced pilot, and carry out the ne-

tuning adjustments mentioned here one by one, with the expert at your side, until your model exhibits the neutral ying characteristics you desire. 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:165 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs46:165 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Programming example: F3A model 165 Programming example: model helicopter In this programming example we assume that you have already read and understood the descriptions of the individual menus, and are by now familiar with the general handling of the transmitter. We also assume that you have assembled and adjusted the helicopter exactly according to the kit instructions. The electronic facilities provided by the transmitter should never be used to compensate for major mechanical inaccuracies. As so often in life, there are various ways and means of reaching a particular destination when programming the mx-12 HoTT. In this example our intention is to provide a sensibly structured course of action, so that you have a clear idea of logical programming techniques. Where there are several possible methods, we rst describe the simplest and most easily understood solution. It is likely that the helicopter will work perfectly when set up in this way, but naturally you are still free to try out other solu-

tions at a later stage, in case they suit you better. As our programming example we take the Graupner STARLET 50 helicopter, with right-hand rotation, three swashplate linkage points distributed evenly at 120

(3Sv (2 roll) type), a beginners set-up without en-

hanced throttle curve, without heading-lock gyro system, no method of in uencing the gyros normal operating mode from the transmitter, and with no speed governor

(regulator). 166 Programming example: model helicopter We have deliberately chosen this simple programming project in order to demonstrate that it is possible to set up a helicopter which ies extremely well with relatively little programming effort. Nevertheless, we do not want to forfeit all the possible re nement facilities: after the basic description you will also nd set-up notes on gyro gain, speed governors and ight phase programming. Note:

If, in contrast to the glow-powered machine described here, your main interest lies in electric-powered model helicopters, then please read on! Apart from the idle adjustments, which naturally do not apply, you can adopt most of the settings described in the following section virtually unchanged. To initiate this typical programming exercise move to the Model memory menu, then to the select model sub-menu

(page 52), where you select a free model memory using the ar-

row buttons of the left or right-hand four-way button:

R06 01 02 03 04 05 06

free

free

free

free

free Sel model type

( empty mod mem ) the Helicopter model type. Con rm your choice by pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-

way button, and the screen immediately switches to the basic display. Notes:

Once you have called up the Model select option it is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must choose one or other model type. Even if you switch the transmitter off, then on again, you still have to make this choice. However, if you make a mistake you can always correct it simply by erasing the mod-

el memory. If the warning message Throttle too high appears, you can erase it by turning the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 anti-clockwise to its end-point. If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able to change model memories for safety reasons. In this case the screen displays an appropriate message:

not possible now voltage too low After pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, you can use the button of the left or right-hand four-way button to select Once you have overcome this initial hurdle, it is essential to bind the receiver installed in the model to this model memory in the 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:166 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:166 06.06.2011 19:39:47 06.06.2011 19:39:47 Basic settings menu This is accomplished by moving to the rx bind line:

(pages 64 71) by selecting the characters available on the second page of the mod name line:

timer phase 2 autorotat. receiv out rx bind 0:00 hover Note:

When you con rm the model selection the following message appears in the basic display for a few seconds:

BIND N/A OK If you con rm your choice by brie y pressing the SET button of the right-hand four-way button, you automati-

cally move to this line:

In this line you trigger the bind process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 70. Without this step you cannot address the receiver. The next step is to press the arrow button of the left-

hand or right-hand four-way button to move up into the rst line, where you can start the actual model program-

ming in the mod name line. Now enter a suitable name for the model memory, mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

1

+150%

1 servo right

0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQR STUVWXYZ

stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct pitch min 100% +150% 1 1 3sv(2rol) right rear model name STAR Once you have entered the Model name you should check that the Stick mode is correct:

At this point, if you have not already done so, the servos should be connected to the receiver in the following sequence:

Throttle servo or speed controller mod name stick mode swashplate cut off rotor direct 100%

STARLET 1

+150%

1 servo right In the next four lines we come to the rst settings which are speci c to helicopters:

In the Swashplate type line select the number of servos which are used to actuate the swashplate. See page 65 for more details of this. In the Rotor direction line we enter the direction of rotation of the main rotor as viewed from above. In the Collective pitch min. line set forward or rear to suit your personal preference. This setting applies equally to all subsequent mixers, and it is therefore vital that you do not change it later in order to alter individual mixer directions, such as the direction of collective pitch or throttle. Receiver power supply Telemetry sensor or gyro gain Tail rotor servo (gyro system) Pitch-axis 1 servo Roll 1 servo Receiver power supply Roll 2 servo The mixer ratios and mixer directions for the swashplate servos for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are set in the Swashplate mixer menu

(page 112), SP MIXER ptch roll nick

+61%

+61%

+61%

where you will nd that they are pre-set to +61% in each case. If the swashplate does not respond correctly to the stick movements, the rst step is to change the mixer directions from + to - if necessary. The second recourse is to reverse the servo directions in the Servo Programming example: model helicopter 167 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:167 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:167 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 settings menu. Transmitter control settings menu

(page 76) Note:

Please note one important difference in later Graupner mc and mx radio control systems compared with earlier equipment: the rst collective pitch servo and the throttle servo have been interchanged. Now move to the Servo settings menu

(page 72), S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 rev 0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

cent 100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

100% 100%

trav

where you can set up the travels and directions of rotation of the individual servos. The basic aim here should be to keep servo travels at 100% wherever possible, as this maintains best possible resolution and accuracy. Use Rev. if necessary to change the direc-

tion of rotation of any servo; do check carefully that the direction you set really is correct. The tail rotor servo, in particular, must operate in such a way that the nose

(!) of the helicopter moves in the direction which corre-

sponds to the movement of the tail rotor stick. A glance at the 168 Programming example: model helicopter gyr thr lim free free ctrl7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100%

trv

will show you that ctrl 7, i. e. the rotary proportional control CTRL 7, is assigned to the Lim input, whereas all other inputs are programmed to free by default. The Lim input serves as throttle limiter. It acts solely on output 6, to which the throttle servo is connected. Just to remind you:

Using the Throttle limiter function eliminates the need to program an Idle-up ight phase. The throttle limiter does not control the throttle ser-

vo; it simply limits the travel of this servo in the for-

ward direction, according to the setting of the throt-

tle limiter, when required. The throttle servo is usually controlled by the collective pitch stick via the throttle curve or curves you have set in the Helimix menu, for which reason input 6 should always be left free. For more details please refer to the sections on pag-

es 96 and 97 of the manual. Moreover the Ch 1 trim only affects a helicopters throttle servo. This section does not describe the spe-

cial features of this trim (cut-off trim) again, as it is covered on page 40. (Thanks to the digital trims, trim values are automatically stored when you switch models and when you switch between ight phases.) You will nd a detailed description of the basic idle set-up procedure and the method of adjusting idle and throttle limit in the section starting on page 79.

Now use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the Travel column, and increase the value in the highlighted eld from 100% to 125%, with the throttle limiter at its forward end-stop. gyr thr lim free free ctrl7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+125%

trv

This ensures that the throttle limiter cannot possibly restrict the full throttle travel dictated by the collective pitch stick when the model is in ight. Set-up note for electric helicopters:

Since electric motors by their nature require no idle setting, the only important point when setting up an electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjustment range of the throttle limiter should be set signi cantly higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller, which is usually from -100% to +100%. It may therefore be necessary to adjust the Travel value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate value, such as a symmetrical 110% setting. However, further ne-tuning can be carried out exactly as described here for the glow-powered machine. An additional function needs to be activated in the Basic model settings menu Even if you are a beginner to ying and are not yet ready for this, it is advisable at least to de ne the auto-

rotation switch, so that you have an emergency cut switch for the motor. This is carried out by selecting the Auto-rotation line using the arrow buttons of the

(pages 64 71). 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:168 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:168 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 left or right-hand four-way button, pressing the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and then moving the two-position switch (SW 3) to the ON set-

ting. The switch number (in our example 3) now ap-

pears on the right of the screen:

rotor direct pitch min timer phase 2 autorotat. right rear 5:00 C3 hover 3 This switch should be located at a position on the trans-

mitter where you can easily reach it without letting go of the stick, e. g. above the collective pitch stick. Note:

For more information on setting up this emergency OFF switch please refer to the section in the centre column of the following page. And another tip:

Please make it a habit to give all the switches a common on direction; then a quick glance at the transmitter before ying will soon reassure you that all switches are off. If you wish, you could at this point move up one line and assign a ight phase switch for ight phase 2, which is already assigned the name Hover, but this simple programming example deliberately excludes such re ne-

ments. You have now completed the basic settings at the transmitter, i. e. the procedure which you will need to use time and again when setting up a new model. The actual helicopter-speci c set-up is carried out primarily in the Heli mixers menu

(pages 94 105). thro tail ptch ch1 ch1 gyro swash lim. normal 0%

off SEL In the very rst line you will see the Collective pitch function, and a brief press on the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button takes you to the ap-

propriate sub-menu. At this point you will see a graphic representation of the collective pitch curve. This is initially de ned by only three reference points, and in most cases this is quite adequate. Tip:

Always try to manage with these three reference points initially, as additional points just complicate matters, and extra complexity is just what you dont need at the moment. The reference point for hovering should generally be the mechanical centre-point of the collective pitch stick, as this position feels completely natural to most pilots. You can, of course, set up the curve to locate the hover at a different point, but you should not be tempted to do this unless you know exactly what you are doing. Start by setting the collective pitch stick to centre. Assuming that you previously adjusted the servos in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, the servo output arms will now (usually) be at right-angles to the servo case. If you have not already done so, adjust the mechani-

cal linkages to the rotor head so that all the blades are set to a collective pitch angle of 4 to 5 positive for the hover. All known helicopters will y at this setting. Now push the collective pitch stick fully forward to the maximum collective pitch point (the full-length vertical line indicates the current position of the stick). Adjust Point 5 on the collective pitch curve using the arrow buttons of the right-hand four-way button, with the aim of obtaining a maximum collective pitch setting of around 9 at the main rotor blades. This point should be at a value of around +50%. Note:

A rotor blade set-up gauge, e. g. the Graupner item, Order No. 61, is very useful when setting up blade pitch angles, as you can read off the angles directly. Now pull the collective pitch stick right back to the collective pitch minimum position. Set the blade pitch angle for Point 1 to 0 to -4, depending on your piloting ability. This produces a graph line with a slight angle at the hover point, forming what is known as the collective pitch curve. It might look approximately like this:

ptch input output 5 point normal 100%

80%

80%

If you now switch to the auto-rotation phase - you will see the name of the ight phase Autorot at bottom left on the screen - the old collective pitch curve will re-ap-

pear. In this phase you should set the same values as in the normal phase, with the following exception: increase the pitch angle at Point 5 (collective pitch maximum) by about 2. This gives slightly more pitch for aring the Programming example: model helicopter 169 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:169 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:169 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 model when practising autos at a later (!) date. Once you have set up the collective pitch curve, oper-

ate the auto-rotation switch again, then brie y press the central ESC button of the left-hand four-way button to return to the helicopter mixer menu select point. Now we move on to the Ch1 thro line, where you can set up the throttle curve. The rst step here is to enter the idle trim range by adjusting the throttle curve. Move the collective pitch stick to the minimum position, and set Point 1 to a value of around -65%. c1 thro input output 5 point normal 100%

65%

65%

With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open, pull the collective pitch stick to the fully back position and move it slightly to and fro: the throttle servo should not respond to this movement. This arrangement gives you a seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve. You will probably need to make further ad-

justments to the throttle curve, but this process must be carried out later as part of the ight-testing procedure. If you now switch temporarily from this graph to the auto-rotation ight phase, you will see - instead of the usual display - the following:

170 Programming example: model helicopter c1 thro off Autorot This means that the throttle servo has switched to a xed value, which can be adjusted as follows:

Press ESC to return to the menu list. Assuming that you are still in the auto-rotation phase, this will now include new sub-menus. The important line is Throttle, where you should set a value of around +125% or -125%, depending on the direction of servo rotation. ptch thro tail gyro swash lim. Autorot 125%

0%

0%

off SEL This setting ensures that the motor stops reliably in the auto-rotation phase (to allow you to cope with an emergency). Later, when you have gained suf cient experience to practise auto-rotation landings, the setting should be changed to a value which provides a reliable idle. Set-up note for electric helicopters:

Since the motor must be stopped completely if an emer-

gency occurs with an electric-powered model helicopter, this setting can be adopted unchanged. At present the remaining sub-menus are of no interest. Simply switch Auto-rotation off, and move back to the rst menu list. Call up the set-up page of the Ch1 tail rotor menu:

this is where you set static torque compensation (DMA) for the tail rotor. Once again, please restrict yourself to the three default reference points; everything else is the preserve of the experienced pilot. For the initial set-up - intended for a heading-lock gyro system - the uniform pre-set values of 0% should be changed to

-30% at Point 1 (collective pitch minimum) and +30%

at the opposite end, Point 5 (collective pitch maximum), although you may nd it necessary to adjust the settings slightly later. c1 tail input output 5 point normal 100%

30%

30%

Now switch back to the auto-rotation phase for a mo-

ment. The set-up curve is disabled here, with the result that the tail rotor servo no longer responds to collective pitch commands (when the main rotor is not powered, there is no rotor torque to be corrected). The - static - pre-set of the gyro effect principle (normal or heading lock mode), and also the gyro gain can now be altered by setting a value other than 0 in the Gyro line:

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:170 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:170 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 thro tail ptch ch1 ch1 gyro swash lim. normal 0%

off SEL Please be sure to read and observe the set-up instructions supplied with your gyro at this point, as there is a possibility that your helicopter will be uncontrollable if you set it up incorrectly!

If your gyro features gain control from the transmitter -

unlike the type we are using in this example - you will need another free proportional control for it, e. g. CTRL 8. This can be assigned to the Gyro input in the Transmitter control settings menu

(page 76). gyr thr lim ctrl 8 free ctrl 7

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

Turn the rotary control until its number (transmitter control number) appears on the screen, then use the arrow button of the left or right-hand four-way button to move to the ASY eld in the Travel column. Brie y press the central SET button of the right-hand four-way button, and you will be able to set a maximum gyro gain such as 50% in the now highlighted eld:

gyr thr lim ctrl 8 free ctrl 7

+50% +50%

+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

This represents a safe xed value which is maintained as long as the rotary control is at its right-hand end-stop. You will probably need to adjust the value in the course of ight-testing. Additional notes on setting up gyros can be found on pages 98 / 99. Further adjustments If you have followed this programming example, you will have a helicopter which is set up properly, and in an ideal state for hovering practice and simple circuits. Of course, you may wish to activate further functions de-

pending on your skill and ying experience. If you wish to y using different rotor speeds and trim set-ups, you will need to activate a series of ight phases, which can be called up via switches which you assign. The rst step in this process is to call up the Basic model settings menu

(pages 64 71) rotor direct pitch min timer phase 2 autorotat. right rear 10:01 C3 hover 7 3 assign a switch to Phase 2, e. g. SW 7, and enter a relevant name (if you wish). It is important to be quite clear in your mind that auto-

rotation always has absolute precedence over any other phases. This simply means: if you operate the auto-rotation switch, you immediately move to the auto-

rotation phase from either of the other two ight phases

(normal phase and phase 2). Now move back to the Helimix menu, switch to Phase 2 (which you have just set up), and modify the settings accordingly. Since the mx-12 HoTT features digital trims, in the Heli program all the trim positions for the control functions roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor are stored separately for each ight phase, in addition to the other menu settings which you entered separately for each ight phase (see page 94). For example, if the motor run is limited by the fueltank size or battery capacity, you should set the stopwatch to count down. Enter the maximum possible motor run time, e. g. 5 min.. The transmitters sounder now starts emitting warning sounds starting at 30 s before zero, as described on page 67 / 68. You could assign the transmitter control switch G3 to this timer, by rst activating switch assignment and then turning the throt-

tle limit control from its idle position in the direction of full-throttle:

swashplate cut off rotor direct pitch min timer 3sv(2rol) 100% +150% 1 right rear 5:00 C3 With the stopwatch halted, press the or but-

tons of the left-hand four-way button (CLEAR) simul-

taneously at the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to the Timer function. The timer then starts Programming example: model helicopter 171 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:171 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:171 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 automatically when you move the throttle limit slider towards full-throttle, and stops again when you move the limiter back to the idle range. Suggested re nement: speed governor At some time you may wish to install a speed governor

(regulator) in your helicopter, e. g. the mc-Heli-Control, to try ying with a system rotational speed which is automatically maintained at a constant value. It makes sense to couple the individual rotor speeds with the ight phases, as this enables you to carry out further ne-tuning. The initial requirement when programming the transmit-

ter is to install and program the speed governor exactly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. A practical suggestion, which includes the throttle limiter function, can be found in the section starting on page 96. If you have set up your helicopter as described in this programming example, you will nd that it is capable of carrying out extremely challenging ight tasks even though it is not suitable for competition work. We suggest that you should not make use of additional functions until your model is ying perfectly, so that you will be in a position to recognise and appreciate any improvements. Whenever possible, it is always best to implement additional re nements one at a time, other-

wise you wont know which change has brought about any improvement. Bear in mind that the good pilot is not recognised by the number of complex functions with which he can cope, but by the results he can obtain when ying a relatively simple set-up. 172 Programming example: model helicopter 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:172 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs48:172 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs60:173 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs60:173 For your notes 173 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 Appendix PRX (Power for Receiver) Order No. 4136 Graupner HoTT GPS / Vario module Order No. 33600 Graupner HoTT Vario module Order No. 33601 A highly developed stabilised receiver power supply with intelligent power management. The unit constitutes a stabilised user-selectable power supply for the receiver, and provides a further enhancement in the reliability of the airborne power supply. It is designed for use with different types of receiver battery, to ensure that it is straightforward and versatile in use. When the model is operating, even brief collapses in battery voltage are stored and displayed, offering the user the means of detecting a receiver battery which is not up to the job, or failing. For use with one or two receiver batteries (simultaneous discharge if two batteries are employed) Suitable for ve-cell or six-cell NiMH batteries, or two-cell LiPo or LiFe packs. Graupner/JR, G3.5, G2 and BEC connector systems. Three user-selectable receiver power voltage levels: 5.1 V / 5.5 V /

5.9 V. Two ultra-bright LEDs indicate the operational status of batteries 1 and 2 separately. Integral high-quality On / Off switch. Constructed to cope with high-current applications. Low-pro le switch and LEDs to avoid spoiling the appearance and ef ciency of the model. Straight-through design of mounting lugs, LEDs and switch for sim-

ple installation using drilling template (supplied). Vario with altitude signals and ve different tones for climb and descent, plus GPS with range measurement, distance measurement, speed indicator, display of ight direction and co-ordinates Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-

stage climb and descent rate Altitude display, storage of min. and max. altitude Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once The GPS / Vario sensor can be connected directly to the receivers telemetry input. Speci cation, vario Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m Resolution: 0.1 m Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, program-

mable per beep Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured val-

ue, programmable Vario with altitude signals and ve different tones for climb and descent; altitude display and storage of min. and max. altitude. Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-

stage climb and descent rate Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once The vario sensor can be connected directly to the receivers telem-

etry input. Speci cation Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m Resolution: 0.1 m Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, program-

mable per beep Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured value, programmable 174 Appendix 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:174 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:174 06.06.2011 19:39:48 06.06.2011 19:39:48 Graupner HoTT General Engine Module Order No. 33610 Graupner HoTT General Air Module Order No. 33611 Graupner HoTT Electric Air-Module Order No. 33620 General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with internal-

combustion or electric power system:

2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current Programmable current limiting Current measurement with 2 x 1 mOhm shunt resistors in parallel =

0.5 mOhm Rev-count measurement and warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational speed Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (re-

quires software update) User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-

stant User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120C or 200C, also voltage measurement up to 80 V DC 1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade pro-

peller 1 x speed controller / servo input, 1 x speed governor input, 1 x speed controller / servo output for rotational speed governor etc. see product at www.graupner.de General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with internal-

combustion or electric power system:

Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and addition-

al warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, climb and two-

stage descent rate Altitude indicator (-500 +3000 m), storage of min. and max. alti-

tude 2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current Rev-count measurement and programmable speed governor, also warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational speed Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (re-

quires software update) User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-

stant User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120C or 200C, also voltage measurement up to 80 V DC 1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade pro-

peller etc. see product at www.graupner.de General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and electric-powered models:

Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and addition-

al warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-stage climb and descent rate Altitude indicator (-500 +3000 m), storage of min. and max. alti-

tude. 2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature Individual cell measurement 2 ... 14S with min. voltage warning thresholds Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-

stant User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120C or 200C, also voltage measurement up to 80 V DC 1 x speed controller input, 1 x speed controller output for power re-

duction due to low voltage of individual cells 1 x current, voltage and capacity measurement, up to 150 A (peak 1 sec. 320 A) and up to 60 V 1 x individual cell monitoring for 2 - 14S Lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, LiFe) etc. see product at www.graupner.de 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:175 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:175 Appendix 175 06.06.2011 19:39:52 06.06.2011 19:39:52 Graupner HoTT RPM magnet sensor Order No. 33616 Graupner HoTT RPM optical sensor Order No. 33615 Optional speech output module for Graupner mx-12 HoTT Order No. 33001.71 This optional module forms the output device for the transmitters audible signals as well as the signals and speech output associated with the Telemetry menu. All speech output is in the German language as standard. To use the module you will also need standard headphones or an earphone with a 3.5 mm barrel connector, which can be purchased from any electrical retailer. The volume of the earphone socket can be adjusted in the Voice volume line of the General settings menu; see page 115. Graupner HoTT Smart-Box Order No. 33700 A vast range of different functions combined in a single device: thats what destines the SMART-BOX to be your intelligent companion in future. Whether you want to display telemetry data in real time, or enter changes to your HoTT system, the large-area screen with 8 x 21 characters makes the task simple. The exible Smart-Box includes an integral buzzer for generating audible signals and warnings for even greater exibility and practicality. The installation set supplied makes it easy to mount the unit on the support bars of hand-held transmitters, allowing you to position it in such a way that you can read off telemetry data in real time while you control your model. The user-update facility ensures that the SMART-BOX is always up-to-

date, and provides a route for expanded functions in future. Country setting Transmitter voltage display with user-variable warning threshold Range check Receiver temperature Servo reverse Servo travel Channel swap Mixer settings Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H) Weight: approx. 55g Signal quality Receiver voltage Servo neutral position Cycle time Fail-Safe settings Servo test 176 Appendix 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:176 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs49:176 06.06.2011 19:39:56 06.06.2011 19:39:56 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-

ferent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech-

nician for help. RF Exposure Statement This device has been evaluated to meet the FCC RF exposure requirement when used in combination with the genuine Graupner HoTT accessoires and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna and your body. FCC Information Graupner mx-12 HoTT #33112 FCC ID: ZGZ-mx-12 FCC Label Compliance Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, 2. including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration. WARNING:

Changes or modi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-

ates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-

cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 178 FCC Information 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs55:178 33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs55:178 06.06.2011 19:39:58 06.06.2011 19:39:58